EMR3.0 Operation GuideV4.0.30

SUMAVISION
Operating Instructions
n
io
Integrated Media Processing Platform
Enhanced Multimedia Router
is
av
um
S
SUMAVISION TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

SUMAVISION EMR Operation Introduction
Introduction
Statement
The product in this manual is:

Enhanced Multimedia Router—an integrated media processing platform
n
The version of this manual is V4.0.30
This product is professional device, the professional operators are required and
operating temperature has to be following the introduction.
io
This manual provides complete configuration introductions of EMR series. User can
choose to read relevant parts of this manual according to the equipment purchased.
Any change or version upgrade of this manual will not notice again.。
This manual may appear inconsistent with the content update, and the purchased
functional cards may not match to the introduction
is
Without paper permission of Sumavision Technologies Co., Ltd, any company or
individuals are not allowed to extract, copy part or all of this book, and spread in any
form.
Sumavision Technologies Co., Ltd. Copyright and all rights reserved
av
The Agreements of the Instructions
Before reading the Instructions, please read the following agreements carefully:
1. Font and format
 The texts in the Instructions are prepared by using V Arial typeface;
 The first-level titles in the Instructions are prepared in bold using II Arial typeface,
um
the second-level titles are prepared in bold using III Arial typeface, and the
third-level titles are prepared in bold using IV Arial typeface;
 All the notes of the Instructions are prepared by using regular Arial, and are
separated before and after the texts by using "=======";
2. Keyboard operation
 The Arial characters in “<>” refer to the key name or button name, for instance
<Enter>, <Tab>, <Back Space> are refer to Return, Tab, Backspace respectively.
S
 <Key 1 + Key 2> refers to pressing the key 1 and key 2 on the keyboard at the same
time, for instance <Ctrl+Alt+A> refers to pressing "Ctrl", "Alt" and "A" three keys at
the same time.
 < Key 1, Key 2> refers to pressing Key 1 first on the keyboard, releasing, and then
pressing Key 2, for instance <Alt, D> refers to pressing <Alt> key, after releasing the
key and then pressing <D> key.
3. Mouse operation
 Click: Quickly press and release a mouse button.

 Double-click: Press twice quickly and release a mouse button.
 Drag: Hold down a mouse button, and move the mouse.
4. Signs
 Note, carefulness, warning and danger: to remind users the matters should be
paid attention to in the day-to-day maintenance and operation.
 Description, prompts and tips: to necessarily add and describe the descriptions
n
of the operation contents.
 Help: to describe in detail the parts of the operation contents that it is not easy for
io
users to understand.
Target Readers
This manual introduces the functions and methods of using and maintaining the integrated
media processing platform--EMR, and is applicable to the following readers:
 Digital video/audio engineering technicians

 is
Digital video/audio system administrators
Digital video/audio system engineers
Contact Us
av
Sumavision Technologies Co., Ltd. is committed to providing a full range of technical
support. When users are not familiar with the device or any fault of the device occurs, it is
recommended not to disassemble the device, but to contact Sumavision Office or the
After-sales Technical Support Department of the Company.
You can contact us by the following addresses:
Address: Building 1, No.15 Kaituo Road, Shangdi Information and Industry Base, Haidian
um
District, Beijing, CHINA, 100085

After-sales Technical Support Hotline: 8008103018
24-hour hotline: +8613911310981
Website: www.sumavision.com
S
Content
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................. 1
1.1 NETWORK SOLUTION ................................................................................................................ 1

1.2 MAIN PERFORMANCE PARAMETERS ......................................................................................... 2
CHAPTER 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS .................................................................................. 6
2.1 PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION ........................................................................................................ 6
n
2.2 APPEARANCE ............................................................................................................................ 6
2.2.1 Indicator .............................................................................................................................. 7
2.2.2 LCD ..................................................................................................................................... 8
io
2.2.3 Liquid crystal key................................................................................................................. 8
2.2.4 Connector of the Device ...................................................................................................... 9
CHAPTER 3 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ..................................................................................... 11
3.1 OUTLINE DIMENSIONS ............................................................................................................ 11

3.2
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
is
WEIGHT .................................................................................................................................. 11
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................... 11
Requirements on Transportation Environment .................................................................. 11
Site room environmental requirements .............................................................................. 11
av
3.3.3 Heat Emission Descriptions .............................................................................................. 13
3.3.4 Power supply requirement ................................................................................................. 14
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND DEBUGGING .................................................................. 15
4.1 UNPACKING AND CHECKING ................................................................................................... 15

4.2 INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS ................................................................................................. 15
um
4.3 STEPS AND METHODS OF INSTALLATION ................................................................................. 15

4.4 DEBUGGING ............................................................................................................................ 16
4.5 METHODS FOR DEBUGGING AND TESTING .............................................................................. 17
CHAPTER 5 OPERATING METHODS ...................................................................................... 18
5.1 WEB NETWORK MANAGEMENT .............................................................................................. 18

5.1.1 Operating Method.............................................................................................................. 18
5.1.2 System Setting .................................................................................................................... 23
S
5.2 SNMP NETWORK MANAGEMENT ........................................................................................... 33

5.2.1 Operating Method.............................................................................................................. 34
5.2.2 System configuration ......................................................................................................... 36
5.3 BOARD CARD DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................... 38
5.3.1 Main GbE Card ................................................................................................................. 39
5.3.2 5 Input ASI Card ................................................................................................................ 56
5.3.3 4 Output ASI Card ............................................................................................................. 57
5.3.4 ASI 5InOut Card ................................................................................................................ 59

5.3.5 DS3 adapter Card .............................................................................................................. 69
5.3.6 SFN Card ........................................................................................................................... 75
5.3.7 SFN Correction Card ......................................................................................................... 80
5.3.8 DS3 In4 Card ..................................................................................................................... 85
5.3.9 DS3 Two-Way Adapter Card .............................................................................................. 87
5.3.10 6-Ch.QAM Card ............................................................................................................ 95
5.3.11 DVB-T/H-4 Mod. Card .................................................................................................. 97
n
5.3.12 DVB-S/S2 Mod. Card................................................................................................... 102
5.3.13 8VSB Modulation Card................................................................................................ 104
5.3.14 16 Channel QAM Modulation Card ............................................................................ 105
io
5.3.15 ISDB-T/Tb Card ...........................................................................................................111
5.3.16 MPEG2 SD AENC Card .............................................................................................. 118
5.3.17 MPEG2 SD DENC Card ............................................................................................. 121
5.3.18 Analog SD ENC Card .................................................................................................. 123
5.3.19
5.3.20
5.3.21
5.3.22
5.3.23
is
Digital SD ENC Card .................................................................................................. 125
DVI Enc Card .............................................................................................................. 128
AVC HD ENC Card ..................................................................................................... 130
AVC Digital ENC Card ................................................................................................ 138
ENC TRC Card ............................................................................................................ 142
av
5.3.24 High Density TRC Card ............................................................................................... 146
5.3.25 TRC Card ..................................................................................................................... 153
5.3.26 AVS DIGITAL ENC TRC Card .................................................................................... 157
5.3.27 AVS ENC TRC Card .................................................................................................... 162
5.3.28 AVS+ Multi ENC Card ................................................................................................ 165
5.3.29 SD-ADEC Card ........................................................................................................... 168
um
5.3.30 ANA DEC TRC Card ................................................................................................... 172

5.3.31 Digital DEC TRC Card ............................................................................................... 177
5.3.32 4K DEC Card .............................................................................................................. 184
5.3.33 Descramble Card ......................................................................................................... 191
5.3.34 DVB-S2 Desc Card ...................................................................................................... 195
5.3.35 ABS-S Demod Card ..................................................................................................... 202
5.3.36 DVB-C Demod Desc Card ........................................................................................... 205
S
5.3.37 DVB-S2 Demod Desc Card ......................................................................................... 215

5.3.38 ABS-S Demod Desc Card ............................................................................................ 225
5.3.39 4-Ch.DVB-T2 Demod Card ......................................................................................... 235
5.3.40 4-Ch.DVB-S2 Demod card .......................................................................................... 239
5.3.41 DVB-S2 Demod Card .................................................................................................. 242
5.3.42 ISDB-T Demod Card ................................................................................................... 250
5.3.43 8VSB Demod Card....................................................................................................... 255
5.3.44 DTMB Demod Card ..................................................................................................... 261

5.3.45 StatMux4 Card ............................................................................................................. 265
5.3.46 CA01B Switch Card ..................................................................................................... 269
5.3.47 ASI Switch Card Type-D .............................................................................................. 279
5.3.48 DS3 Switch Card ......................................................................................................... 295
5.3.49 RF Switch Card ........................................................................................................... 300
5.3.50 Demod Switch Card ..................................................................................................... 312
5.3.51 T2MI Replacer Card .................................................................................................... 320
n
5.3.52 T2MI De-encap. Card.................................................................................................. 329
5.3.53 Stream Processing Card .............................................................................................. 342
5.3.54 EPG Processing Card .................................................................................................. 347
io
CHAPTER 6 INTRODUCTION FOR SENIOR FUNCTION ................................................. 355
6.1 TABLE EDITING FUNCTION .................................................................................................... 355

6.1.1 NIT table edition .............................................................................................................. 355
6.1.2 CAT table edition ............................................................................................................. 371
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.1.3
is
SDT table edition ............................................................................................................. 381
MASSIVE MODIFICATION FUNCTION ...................................................................................... 390
OUTPUT SETTINGS ................................................................................................................ 392
BACKUP SETTINGS ................................................................................................................ 393
av
6.4.1 Service Backup ................................................................................................................ 393
6.4.2 Port Backup ..................................................................................................................... 396
6.5 SCRAMBLING SETTINGS ........................................................................................................ 398
6.5.1 Introduction to WEB Scrambling ..................................................................................... 398
6.5.2 Programme scrambling settings ...................................................................................... 409
CHAPTER 7 FAULT ANALYSIS AND TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................ 414

um
7.1 ALARM INFORMATION .......................................................................................................... 414

7.1.1 LCD does not display after powering on ......................................................................... 415
CHAPTER 8 MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................. 416
8.1 MAINTENANCE METHOD ....................................................................................................... 416

8.2 MAINTENANCE DETAILS ....................................................................................................... 416
8.3 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................................... 417
S
8.4 MONTHLY MAINTENANCE ..................................................................................................... 418

8.5 QUARTERLY MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................. 418
8.6 ANNUAL MAINTENANCE....................................................................................................... 418
8.7 CLEAN-UP AND MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................. 419
8.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................... 419
CHAPTER 9 STORAGE AND TRANSPORT ........................................................................... 420
9.1 STORAGE .............................................................................................................................. 420

9.2 TRANSPORT .......................................................................................................................... 420
ANNEX A- INTERFACE PARAMETER .................................................................................... 421
ANNEX B- DEVICE UPGRADE ................................................................................................. 425
ANNEX C- UPGRADE OF SPECIAL BOARD CARD ............................................................ 428
1. DSP DRIVE UPGRADING METHOD FOR SD-ADEC CARD ........................................................... 428
ANNEX D- WARNING INFORMATION ..................................................................................... 429
n
1. WARNING LIST OF MAIN GBE CARD ......................................................................................... 429
2. WARNING LIST OF 5 INPUT ASI CARD ....................................................................................... 432
3. WARNING LIST OF 4 OUTPUT ASI CARD.................................................................................... 433
io
4. WARNING LIST OF ASI 5INOUT CARD ....................................................................................... 434
5. WARNING LIST OF DS3 ADAPTER CARD .................................................................................... 437
6. WARNING LIST OF SFN CARD ................................................................................................... 440
7. WARNING LIST OF SFN CORRECTION CARD.............................................................................. 441
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
is
WARNING LIST OF DS3 IN4 CARD ............................................................................................. 441
WARNING LIST OF DS3 TWO-WAY ADAPTER CARD .................................................................. 442
WARNING LIST OF 6-CH.QAM CARD .................................................................................... 445
WARNING LIST OF DVB-T/H-4 MOD. CARD ......................................................................... 446
WARNING LIST OF DVB-S/S2 MOD. CARD ........................................................................... 448
av
13. WARNING LIST OF 16 CHANNEL QAM MODULATION CARD ................................................. 450
14. WARNING LIST OF ISDB-T/TB CARD .................................................................................... 451
15. WARNING LIST OF MPEG2 SD AENC CARD ........................................................................ 452
16. WARNING LIST OF MPEG2 SD DENC CARD ........................................................................ 453
17. WARNING LIST OF ANALOG SD ENC CARD .......................................................................... 454
18. WARNING LIST OF DIGITAL SD ENC CARD ........................................................................... 455
um
19. WARNING LIST OF DVI ENC CARD ........................................................................................ 457

20. WARNING LIST OF AVC HD ENC CARD ............................................................................... 457
21. WARNING LIST OF AVC DIGITAL ENC CARD ........................................................................ 458
22. WARNING LIST OF ENC TRC CARD ...................................................................................... 458
23. WARNING LIST OF HIGH DENSITY TRC CARD....................................................................... 459
24. WARNING LIST OF TRC CARD ............................................................................................... 460
25. WARNING LIST OF AVS DIGITAL ENC TRC CARD ............................................................. 461
S
26. WARNING LIST OF AVS ENC TRC CARD .............................................................................. 462

27. WARNING LIST OF AVS+ MULTI ENC CARD ......................................................................... 462
28. WARNING LIST OF SD-ADEC CARD ..................................................................................... 463
29. WARNING LIST OF ANA DEC TRC CARD ............................................................................. 465
30. WARNING LIST OF DIGITAL DEC TRC CARD ........................................................................ 466
31. WARNING LIST OF 4K DEC CARD ......................................................................................... 468
32. WARNING LIST OF DESCRAMBLE CARD ................................................................................ 469
33. WARNING LIST OF DVB-S2 DESC CARD ............................................................................... 470

34. WARNING LIST OF ABS-S DEMOD CARD .............................................................................. 471
35. WARNING LIST OF DVB-C DEMOD DESC CARD ................................................................... 473
36. WARNING LIST OF DVB-S2 DEMOD DESC CARD .................................................................. 474
37. WARNING LIST OF ABS-S DEMOD DESC CARD ..................................................................... 476
38. WARNING LIST OF 4-CH.DVB-T2 DEMOD CARD .................................................................. 477
39. WARNING LIST OF 4-CH.DVB-S2 DEMOD CARD ................................................................... 478
40. WARNING LIST OF DVB-S2 DEMOD CARD ........................................................................... 479
n
41. WARNING LIST OF ISDB-T DEMOD CARD............................................................................. 479
42. WARNING LIST OF 8VSB DEMOD CARD................................................................................ 480
43. WARNING LIST OF DTMB DEMOD CARD .............................................................................. 481
io
44. WARNING LIST OF STATMUX4 CARD .................................................................................... 482
45. WARNING LIST OF CA01B SWITCH CARD ............................................................................. 483
46. WARNING LIST OF ASI SWITCH CARD TYPE-D ..................................................................... 485
47. WARNING LIST OF DS3 SWITCH CARD .................................................................................. 487
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
is
WARNING LIST OF RF SWITCH CARD .................................................................................... 488
WARNING LIST OF DEMOD SWITCH CARD ............................................................................. 491
WARNING LIST OF T2MI REPLACER CARD............................................................................ 492
WARNING LIST OF T2MI DE-ENCAP. CARD ........................................................................... 494
WARNING LIST OF STREAM PROCESSING CARD .................................................................... 496
av
53. WARNING LIST OF EPG PROCESSING CARD .......................................................................... 497
54. WARNING LIST OF EMR ........................................................................................................ 498
55. WARNING LIST OF SERVICE BACKUP ..................................................................................... 500
56. WARNING LIST OF PORT BACKUP .......................................................................................... 502
um
S
Chapter 1 Overview
SUMAVISION Enhanced Multimedia Route, which can be abbreviated to EMR, is a
new generation multi-media exchange platform. This device, which uses 1U card plug-in
structure, and supports at most 6 boards (cards) as well as dual-power redundancy
backup. The platform integrates multiple functions such as encoding, decoding,
multiplexing, modulation, IP input/output and adaption, can be configured flexibly
n
according to the different needs of users, and meet the vast number of operators”
demands for integrated devices and multiple functions in the process of digital TV
head-end platform construction sufficiently.
io
1.1 Network Solution
The typical networking of EMR is shown as Fig. 1-1 EMR Networking Diagram. EMR
platform is matched with many cards to form flexible combinations. EMR platform is
suitable for encoding and decoding, adaptation, and descrambling of reception and
is
demodulation of the programming stage, and multiplexing, independent scrambling,
adaptation and modulation, and signal switch of the back end. EMR may realize the full IP
networking and backup of various levels and guarantee the efficient, safe and stable
running of the whole system.
av
um
S
Fig. 1-1 EMR Networking Diagram

Fig. 1-1 EMR Networking Diagram, EMR receives and encodes & compresses the
analog or digital TV video & audio signals; and can also receive and adapt the adaptive
signals such as DS3 and ATM; additionally, it can receive and demodulate the satellite
signals as TS, and transmit TS stream into the multiplex level, then multiplex with EPG
information to become a standard DVB stream, which will be encrypted by the scrambler
1 /503
and CAS, and modulated, finally transmitted on HFC network.
1.2 Main Performance Parameters

 Overall performance
 Modularized plug-in design, 1U chassis and 6 slots;
 Rich interface types: duplex billibit IP interface, configurable ASI I/O interface,
DS3/E3 IO interface, DVB-C/S/S2/T/T2 demodulation receiving and
n
modulation output interface, HD-SDI/SDI, CVBS and other video and audio
interfaces;
io
 Strong processing power and flexible re-multiplex capacity: data throughput
capacity as high as 8.5Gbps;
 Support the processing of PSI/SI under DVB standard and PSIP & ISDB
under ATSC standard;

is
Support various safety backup mode: backup of program level, port level,
Ethernet port level and equipment level;
Supports diversified user interfaces and managements: support Web control,

support the emanager control based on SNMP v1/v2 and support Mib library
av
for third party integration under SNMP v1/v2c standard;
 IP processing module
 IP interface quantity: four GbE Internet accesses and 2+2 inputs and outputs;
 IP interface type: SFP, support the single mode, multi-mode and electrical
interface;
um
 IP interface backup: input Ethernet port backup, output Ethernet port backup
and output port backup;
 IP encapsulation means: TS over RTP/UDP, TS packet length input adapts to

188/204 and output can be configured with 188/204;
 Single Ethernet port supports 256 logical input/output ports at most; the
maximum band width of single port is as high as 200Mbps;
S
 Support various network management protocols as ARP, ICMP,

IGMPv1/v2/v3 and etc.
 Support the real-time code rate monitoring function of Internet access;
 Support the forward error correction function and comply with the standards
SMPTE 2022-1 and SMPTE 2022-2;
2 /503
 Support the senior functions of IEEE 802.Q VLAN Tagging;
 TS Input
 Support the automatic/manual search for PSI/SI table under DVB standard,
PSIIP table under ATSC standard and ISDB;
 Support the search for all PIDs (including the non-appointed PID);
 Support the table preview and store function;
n
 Support the inquiry for code rate, effective code rate and single PID code rate
inputted into the system;
io
 Adapt to 188/204;
 TS Output
 Have the function of edition, altering and insertion for PSI/SI table;
 Have the TDT/TOT table transmission function;

213Mbps;
188/204 configurable;
is
The maximum code rate output from the system via single port is as high as
av
 Have the PID value mapping function;
 Scrambling module
 Independent scrambling module, independent control, simple and convenient

web operation;
 Scrambling for 542 ports at most;

um
 Maximum 6,144 ECMs;
 EIS supports DVB and OpenCAS standards;
 Several ports can use the same EMM;
 Each port supports the simulcrypt of six CASs;
 Descrambling and demodulating module

S
 Have the CAM descrambling, BISS-1/E descrambling function;
 Support the DVB-C/S/S2/T/T2 demodulation;
 Demodulate QPSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 128QAM, 256QAM, 16APSK and

32APSK modes;
 Compatible to C/Ku wave band;
3 /503
 Monitor signal strength, signal to noise ratio and error rate;
 T2MI de-multiplexing/encapsulation and appointed PLP_ID

de-multiplexing/de-encapsulation;
 Backup module
 Program backup: authorize the controllable and backup modes;
 Port backup: authorize the controllable and backup modes;
n
 1+1/2+2 GbE input backup: backup modes and arbitration conditions are
available for setting;
io
 1+1/2+2 GbE output backup;
 Senior backup for GbE UDP output port;
 EPG module
 Editable: xml format;

is
Multiplex: automatic multiplex EIT information, filter EIT information and
automatic match the TS Id/Net Id/service Id with output;
 Coding, decoding and transcoding module

av
 Video: SD/HD, MPEG-2/H.264, 4:2:2/4:2:0, 10bit low latency and low bitrate;
 Audio: MPEG-1 Layer2, AAC, Dobly 2.0/Dobly Plus 2.0, Four Audio Per Video
and Audio Passthrough;
 Backboard module
 Have the strong log recording function;

um
 Have the clock synchronization SNTP function;
 Have the complete warning management function;
 Non-delay/low-delay design of backboard, maximum delay of 18us;
 Support port-level transparent transmission of code stream
 The Xml format is used for storing the parameter, which is convenient for
S
analysis and off-line configuration and also can provide supports for
compatibility of version parameters.
 LCD display page, keypad control and LED state indication;
 Completely independent control Internet access, scrambling Ethernet port

and service Internet access;
 The duplicate supply supports the hot plug;
4 /503
 On-line and remote upgrade and convenient maintenance.
n
io
is
av
um
S
5 /503
Chapter 2 Product Descriptions

2.1 Product Identification
There are product name, model and manufacturer, etc. on the front panel of EMR, as
shown in Fig. 2-1 EMR Front Panel.
Company’s trademark
n
io
Name & Model
Fig. 2-1 EMR Front Panel
Product name: Integrated Media Processing Platform
Model: EMR3.0, as shown in Fig. 2-1 EMR Front Panel.
Manufacturer: Sumavision Technologies Co., Ltd., as shown in Fig. 2-1 EMR Front Panel.
is
Identification description: there’s the ex-factory identification on the rear panel of the
device, as shown in Fig. 2-2 Ex-factory Identification.
1202EMR30B0001
av
Fig. 2-2 Ex-factory Identification
Where, “S/N” refers to the ex-factory serial number, “EMR30B” stands for the device
model and “0001” is the production code.
2.2 Appearance
EMR appearance is shown as Fig. 2-3 EMR Appearance.
um
LCD display
Installed Indicator LCD button Control & Gigabit

S
component scrambling input/output
Fig. 2-3 EMR Appearance

＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
Press LCD button to display IP and subnet mask information of the device.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
6 /503
2.2.1 Indicator
There are 8 indicators on EMR front panel, including:

 Power
 Run/Alarm
 Operating indicators (1-6)
Connect to the power supply and turn on the power switch, the indicator of Power
n
keep lighting.
When the device starts and operates normally, there is no abnormality, the indicator
of Run/Alarm on the device panel will turn green.
io
When the device operates abnormally, the indicator of Run/Alarm on the device panel
will turn red, which prompts the user that an error has occurred. When the backboard or
gigabit master card encounters any abnormity, the run/alarm light will be lightened to be
red. Please login the WEB network management of the device to check the alarm
information to investigate the abnormity.
is
Operating indicators of 1 to 6 are used to indicate the operating status of slot 1 to 6
respectively, and the indicator of Alarm is used to indicate the device status.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
After the device has been powered on, generally the indicator of power will keep
av
lighting once the device is started.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
Table 2-1 Description for the operating status of indicator 1 lists the operating status of
indicator 1 by taking one MPEG2 analog encoding card in slot 1 as an example.
Table 2-1 Description for the operating status of indicator 1
um
Operating Signal Multiplexing Indicator

No. Encoder Slot
indicator source or not result
Encoder 1 Y Y
1
Encoder 2 Y Y
Encoder 1 Y Y
2
Encoder 2 — N
Green
Encoder 1 — N
3
Encoder 2 Y Y
Indicator 1 Slot 1
Encoder 1 — N
4
Encoder 2 — N
S
Encoder 1 — Y
5
Encoder 2 N Y
Red
Encoder 1 N Y
6
Encoder 2 — Y
Indicator 1 can be divided into six kinds of status as shown in the table above, “Y”
stands for normal or Yes; “N” refers to abnormal or No; "—" denotes the content has
nothing to do with this item. The user may login the WEB network management of the
device to check the [Alarm] page in the [General] to inquire the detailed alarm content.
7 /503
The operating indicator of slot 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 has the same status of indicator 1.
Here no repeated description will be made.
Since the gigabit master card is not equipped with the independently alarm light, if
lights 1-6 are all green but the Run/Alarm light is red, it is possible that the gigabit master
card is abnormal, the rotational speed of the fan is abnormal or the voltage of the power
module is abnormal.
n
2.2.2 LCD
EMR LCD displays the information of the device (network information, Warning
io
information, Equipment sequence number, Connecting state of Main GbE Card Internet
access, etc.).
2.2.3 Liquid crystal key

is
One key is provided nearby the EMR liquid crystal, which can be pressed for
switching the displayed information. The operation method is as follows:
Initialization of debugging state: press the key for 3s when starting the equipment.
The equipment shall not load any daughter card and initialize the debugging
av
mode;
 Recovery of default network parameter: press the key for 3s when starting the
equipment to initialize the debugging mode. Release the key for 3s and press the
same for 3s to initialize the default network parameter mode;
 Upgrade: press the key for more than 5s when electrifying the equipment; modify
um
the IP address modification of the computer attached to the equipment to

“192.168.1.254” and modify the subnet mask to “255.255.255.0”; and double
click the “backboard upgrade document\kernel upgrade document\updata.bat” to
upgrade kernel;
 Initialization of LCD backlight: if the LCD backlight is turned off during the normal
operation of equipment, press the key the initialize the LCD backlight.
 Switch for displayed information on LCD: when the LCD backlight is illumed
S
during the normal operation of equipment, the type of displayed information will
be switched by keeping pressing on the key. If the key is pressed, the following
display type will be circulated: warning informationnetwork
informationequipment sequence numberconnection status for Main GbE
Card Ethernet portoperation status of equipment
8 /503
The category of information displayed on LCD is as shown in the table below:
Table 2-1 Type of information displayed on LCD
Type of displayed
Display format Description
information
Running state of Display when the LCD

equipment ALARM!/OK! backlight is turned off.
n
Highlight the default display
category after the LCD
backlight. y refers to the
Warning information (x/y)alarm information total warning number and x
refers to the current warning
io
sequence number.
Highlight the control

interface IP address
network information: IP
IP/MASK:xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/n displayed on LCD and
address/subnet mask
subnet mask and n refers to
the prefix length.
Equipment sequence
number
Connecting state of
primary Gigabit Ethernet
card Internet access
is
SN: backboard sequence
number with 12 bit length
GbE:1101
Highlight LCD display
Highlight LCD display, 1

refers to connection and 0
refers to non-connection
av
 Return to the information head displayed currently: after highlighting the LCD
backlight during the normal operation of equipment, keep pressing the key to
switch to the new display information, release the key, and press the key again to
display the information from the head to bottom again.
 Return to operation status display of equipment: operate without the key for 10s
um
to return to display the operation status of equipment;
 LCD backlight extinguish: operate without the key for 30s to extinguish the LCD
backlight.
2.2.4 Connector of the Device
SUMAVISION EMR rear panel adopts the form of sub-panels. 6 slots formed with 6
S
sub-panels can be handled independently, which can facilitate the plugging and
un-plugging of sub-cards. Ground terminal, power switch are placed on the rear panel,
see Fig. 2-4 Appearance of SUMAVISION EMR Rear Panel.
Definition of slot: lower left Slot 1; lower center Slot 2; lower right Slot 3; upper left
Slot 4; upper center Slot 5; upper right Slot 6.
EMR card is flexible in settings and not limited in the slot (the port of some cards
occupies two slots).
9 /503
Fig. 2-4 Appearance of SUMAVISION EMR Rear Panel
n
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
User can select to read relevant part of the Instructions according to the Platform
settings purchased.
io
The board card does not support the hot plugging.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
2.2.4.1 Power socket
EMR provides two power sockets on the rear panel. The device will be powered on if
is
the power lead is insert the power socket correctly.
The power sockets used by EMR fully conform to the international industrial
standards, for detailed information, refer to Annex 3 Power Socket Parameters.
av
um
S
10 /503
Chapter 3 Safety Precautions

3.1 Outline Dimensions
EMR external structure is shown as Table 3-1 EMR Physical Parameters.
Table 3-1 EMR Physical Parameters
Physical Parameters Value (Unit)
Height 44.4mm (1U)
n
Width 482.6mm (19")
Depth 564.7mm
3.2 Weight
io
The device weights <7.5kg, and its specific quality is related to the configurations of
the device. Please be subject to the device actually purchased.
3.3 Environmental Requirements
is
3.3.1 Requirements on Transportation Environment
The device must be handled prudently and carefully to avoid damages to the device.
Ensure that people who transport, maintain or operate the device have professional skills
av
and are familiar with the operation of device. If there’s any question during the transport,
maintenance and operation of the device, please contact the Aftersales Technical Support
Department of Sumavision, with the way to contact refering to the foregoing contents.
The device is high-grade electronic product, and should be handled gently and kept
away from falling or collision. And additionally, attention should be paid to the following:
 Please do not place this device on unstable trolleys, shelves, brackets or tables,
um
otherwise, the device may fall and cause serious damages, which can lead to abnormal
operation.
 During transportation, the trolley used to transport the device should be kept balance.
When user has arrived at the designated location or have to stop on the way, ensure
whether the trolley is reliable first, and then stop moving to aviod the falling of device,
causing malfunction.
 Please arrange special person to transport or install this device, and avoid many
persons participating in the transportation.
S
3.3.2 Site room environmental requirements
 Site room area:

The front door and back door of the cabinet should leave at least 1.2m to 1.5m for
opening the door or routine maintenance. The cabinet can not be installed against the wall,
11 /503
and the distance between the cabinet side and the wall should be not less than 0.8m.
 Site room floor:
Site room floor should be non-conductive, dust-proof, and its surface smoothness
error should be less than 2mm per square meter. The volume resistivity of anti-static
material should range from 1×107Ω to 1×1020Ω, and the ground current-limiting resistor is
1MΩ. Floor load-bearing should be larger than 450kg/ m2.
 Environment temperature:
n
The device can operate normally in the environment whose temperature ranges from
10℃ to 40℃, and the places where conditions permit can install air-conditioning system
for cooling.
io
 Relative humidity:
Normal working humidity: ≤90% (20℃);
Allowed working humidity: ≤95% (without condensation).
 Environmental pressure:
86-105kpa.
 Site room doors and windows:
is
Doors and windows of the site room should be sealed with dust-proof rubber strips,
and windows should be double-glazed and strictly sealed.
 Site room wall suface:
av
The wall suface of site room can use wallpapers or be printed with lusterless paint,
however, powder coating is not suitable.
 Air cleanliness:
The requirements are shown as Table 3-2 Site room dust indicators and Table 3-3 Site
room harmful gas indicators.
um
Table 3-2 Site room dust indicators

Maximum diameter (μm) 0.05 1.00 3.00 5.00
Maximum concentration (particles per cubic meter) 14×105 7×105 24×104 13×104
Table 3-3 Site room harmful gas indicators

Gas Average (mg/m3) Max. (mg/m3)
Sulfur dioxide SO2 0.20 1.50
Hydrogen sulfide, H2S 0.01 0.30
Nitrogen dioxide, NO2 0.04 0.15
S
Ammonia, NH3 0.05 0.15

Chlorine, Cl2 0.01 0.30
 Fire-fighting requirements:
Site room should be equipped with automatic fire alarm system, hand-held
extinguishing system or fixed extinguishing system.
 Power supply requirements:
12 /503
The devices, air-conditioning system and lighting system should have their own
power system respectively.
3.3.3 Heat Emission Descriptions
There are two exhaust fans installed inside the EMR to lower the risen temperature
caused by the working chips during the operation of the device.
EMR exhaust flow is shown as Fig. 3-1 Exhaust Diagram.
n
Inlet channel
io
Inlet channel
Exhaust channel
is
Exhaust channel
av
Fig. 3-1 Exhaust Diagram
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
Do not block the exhaust channel when installing the device.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
um
S
13 /503
3.3.4 Power supply requirement
Parameters for normal operation of EMR are shown as follows:

 Power supply:
Voltage: 100V-240V AC;
Power frequency: 50Hz-60Hz
 Power consumption: < 200W (Actual power associated with the device
n
configuration)
 Nominal fuse: 2A
 Grounding: the device should be well grounded through the ground
io
terminal.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The DC power supply can be used as the power source. The input voltage is
36-72V DC.
is
The power supply supports the dual power redundancy configuration.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
av
um
S
14 /503
Chapter 4 Installation and Debugging
4.1 Unpacking and Checking

Please check whether the package of the device is damaged or not when receiving
the device; in case of device’s damage, please contact the carrier company or the
n
After-sales Technical Support Department of Sumavision in a timely manner.
If you complete the installation and debugging of the device by yourself, please pay
attention to the deformation of device and abnormal sound inside the device when
io
unpacking the device; check whether the device model and name are in conformity with
those specified in the contract; whether the serial number of device is identical to that in
the Delivery and Maintenance Certificate of Device; and whether the power lead,
connectors and fittings, operating instructions and Certificate of Fitness are completely
contained in the package case of the device.
is
If the installation and debugging are conducted by the after-sales technical engineers
of Sumavision, they will confirm the above-mentioned information with you.
You are required to sign and return the Delivery and Maintenance Certificate of
Device to our company after confirming there’s no problem upon the unpacking and
av
inspection, and according to which we’ll provide high-quality satisfactory after-sales
services.
4.2 Installation Precautions

Check whether the environmental requirements in Section 3.3 of Chapter 3 have been
met.
um
The device can be powered on for debugging after the installation is completed by
following the installation steps.
4.3 Steps and Methods of Installation

EMR installed in 19-inch cabinets. On equipment installation, first open the box, take
out the device. In order to make installation safe, make sure you install L brackets on the
Cabinet firtst, and place the device installed on the L bracket, finally screw in the mounting
parts will be seated in the Assembly of this equipment cabinets.as shown in Fig. 4-1
S
Assembly cabinet for EMR.
15 /503
n
io
Fig. 4-1 Assembly cabinet for EMR
is
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The device can be installed in any plug-in frame of the assembly cabinet. However,
the general principle for arranging the location of the device is that the connection
between various stand-alone devices should be arranged neatly on the assembly
av
cabinet in accordance with the flow of signal.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
4.4 Debugging
Preparations before configuration:
 The device should be stably fixed on the cabinet, and the operation environment is
um
normal.
 The device should be connected to the ground very well.
 Check whether input video and audio signals are correct on the encoder side.
 The device has been connected to the power supply correctly.
 If network management is needed to control devices, please connect the device with
the computer.
Device power-on inspection:
 Indicators of the device display normal.
S
 Standby interface is displayed on the LCD of the device.

 Device keys can respond normally.
 The fans of the device can operate normally without harsh noise.
 No abnormal sounds and offensive smell.
16 /503
4.5 Methods for Debugging and Testing

EMR provides the function of Device IP address search through LCD display. The
button can be used to light the LCD normally to facilitate the use by users.
n
io
is
av
um
S
17 /503
Chapter 5 Operating Methods

This chapter mainly introduces the methods for system setting and use of EMR,
which may be helpful for users to know initial knowledge about the system setting and
operation steps of EMR. The system setting includes device IP, user management, factory
reset and restart; and the operating method is composed of input setting, multiplexing
setting and output interface operation.
n
5.1 Web Network Management
When setting the EMR the first time, searching IP address may be required, which
can be realized through LCD on the front panel of the EMR by pressing the buttons, at this
io
time, the LCD would display local device IP and subnet mask. Configure the computer IP
to enable it to access the device IP. Enter the IP address of EMR in the IE browser:
http://IP_address/, with the initial username as Admin and password as sumavisionrd. The
network management page is shown as Fig. 5-1 EMR WEB Network Management Page.
is
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The browser must support HTML 4.0. Internet Explorer 8.0, Firefox and Chrome
is recommended.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
av
um
S
Fig. 5-1 EMR WEB Network Management Page
5.1.1 Operating Method
EMR is the core head-end access device of digital TV. By configuring different board
cards, users can finish encoding, decoding, QPSK demodulation, DVB-S2 demodulation
and descrambling, QAM demodulation and descrambling, DS3 adaptive input/output,
18 /503
QAM modulation output, ASI multiplexing and routing, IP multiplexing and routing, TS and
IP signal scrambling, etc. To complete the configuration of device successfully, we”ll
describe basic operating processes of EMR through three parts: input section,
multiplexing section and output interface section.
EMR functions can be divided into three parts:
 Part one is about the input section. In consideration that each board card can
achieve different input functions, EMR input daughter card can be understood as
n
a separate device. For example, the encoding card is equivalent to an encoder,
QPSK card is equivalent to a satellite receiver, DS3 adapter card is equivalent to
the adapter, and the five ASI input card functions like the multiplexer.
io
 Part two is about the Multiplexing section which would be realized in multiplexing
page. The relationship between the input and output can be configured to
achieve the service exchange between the input interface and output interface.
 Part three is about the output interface, which output configuration should be
finished on the right side of the Multiplexing page.
is
To complete the configuration of EMR, the above-mentioned three functional modules
should be configured step by step. At first, it shall configure relevant parameters of the
board card such that the input board card can receive the input stream; then the multiplex
interface shall be logged in; and operate according to the operation steps
av
5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting to realize the output of the program multiplexing output board
card port.
5.1.1.1 Input Part
Configured with different cards, EMR platform may receive different types of program
sources. Details are:
um
 ASI input: EMR is configured with 5 Input ASI Card (see 5 Input ASI Card for
configuration method) or ASI 5InOut Card (see ASI 5InOut Card for configuration
method) to support ASI input;
 DS3/E3 input: EMR is configured with DS3 In4 Card (see DS3 In4 Card for
configuration method) or DS3 adapter Card (see DS3 adapter Card for
configuration method) to support DS3/E3 stream input;
 IP input: the Main GbE Card (see Main GbE Card for configuration method)
S
equipped on the platform may provide IP input to the platform;

 RF input: EMR is configured with DVB-S2 Desc Card (see DVB-S2 Desc Card for
configuration method) ,ABS-S Demod Card (see ABS-S Demod Card for
configuration method) ,DVB-C Demod Desc Card (see DVB-C Demod Desc Card
for configuration method) ,DVB-S2 Demod Desc Card (see DVB-S2 Demod Desc
Card for configuration method) , ABS-S Demod Desc Card (see ABS-S Demod
Desc Card for configuration method) ,4-Ch.DVB-T2 Demod Card (see
19 /503
4-Ch.DVB-T2 Demod Card for configuration method) , 4-Ch.DVB-S2 Demod card

(see 4-Ch.DVB-S2 Demod card for configuration method) , ISDB-T Demod Card
(see ISDB-T Demod Card for configuration method) , DTMB Demod card (see
DTMB Demod Card for configuration method) to support RF input;
 Analog video and audio input: EMR is configured with the MPEG2 SD AENC
Card (see MPEG2 SD AENC Card for configuration method) , Analog SD ENC
Card (see Analog SD ENC Card for configuration method) or DVI Enc Card (see
n
DVI Enc Card for configuration method) to support input and encoding of analog
video and audio;
 Digital video and audio input: EMR is configured with the MPEG2 SD DENC
io
Card (see MPEG2 SD DENC Card for configuration method) , Digital SD ENC
Card (see Digital SD ENC Card for configuration method) or DVI Enc Card (see
DVI Enc Card for configuration method) to support input and encoding of digital
video and audio.
5.1.1.2 Multiplexing Setting
is
The multiplexing page is shown as Fig. 5-2 Multiplexing Page of WEB Network
Management. The selected board card on the left is used as input source, which is
multiplexed to the output board card on the right by pressing the Multiplex button.
av
1
2 6 4
5
um
7
S
Fig. 5-2 Multiplexing Page of WEB Network Management

Step 1: Click “Multiplexing” in the network management page to navigate to the
20 /503
program multiplexing page;

Step 2: Choose the input card and wait for the Web network manager to
automatically refresh the input list, or click the right button to navigate to the input port to
manually refresh the input list;
Step 3: Select a program to be multiplexed;
Step 4: Select an output board card for multiplexing;
Step 5: Click a destination output port for multiplexing;
n
Step 6: Click Multiplex button;
Step 7: Click “Apply” to validate the Multiplexing relation.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
io
EMR device supports automatic searching. The user may manually refresh the
input list by clicking the right button on the input port or card to choose the
corresponding menu;
Click the mouse to choose the import port and click “Multiplexing” to make it
is
complex for the input port of all programme.
The input program existed in the output port, EMM, PID and non-appointed PID
cannot be re-multiplexed to this port.
If the output port or the input program, EMM or PID has been provided with the
transparent transmission setting, it is unable to conduct the multiplex operation.
av
When the output port limitation is exceeded, it may cause the failed multiplex
operation. The maximum supporting number for program multiplex is 128. The
maximum supporting number for EMM multiplex is 32. The maximum supporting
number for PID multiplex is 32.
If the input program, EMM, PID or non-appointed PID is used as the port backup,
um
the multiplex operation cannot be realized.

When the input program or the program containing the input PID is used as the
program backup, it is unable to realize the multiplex operation.
If the inputted PID is the video PID and the video PID already exists when
outputting the program, it is unable to realize the multiplex operation.
If the input program is encrypted and EMM is provided below the input port and is
not provided below the output port, the EMM information below the input port can be
automatically multiplexed to the output port when multiplexing the input program.
S
The EMM multiplex is decided according to the value of CASID and CAPID. If the
CASID and CAPID values of two EMMs under the same input port are the same, the
multiplex of any EMM will cause the automatic multiplex of the other one.
The port multiplex is only a shortcut operation on the page. In fact, it is equivalent
to that the user has repeated to click the program multiplex and the non-appointed
PID multiplex.
21 /503
The port multiplex doses not introduce the EMM multiplex to the output port. But
if the encrypted program is available in the program of the input port, EMM may be
multiplexed to the output port with the input program.
When PSI/SI table shows that it is opened, the PID of PSI/SI will be displayed
below the input port. But the port multiplex shall not multiplex the PID below the
PSI/SI node to the output port.
The port multiplex deletion is only a shortcut operation on the page. In fact, it is
n
equivalent to that the user has repeated to delete the program multiplex and the EMM
multiplex.
The port multiplex deletion does not cause the deletion for non-appointed PID
io
below the output port. The non-appointed PID can only be deleted independently or
deleted by choosing the “Non-appointed PID”.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
5.1.1.3 Output Interface
streams. Details are: is

Configured with different cards, EMR platform may output diversified program
 ASI output: EMR is configured with 4 Output ASI Card (see 4 Output ASI Card for
configuration method), ASI 5InOut Card (see ASI 5InOut Card for configuration
av
method) or StatMux4 Card (see StatMux4 Card for configuration method) to support
ASI output;
 DS3/E3 output: EMR is configured with DS3 adapter Card (see DS3 adapter Card for
configuration method) to support DS3/E3 stream output;
 IP output: the Main GbE Card (see Main GbE Card for configuration method) equipped
on the platform may provide IP output;
um
 RF output: EMR is configured with 6-Ch.QAM Card (see 6-Ch.QAM Card for
configuration method), DVB-S/S2 Mod. Card (see DVB-S/S2 Mod. Card for
configuration method) or DVB-T/H-4 Mod. Card (see DVB-T/H-4 Mod. Card for
configuration method) to support RF input;
 Analog video and audio output: EMR is configured with SD-ADEC Card (see
SD-ADEC Card for configuration method) or ANA DEC TRC Card (see ANA DEC TRC
Card for configuration method) to support the decoded Analog video and audio
S
output.
 Digital video and audio output: EMR is configured with Digital DEC TRC Card (see
Digital DEC TRC Card for configuration method) to support the decoded Digital video
and audio output.
22 /503
5.1.2 System Setting
The “General” menu includes 11 menus as follow: Network, Clock, TDT/TOT, PSI/SI,
Alarm, Log, License, Version, Misc, Permission, and Configuration.
 Network: set IP address, gateway address, subnet mask and other network
functions. Click “Apply” to complete the setting, as shown in Fig. 5-3 WEB
Management Network Configuration.
n
io
is
av
um
Fig. 5-3 WEB Management Network Configuration
Table 5-1 Network Parameter

Parameter Range Default
Unicast IP not including
IP Address 192.168.1.100
127.XXX.XXX.XXX
In accordance with the subnet
Subnet Mask 255.255.255
mask standard
Gateway In the same network with IP Address 192.168.1.1
S
DHCP Disable/Enable Disable
23 /503
 Clock: set the system time of the device or the time synchronization server to
enable the device to automatically synchronize the system time by the
synchronization interval. Click “Apply” to complete the setting, as shown in Fig.
5-4 WEB Management Clock Configuration;
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-4 WEB Management Clock Configuration
Table 5-2 Clock Parameter

um

SNTP Synchronization Disable/Enable Disable
Main SNTP Server Valid IP address 192.165.52.21
Backup SNTP Server Valid IP address 192.165.52.36
Time Zone(Offset from
[UTC – 12:00]~[UTC + 12:00] [UTC + 8:00]
UTC)
Synchronization
1~65535 2
Interval(min)
Synchronization Timeout(s) 1~65 1
S
24 /503
 TDT/TOT: set the TDT/TOT form information of output of the gigabit master card.
Click “Apply” to complete the setting, as shown in Fig. 5-5 WEB Management
TDT/TOT Configuration;
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-5 WEB Management TDT/TOT Configuration
Table 5-3 TDT/TOT Parameter

um
TDT Off/On Off

TDT Interval(s) 0~30 10
TDT Off/On Off
TDT Interal(s) 0~30 10
Country Code 3 capital English letters POL
No Time Zone Expansion ~ Time
Country Region ID Time Zone 2
Zone 60
Local Time Offset
0/1 0
Polarity
Local Time Offset 0:0~13:59 0:0
S
Time of Change 1900/3/1-0:0:0~2100/2/28-23:59:59 2012/10/28–1:0:0

Next Time Offset 0:0~13:59 0:0
25 /503
 PSI/SI: this page is used for setting the EMR searching mode and the searching
distance between tables. Click “Apply” to complete the setting, as shown in Fig.
5-6 WEB Management PSI/SI Configuration.
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-6 WEB Management PSI/SI Configuration
Table 5-4 PSI/SI Parameter

um
PSI/SI Refresh Mode Auto/Manual Manual

PAT/PMT/CAT Refresh
0~50 4
Interval(s)
NITa/SDTa Refresh
0~50 4
Interval(s)
NITo/SDTo/BAT Refresh
0~50 6
Interval(s)
S
26 /503
 Alarm: this page is used for inquiring EMR and warning information of each
daughter card. It can set the warning IP, warning interval, language and the
backup module warning switch. Click “Apply” to complete the setting, as shown
in Fig. 5-7 WEB Management Alarm Configuration.
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-7 WEB Management Alarm Configuration
Table 5-5 Alarm Parameter

um

Trap IP Address 1 192.168.1.27
127.XXX.XXX.XXX
127.XXX.XXX.XXX
127.XXX.XXX.XXX
Trap Interval (min) 0~65535 0
Language Chinese/English English
Backup Module
S
Off/On On
Alarm
27 /503
 Log: this page is used for inquiring EMR and warning information of each
daughter card. It can sieve and display the log according to the condition. Click
“Refresh” to inquire, as shown in Fig. 5-8 WEB Management Log page.
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-8 WEB Management Log page
um
S
28 /503
 License: this page is used for inquiring the EMR authorization status and setting
the authorization code to change license status, Click “Apply” to complete the
setting, as shown in Fig. 5-9 WEB Management License Configuration.
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-9 WEB Management License Configuration
Table 5-6 License Parameter

um
License 1 Main GbE card mode: 1+1/2+2 1+1

License 2 Backup: support/no support no support
License 3 Old license mode: support/no support no support
Number of main GbE card ports: 4~256 4
License 4
input/output input/output
License 5 FEC of main GbE card: support/no support no support
S
29 /503
 Version: click “Version” in “General” List to navigate to the page to inquire the
version information of EMR and various daughter cards. Click “Refresh” to
inquire, as shown in Fig. 5-10 WEB Management Version Information.
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-10 WEB Management Version Information
um
S
30 /503
 Misc: this page is used for setting the equipment name, the accounting period of
code rate, the equipment mode and other system parameter. Click “Apply” to
complete the setting, as shown in Fig. 5-11 WEB Management Misc Configuration.
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-11 WEB Management Misc Configuration
Table 5-7 Misc Parameter

um
Device Name 0~31 character long EMR3.0

Service ID Format Decimal/Hexadecimal Hexadecimal
PID Format Decimal/Hexadecimal Hexadecimal
Input PSI/SI Display Off/On Off
Output PSI/SI Version
Not Change/Auto Change Not Change
Number
Bitrate Statistics Cycle 1s/0.5s/0.25s 1s
Device Mode DVB/ATSC DVB
Power Coinfigurations Dual Power/Power1/Power2 Dual Power
Main GbE Card Mode General/FEC General
S
31 /503
 Permission: add or delete three kinds of users, including “Administrator”, “Power

user” and “User”, as shown in Fig. 5-12 WEB Management Permission
Configuration.
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-12 WEB Management Permission Configuration
um
S
32 /503
 Configuration: this page is used for inputting and outputting equipment

parameter and recovering the parameter to the default value, as shown in Fig.
5-13 WEB Management Parameter Configuration
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-13 WEB Management Parameter Configuration
5.2 SNMP Network Management

The EMR background software is embedded into the network management software
um
eManager of Beijing Sumavision Technologies Co. Ltd., which uses the same SNMP
communication protocol with the network management software. As a result, the user can
manage the EMR when installing the network management software. When the SNMP
network management is correctly installed, the SNMP network management can be
started via the following operation.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
Once the simple network protocol and SNMP protocol are installed on the
S
network management server and the computer with the SNMP software, the network
management can be used and the warning and other equipment status messages
can be obtained.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
Step 1: after starting the network management service end, right click the icon on
33 /503
the taskbar and choose <System Setting>. As shown in Fig. 5-14 Message for Setting
Database of Network management Server, choose the database type, input database user
and password and click the <Setting> button.
n
io
Fig. 5-14 Message for Setting Database of Network management Server
Step 2: run under the installation directory, start SNMP

network management, input the user name and password. The initial password is
is
Administrator and the password is “sumavision”. Fill in the server and the IP address.
Click “OK” to start the SNMP network management, as shown in Fig. 5-15 Login Interface
for SNMP Network management.
av
um
Fig. 5-15 Login Interface for SNMP Network management

S
5.2.1 Operating Method
5.2.1.1 Input Part
Configured with different cards, EMR platform may receive different types of program
sources. Details are:
 ASI input: EMR is configured with 5 Input ASI Card (see 5 Input ASI Card for
34 /503
configuration method) or ASI 5InOut Card (see ASI 5InOut Card for configuration
method) to support ASI input;
 DS3/E3 input: EMR is configured with DS3 In4 Card (see DS3 In4 Card for
configuration method) or DS3 adapter Card (see DS3 adapter Card for
configuration method) to support DS3/E3 stream input;
 IP input: the Main GbE Card (see Main GbE Card for configuration method)
equipped on the platform may provide IP input to the platform;
n
 RF input: EMR is configured with DVB-S2 Desc Card (see DVB-S2 Desc Card for
configuration method) ,ABS-S Demod Card (see ABS-S Demod Card for
configuration method) ,DVB-C Demod Desc Card (see DVB-C Demod Desc Card
io
for configuration method) ,DVB-S2 Demod Desc Card (see DVB-S2 Demod Desc
Card for configuration method) , ABS-S Demod Desc Card (see ABS-S Demod
Desc Card for configuration method) ,4-Ch.DVB-T2 Demod Card (see
4-Ch.DVB-T2 Demod Card for configuration method) , 4-Ch.DVB-S2 Demod card
(see 4-Ch.DVB-S2 Demod card for configuration method) , ISDB-T Demod Card

is
(see ISDB-T Demod Card for configuration method) , DTMB Demod card (see
DTMB Demod Card for configuration method) to support RF input;
Analog video and audio input: EMR is configured with the MPEG2 SD AENC
Card (see MPEG2 SD AENC Card for configuration method) , Analog SD ENC
av
Card (see Analog SD ENC Card for configuration method) or DVI Enc Card (see
DVI Enc Card for configuration method) to support input and encoding of analog
video and audio;
 Digital video and audio input: EMR is configured with the MPEG2 SD DENC
Card (see MPEG2 SD DENC Card for configuration method) , Digital SD ENC
um
Card (see Digital SD ENC Card for configuration method) or DVI Enc Card (see
DVI Enc Card for configuration method) to support input and encoding of digital
video and audio.
5.2.1.2 Output Interface
Configured with different cards, EMR platform may output diversified program
streams. Details are:
 ASI output: EMR is configured with 4 Output ASI Card (see 4 Output ASI Card for
S
configuration method), ASI 5InOut Card (see ASI 5InOut Card for configuration
method) or StatMux4 Card (see StatMux4 Card for configuration method) to support
ASI output;
 DS3/E3 output: EMR is configured with DS3 adapter Card (see DS3 adapter Card for
configuration method) to support DS3/E3 stream output;
 IP output: the Main GbE Card (see Main GbE Card for configuration method) equipped
35 /503
on the platform may provide IP output;

 RF output: EMR is configured with 6-Ch.QAM Card (see 6-Ch.QAM Card for
configuration method), DVB-S/S2 Mod. Card (see DVB-S/S2 Mod. Card for
configuration method) or DVB-T/H-4 Mod. Card (see DVB-T/H-4 Mod. Card for
configuration method) to support RF input;
 Analog video and audio output: EMR is configured with SD-ADEC Card (see
SD-ADEC Card for configuration method) or ANA DEC TRC Card (see ANA DEC TRC
n
Card for configuration method) to support the decoded Analog video and audio
output.
 Digital video and audio output: EMR is configured with Digital DEC TRC Card (see
io
Digital DEC TRC Card for configuration method) to support the decoded Digital video
and audio output.
5.2.2 System configuration
is
When the SNMP network management is started, it needs to add the equipment at
first and refresh the hardware at first and then the EMR can be managed. The steps are
as follows:
Step 1: follow the following operation steps when the user requires adding the
av
equipment:
Start the client end, click <view> and choose <equipment management>;
Right click in the margin of the right topology graph, choose <add>-<add equipment>
or choose the <add equipment> under the “edition” menu bar or click the quick button ;
um
Input the equipment IP address in the pop-up equipment adding dialog box and click
“Query”. If the equipment to be added is available and is on line, it shall automatic fill the
drop-down box of “Device Type”, the “Device Name” and other necessary information; and
click “OK”.
When the equipment icon is shown, move the cursor to the desired position and left
click to add the equipment.
S
36 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-16 Add Equipment
av
Step 2: Open the SNMP configuration window of equipment
um
S
Fig. 5-17 Choose of SNMP Configuration Menu
37 /503
Right click after choosing the equipment in the equipment management window and
choose “SNMP config” in the pop-up right click menu to pop up the equipment parameter
configuration interface.
Step 3: refresh equipment parameter. Click “Refresh Dev” to refresh the board card
structure information of the current equipment. The effect after refresh is as shown below:
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-18 Picture of effect after refreshing SNMP parameter
The tree structure on the left of the whole parameter modification interface refers to
um
the board card structure information of the current equipment, while corresponding
parameter information of each board card is as shown in the right. The user can view the
parameter information of corresponding node by click corresponding node on the tree
structure on the left board card.
5.3 Board Card Description

This section will introduce the board cards applied in EMR to help users understand
the version information, status information and parameter settings of each kind of board
S
card.
Some functions are available by purchasing corresponding authorization.
38 /503
5.3.1 Main GbE Card
5.3.1.1 Interface
The main GbE card is provided by the EMR itself and is different from other board
cards because the Main GbE Card occupies any card slot but is integrated with the EMR.
The interface card has four Ethernet ports, from left to right, they are Gigabit input/output
port 1, Gigabit input/output port 2, Gigabit input/output port 3 and Gigabit input/output port
n
4. Gigabit input/output Ethernet port 1 and 2 are used for the output and input of IP stream,
while Gigabit input/output Ethernet port 3 and 4 are backup Ethernet port of the Gigabit
input/output Ethernet port 1 and 2, which requires Gigabit module to connect the Gigabit
io
line and the router for normal communication.
5.3.1.2 Function
The parameter page of the Main GbE Card is shown as Fig. 5-19 Main GbE card of
Web Network Management:
is
av
um
S
Fig. 5-19 Main GbE card of Web Network Management

It includes four submenus below:
 Monitoring: used for displaying the input/output system code rate of each
Ethernet port with the Main GbE Gigabit card, the effective code rate and other
states;
39 /503
 Input backup: used for setting the backup switch of Ethernet port 1 and 2 with the
input backup function, the backup mode and the switch condition;
 Output backup: used for setting the backup switch of Ethernet port 1 and 2 with
the input backup function;
 Routine: this page is used for setting the network parameter of four Ethernet
ports with the Main GbE card and the warning switch.
n
Before using the Main GbE card, the gigabit module (gigabit electrical interface
module of Cisco is recommended) shall be inserted into the input port of the Main GbE
Card port, and the network parameter of each network interface of the Main GbE Card
io
shall be set on the WEB network management. Static ARP and receiving and sending
parameters may be set when the network interface parameter has been set according to
the user’s demand. Input and output backup parameter may be set when the sending and
receiving parameter of all ports has been set according to the practical situation.
5.3.1.2.1
is
Ethernet port monitor
This interface is used for viewing the system code rate of each input and output port
under the Ethernet port, the effective code rate and other state messages.
av
um
S
Fig. 5-20 Ethernet port monitor of Main GbE card
40 /503
5.3.1.2.2 Receiving Settings
3 6
n
io
4
is 5
av
Fig. 5-21 Main GbE Card Receiving Settings
Step 1: Click “GbE n” of “Cards” of WEB network management to navigate to GbE n
parameter settings page;
Step 2: Click “Receive” to navigate to receiving parameter settings page;
Step 3: Click “Add” in the page;
Step 4: Fill in the “Receive IP Address”, “Receive UDP Port”, “Protocol” and other
um
parameters of the port in the popped up page according to the network planning. When
the front-end sending IP and port are in the stepping relation, you may add the stepping
value and add a batch of input ports;
Step 5: Click “Apply” below the added port to have the added port displayed in a list.
You may directly modify the port parameter in the list if necessary;
Step 6: Click “Apply” in the page to validate the setting of receiving port in the list;
S
41 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-22 Main GbE Card Receiving Monitor
av
Step 7: When the receiving parameter is configured and the network is connected,
click “Main GbE card” in the “Cards” to switch to the information page of the Main GbE
card to click “Receive” in the top of the page to check input information of each port.
Port deletion function:
When it requires deleting some ports, it can choose the check box in front of the port
um
and click the “delete” on the page. Click “delete all” to directly delete all ports.
Batch port increase function:
This function supports the batch modification that several parameters can be modified
at the same time. The setting method details are as shown in 6.2Massive modification
function.
Reference code rate setting function:
When the network transmission quality is relatively poor, it can open the reference
S
switch on the reference code rate page and set the value which is slightly larger than the
maximum system code rate accounted to make the calibration. It is advised that the set
value is about 1/10,000 greater than the real code rate. When the inputted IP stream code
rate mode is VBR, it must open the reference switch to make the calibration. The
reference code rate setting shall be greater than the maximum value of the instant code
rate. It shall be 20% greater than the maximum at best, as shown in the figure below:
42 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-23 Main GbE Card Receiving Reference Settings
av
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
A network interface of the Main GbE Card supports up to 256 receiving ports;
When the gigabit network transmission protocol is RTP, please set even numbers
of receiving ports;
When the gigabit receiving adopts V3 version of IGMP protocol, “receiving mode
and source IP1 and IP2 are available”, or the default settings shall prevail.
um
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
S
43 /503
5.3.1.2.3 Transmitting settings
3
2
n
6
io
4
1
5
is
av
Fig. 5-24 Main GbE Card Sending Settings
Step 1: Click “GbE n” of “Cards” of WEB network management to navigate to GbE n
parameter settings page;
Step 2: Click “Transmit” to navigate to sending parameter settings page;
Step 3: Click “Add” in the page;
Step 4: Fill in the “Destination IP Address”, “Destination UDP Port”, ”Output”, “Bitrate
um
Mode”, ”Total Bitrate” and “Protocol” of the port in the popped up port page according to
the network plan;
Step 5: Click “Apply” in the bottom of the added port to have the added port displayed
in a list. You may directly modify the port parameter in the list if necessary;
Step 6: Click “Apply” in the page to validate the sending port settings in the list;
S
44 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-25 Main GbE Card Transmit Monitor
av
Step 7: When Multiplexing of the output programme is finished and the network is
connected, click “Main GbE card” in the “Cards” to switch to the information page of the
Main GbE card to click “Transmit” in the top of the page to check output information of
each port.
Port deletion function:
um
When it requires deleting some ports, it can choose the check box in front of the port
and click the “delete” on the page. Click “delete all” to directly delete all ports.
Batch port increase function:
This function supports the batch modification that several parameters can be modified
at the same time. The setting method details are as shown in 6.2Massive modification
function.
It can also set the output packet length, the survival time (TTL), the service type and
S
the number of TS packet in the IP packet page.

＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
When there are too many ports (e.g. 256 ports) and the IP address or port
number of all ports are modified by IE browser, IE may alarm of no response. Please
wait a moment before any operation.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
45 /503
After setting the input port, click Multiplex button in the “Multiplexing” in the top of the
page to choose the Main GbE card as the output card, and choose the multiplexing of the
input card for the output port corresponding to the Main GbE card according to the
frequency point planning, and then click “Apply”. For the program multiplex method, refer to
section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
A network interface of the Main GbE Card supports up to 256 receiving ports;
n
A network interface of the Main GbE Card sends up to 256 multicast streams;
A sending port of the Main GbE Card sends up to 45 programs;
When the gigabit network transmission protocol is RTP, please set even numbers
io
of sending ports;
The total system bit rate of all output ports of a network interface shall be no
more than 960Mbps;
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
5.3.1.2.4 ARP parameter setting

is
av
2
3
um
1
4
S
Fig. 5-26 Main GbE Card ARP setting
Dynamic ARP function: display the unicast purpose of non-static setting and target
MAC information under this Ethernet port.
Static ARP function: the user is allowed to set the target IP address and
46 /503
corresponding MAC address. The equipment can directly use corresponding MAC
address rather than sending APR REQUEST to obtain the target MAC when the target IP
address is given.
Step 1: click WEB network management “GbE n” to log in the Ethernet port setting
page;
Step 2: click the “ARP” on the page to log in the ARP setting interface;
n
Step 3: click the “Add” under the “Static” to pop up the add page;
Step 4: fill in the static ARP parameter as per as the network plan and click the
“Apply” on the page to put into effect;
io
Click the “Dynamic” to view the ARP dynamic list.
is
av
um
Fig. 5-27 Main GbE Card Dynamic ARP Monitor
5.3.1.2.5 Backup Settings

S
Other than supporting the Service backup and Port backup of EMR platform, the Main
GbE Card also supports the backup of input and output network interface of the device,
and the backup of output interface between devices. Each kind of backup settings is
instructed below.
As for the four input network interfaces of the Main GbE Card, network interface 3
may be the backup of network interface 1 while network interface 4 may be the backup of
47 /503
network interface 2.
Input Ethernet port backup:
Function description: for the four Ethernet ports with the Main GbE Cards, the
Ethernet ports 1 and 3 are the backup of a 1+1 group and the Ethernet ports 2 and 4 are
the backup of another 1+1 group. When the main and backup Ethernet ports receive the
data both and detect the switch, one of the two Ethernet ports shall be involved in the
multiplex in the back board.
n
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The input contents of the main and backup Ethernet ports must be identical
io
(including the PSI/SI table of the input stream, PID of elements). The receiving IP and
ports may be different.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
is 2
3 4 5
av
6
1
um
Fig. 5-28 Main GbE Card Input Ethernet port backup

S
Step 1: click WEB network management “Main GbE Card” to log in the board card
page;
Step 2: click “Input Backup” to log in the backup setting page;
Step 3: click the backup switch option on the page to open backup switch of
corresponding group; the group 1 refers to the main and standby backup of Ethernet ports
48 /503
1 and 3, while the group 2 refers to the main and standby backup of the Ethernet ports 2
and 4.
Step 4: click the backup mode option on the page to choose the mode complying with
the real application requirement. It can choose the “Main Priority”, “Floating”, “One-Way
Switch”, “Assign Main” or “Assign Backup” as the backup mode. It is advised that the
“Main Priority” mode shall be set during the normal use.
When the main route is abnormal and the backup route is normal, the “Main Priority”
n
mode may be switched to the backup route. When the main route is recovered, the
backup route may be switched to the main route.
io
When one route is abnormal in the “Floating”, the route may be switched to another
one.
If the switch is made under the “One-way Switch” mode, it is impossible to switch to
the main route.
is
The “Assign Main” or the “Assign Backup” can use the appointed Ethernet port.
Step 5: click the switching condition option on the page to choose the switching
condition complying with the real application requirements. The switching conditions
include the “Link Loss”, “System Bitrate is 0”, “Effective Bitrate is 0” and the “Effective
av
Bitrate Out Of Threshold”. When the system detects the abnormality complying with the
switching condition of the Ethernet, the main route shall be switched to the backup route.
Step 6: when the “Effective Bitrate Out Of Threshold” is chosen as the switch
condition, it needs to set minimum and maximum code rate threshold value for the switch
of the main route and the backup route.
um
Step 7: click the “Apply” on the page to put the backup setting into effect.
After the setting, click the “GbE n” and set the receiving parameter information of this
backup Ethernet port on the “Receiving” page. The setting method is as shown
in5.3.1.2.2Receiving Settings. It shall ensure that the main and backup route Ethernet port
shall send the same program stream from the receiving front end. When the setting is
done, the multiplex relationship of the back board shall directly deploy the input of the
backup route to participate the multiplex output when the receiving of the main route is
S
abnormal.
Output Ethernet port backup:

Function description: for the four Ethernet ports with the Main GbE Cards, the
Ethernet ports 1 and 3 are the backup of a 1+1 group and the Ethernet ports 2 and 4 are
the backup of another 1+1 group. The main and backup Ethernet ports must output the
same stream at the same time. Different purposes and ports can be set when the main
49 /503
and backup Ethernet ports output. The bearing content must be the same. When the
backward equipment uses the received backup, two identical program sources are
available.
n
io
4
is
av
Fig. 5-29 Main GbE Card Output Ethernet port backup
Step 1: click WEB net manager “Main GbE Card” to log in the board card page;
Step 2: click “Output Backup” to log in the backup setting page;
Step 3: open corresponding backup switch on the page; the output of Ethernet 3 is
um
the backup outputted by Ethernet port 1; and the output of Ethernet 4 is the backup
outputted by Ethernet port 2.
Click “GbE n” and set the transmission parameter information of this Ethernet for the
standby route on the “Transmit” page. For the setting method, please refer to
5.3.1.2.3Transmitting settings. When transmitting the program stream for the latter level, the
program of the backup Ethernet port shall be identical to that of the main Ethernet port. No
S
additional multiplex operation is required. When the backward equipment uses the
received backup, two identical program sources are available.
Output port backup:
Function description: the two Ethernet ports shall realize the mutual communication
to obtain the working status of each; then the arbitration is made by the main Ethernet port
according to the status; and finally the on-off control and the backup are realized by
sending the directive to each and the backup Ethernet port. The two Ethernet ports are not
50 /503
limited to the two Ethernet ports of the same equipment. It also includes the backup
between the Ethernet ports of different devices.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
One Ethernet port can be provided with 8 groups. The group working mode using
the backup in the same Ethernet port must be identical, being the master equipment
or the backup equipment. It can set different switching mode.
The Ethernet ports 3 and 4 do not support the output port backup. Only the
n
Ethernet ports 1 and 2 support the output port backup.
It must ensure that the main and the backup Ethernet port can realize the mutual
communication.
io
If the main Ethernet port is IGMP V3 and the source IP filtering is set, the backup
Ethernet port must be IGMP V3 and the set source IP filtering must be identical to that
of the main route.
When making the backup setting, the main route and the standby route must be
is
consistent in the port quantity.
The target IP and the target port of main route and the standby route in the
backup group must be identical.
If the main port switch is available on the backup network, the main port switch
must be switched on. Namely, the main port switch and the backup function are
av
exclusive to each other. When the main port switch is switched off, the backup mode
cannot be selected. When the backup mode is selected, the main port switch cannot
be switched off.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
um
S
51 /503
2
7
3 4
n
5
io
6
1
is
Fig. 5-30 Main GbE Card Output port Backup
av
Step 1: click WEB net manager “GbE n” to log in the Ethernet port page;
Step 2: click “Backup” to log in the output port backup setting page;
Step 3: click the work mode on the page option to select the “Main Device” or
“Backup Device” according to the real application condition. The groups in the same
Ethernet port, which initialize the backup, shall have the same work mode, being either the
master equipment or the backup equipment. However, the different switch modes can be
um
set.
Switch”, “Assign Main” or “Assign Backup” as the backup mode.
S
one.
the main route.
The “Assign Main” or the “Assign Backup” can use the appointed Ethernet port.
52 /503
Step 5: fill the “Backup IP Address” and the “Backup UDP Port” on the page. Fill IP
addresses of corresponding matched ports in the backup IP address bar of the master
and backup equipment (the master equipment fills the IP address of the backup
equipment in the backup IP address, while the backup equipment fills the IP of
corresponding master equipment). The “Backup UDP Port” of the matched master
equipment and backup equipment must be the same.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
n
The “Backup UDP Port” is the communication port between the master Ethernet
port and the backup Ethernet port. Please notice that the setting of such port cannot
be identical to that of the transmission and receiving ports.
io
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
Step 6: fill the “Communication Timeout” and “Group Delay Time” on the page to
reach the normal switch requirements of each group.
9
is 8
11
av
um
10
S
Fig. 5-31 Main GbE Card Transmit port backup

Step 8: click the “Transmit” on the “GbE n” of WEB net manager and click “Port
Backup” to log in the output port setting page;
Step 9: click the backup group number option on the page to classify the output port
according to the real application situation.
Step 10: set the minimum and maximum code rate threshold value for switch
53 /503
between ports. When the code rate is beyond the threshold value, the route is deemed as
abnormal and the switch shall be made.
After setting the backup for output port of the master equipment, it shall log in the
backup equipment net manager to set the backup parameter for output port of the backup
equipment, backup group number for output port of backup equipment, the minimum code
rate threshold and the maximum code rate threshold. The setting method is as the same
n
as the aforesaid steps.
When the port on the main route equipment is abnormal, it shall notify the backup
route equipment and made the switch according to the switch mode setting.
io
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
Backup of output network interface and backup of input network interface are
mutually exclusive that only one of them may be applied;
Other than the target IP, target port, output switch and alarm switch of the backup
is
network interface that may be independently modified, any parameter shall be kept
consistent with the value of the master network interface;
There is no switching mechanism of the backup of output network interface that it
mainly provides the subsequent level of the user with a same input source.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
av
5.3.1.3 Parameter
Table 5-8 Main GbE Card Receiving Parameter

Name length of name 0~31 Udp Port n
Add Port Number 1~256 1
um
Receive IP
self IP or multicast IP self IP
Address
IP Address Step
0~255 0
Value
Receive UDP Port 1~65535 1234
UDP Port Step
0~65534 1
Value
Protocol UDP/RTP UDP
Alarm On/Off On
Receive Mode INCLUDE/EXCLUDE EXCLUDE
1.1.1.1~223.254.254.254
S
Source IP Address
0.0.0.0
1 （127.0.0.0~127.255.255.255 IANA reserved）
Source IP Address 1.1.1.1~223.254.254.254
0.0.0.0
2 （127.0.0.0~127.255.255.255 IANA reserved）
Reference Bitrate 0~200000000 0
Reference On/Off Off
54 /503
Table 5-9 Main GbE Card Transmitting Parameter

Name length of name 0~31 Udp Port n
Add Port Number 1~256 1
Destination IP Address unicast IP or multicast IP 192.165.52.100
IP Address Step Value 0~255 0
Destination UDP Port 1~65535 1234
UDP Port Step Value 0~65534 1
Total Bitrate 0~200000000 0
n
Bitrate Mode CBR/VBR CBR
Alarm On/Off On
Output On/Off On
io
Packet Format 188/204 188
TTL 1~255 255
General services/Minimum cost/Highest General
TOS
reliability/Maximum throughput/Minimum delay services
TS Pkt Num 1~7 7
Group 1~8 1
Minrate Threshold 0~200000000 0
Maxrate Threshold
Parameter
Working Mode
is 0~200000000
Table 5-10 Main GbE Card Output Port Backup Parameter

Range
No Backup/Main Device/Backup Device
38000000
Default
No Backup
av
Assign Main/Assign Backup/
Backup Mode Main Priority
Main Priority/One Way Switch/Floating
Backup IP Address unicast IP 192.168.1.101
Backup UDP Port 1~65535 4999+i(i is group No)
Communication Timeout 100~65535 4000
Group Delay Time 0~65535 100
um
Table 5-11 Main GbE Card Static ARP Parameter

Destination IP Address unicast IP Need Add
Destination MAC Address Legal MAC Address Need Add
Table 5-12 Main GbE Card General Parameter

Net IP
unicast IP not include 127.XXX.XXX.XXX 192.168.1.136
Address
S
Subnet Mask Legal Subnet Mask Address 255.255.255.0

unicast IP not include 127.XXX.XXX.XXX，must the same
Gateway 192.168.1.36
subnet with Net IP Address
Speed and Auto-Negotiation/1Gbps AN/SGMII 1Gbps Full/1Gbps
Auto-Negotiation
Duplex Full/100Mbps Full/100Mbps Half/10Mbps Full/10Mbps Half
Alarm On/Off On
IGMP Version IGMPv2/IGMPv3 IGMPv2
55 /503
Table 5-13 Main GbE Card Input Ethernet port backup Parameter
Backup On/Off Off
Assign Main/Assign Backup/
Main Priority/One-Way Switch/Floating
Switching Link Loss/System Bitrate is 0/Effective
Link Loss
Condition Bitrate is 0/Effective Bitrate Out Of Threshold
Min Effective 0~1000000000, Cannot bigger than Max
0
Rate Threshold Effective Rate Threshold
n
Max Effective 0~1000000000,Cannot less than Min
0
Rate Threshold Effective Rate Threshold
5.3.2 5 Input ASI Card
io
5.3.2.1 Interface
5 Input ASI Card provides 5 input interface of 75ΩBNC, for ASI input, as shown in Fig.
5-32 5 Input ASI Card:
5.3.2.2 Function
is
Fig. 5-32 5 Input ASI Card
av
The 5 Input ASI Card supports 5 ASI input routes. The ASI input shall be connected to
the 5 Input ASI Card, the input program can be refreshed as per as the Setting Method for
Multiplex in Section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting and the output is multiplexed finally.
5 Input ASI Cards supports 5-channel ASI input. You may check the current version
and modify the parameter of 5 Input ASI Card through the WEB network management.
um
The alarm switch of the card and each input port may be set in the page of parameter
settings and each port may be set with a PID to monitor the bit rate. The input information
of each port and the bit rate information of the PID are displayed in the status information
page.
S
56 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-33 5 Input ASI Card
av
5.3.2.3 Parameter
Table 5-14 5 Input ASI Card Parameter

Appointed PID 0x0~0x1fff 0x1fff
Alarm On/Off On
um
5.3.3 4 Output ASI Card
5.3.3.1 Interface
4 output ASI card provides 4 output interface of 75ΩBNC for ASI output, 1 Ethernet
interface for connecting and communicating CAS, as shown in Fig. 5-34 4 Output ASI Card.
S
Fig. 5-34 4 Output ASI Card
5.3.3.2 Function
The 4 output ASI card supports four ASI output routes. The input program can be
multiplexed to the output port of the 4 output ASI card as per as the Setting Method for
Multiplex in Section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting, the appropriate system code rate can be
57 /503
set in corresponding port and the normal output can be made then.
The 4 output ASI card can realize the scrambling action for the program outputted by
four ASI output routes via the scrambling Ethernet port of the back board and the board
card. It can inquire the status information of each port on the 4 output ASI card, set the
parameter and support the outputted rebirth PCR_PID on the WEB network management.
The port parameter setting page supports the setting of the warning switch, the code rate
of output system as well as the output packet length. The board card parameter page can
n
be used for setting the board card warning switch and check the scrambling Ethernet Port
IP of the board card.
io
During the use, the rebirth PCR function shall be started as per as the following
sequence. Multiplex the program to the output (exclusive of ECM and EMM, not greater
than 22 programs) parameter setting page for port of board card, turn on the rebirth
PCR switch, submit log in the rebirth PCR page, modify the final PCR_PID to be
modified and submit after the modification.
is
av
um
S
Fig. 5-35 4 Output ASI Card
58 /503
5.3.3.3 Parameter
Table 5-15 4 Output ASI Card Parameter

Total Bitrate(bps) 0~213000000 0
Packet Format 188 Byte/204 Byte 188 Byte
Re-generate PCR On/Off Off
Alarm On/Off On
n
PCR_PID 32-8191 8191
5.3.4 ASI 5InOut Card
io
5.3.4.1 Interface
ASI 5InOut Card provides 5 75ΩBNC ports, which are flexible for the ASI signal
input/output, as shown in Fig. 5-36 ASI 5InOut Card.
5.3.4.2 Function
is
Fig. 5-36 ASI 5InOut Card
av
ASI 5InOut Card provides 5 BNC ports, each of which may be flexibly customized to
be the input or output port. Other than the purpose of input and output card, it also
supports two modes of Concentrator and Deconcentrator.
5.3.4.2.1 Type of Input and Output Card

Set the “Card Type” in card parameter settings page as “ASI 5InOut Card”. Customize
um
each port as the input or output port in Port Settings according to the purpose and click
“Apply” to validate the settings.
S
59 /503
n
1
io
is
Fig. 5-37 ASI 5InOut Card
av
Step 1: Click “ASI 5InOut Card” of “Cards” of WEB network management to navigate
to card settings page;
Step 2: Click “Card Type” to choose “ASI 5InOut Card”;
Step 3: Customize each port as “Input” or “Output” according to the demand;
Step 4: Click “Apply” to validate the parameter;
um
S
60 /503
7
5
n
io
is
Fig. 5-38 ASI 5InOut Card Input Settings
av
Step 5: Click “Input Port n” of WEB network management to navigate to input port
page;
Step 6: Click “Config” to navigate to setting page;
Step 7: Set the “Appointed PID” and “Alarm” switch of the input port;
um
S
61 /503
10 12
11
n
9
io
is
Fig. 5-39 ASI 5InOut Card Output Settings
av
Step 9: Click “Output Port n” of WEB network management to navigate to Output port
page;
Step 11: Set the “Total Bitrate”, “Packet Format”, “Alarm” switch and the
“Re-generated PCR” switch of the output port;
Step 12: Click “Apply” to validate the parameter.
um
Finally, the ASI input shall be connected to ASI 5InOut Card input port, the input
program can be refreshed as per as the Setting Method for Multiplex in Section
5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting and the output is multiplexed, the appropriate system code rate
can be set in corresponding port and the normal output can be made then.
5.3.4.2.2 Type of Concentrator

ASI 5InOut Card may also be used as the Concentrator or Deconcentrator.
When it is used as the Concentrator, Port 1~4 are for the 4-channel input and Port 5 is
S
for the output of the Concentrator.
62 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-40 ASI 5InOut Card Concentrator
av
Step 2: Click “Card Type” to choose “Concentrator”;
um
S
63 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-41 ASI 5InOut Card Concentrator Input Settings
av
Step 4: Click “Input Port n” of WEB network management to navigate to input port
page;
Step 6: Set the “Input” switch and “Alarm” switch of the input port according to the
demand;
um
Connect the switched-on input port into corresponding ASI input source and then the
concentrator can output normally.
S
64 /503
5.3.4.2.3 Type of Deconcentrator

When it is used as the Deconcentrator, Port 1~4 are for the 4-channel output and Port
5 is for the input of the Deconcentrator.
n
2
io
is
av
Fig. 5-42 ASI 5InOut Card Deconcentrator
Step 2: Click “Card Type” to choose “Deconcentrator”;
um

S
65 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-43 ASI 5InOut Card Deconcentrator Input Settings
av
Step 4: Click “Input Port” of WEB network management to navigate to input port
page;
Step 6: Choose “Current Card” or “Others” as the input source. When “Others” is
chosen, you may navigate to the transparent flow transmission of “Output” of WEB
network management to enable the Concentrator to transparently transmit the flow to the
um
Deconcentrator. The setting method details are as shown in 6.3Output Settings;

S
66 /503
10
n
io
is
Fig. 5-44 ASI 5InOut Card Deconcentrator Output Settings
av
Step 8: Click “Output Port n” of WEB network management to navigate to Output port
page;
Step 9: choose the output signal and output packet size of the 4-channel output of the
Deconcentrator according to the actual situation;
When the shunt input source is set and connected correctly, the output port of
um
corresponding shunt can output the normal shunt signal.

S
67 /503
5.3.4.3 Parameter
Table 5-16 ASI 5InOut Card Parameter

Alarm On/Off On
ASI5InOut Card/
Concentrator/
Card Type Concentrator
Deconcentrator/
SMPTE 310
n
Appointed PID 0~8191 0
Input
Alarm On/Off On
Total
0~213000000 0
Bitrate(bps)
io
Re-generate
Output On/Off Off
PCR
Adjust PCR
On/Off Off
Structure
Alarm On/Off On
Concentrator
Output
is
Output Bitrate
(bps)
Packet Format
Multiplexing
500000~205000000
188 Byte/204 Byte
0~19418
100000000
188 Byte
0
av
Delay(us)
Input On/Off On
Alarm On/Off On
Input Source Current Card/Others Current Card
Auto/188 Byte/204
Packet Format Auto
Byte
Alarm On/Off On
um
Concentrator Input 1/
Deconcentrator Concentrator Input 2/
Output Signal Concentrator
Select 1
Concentrator Output
Alarm On/Off On
S
68 /503
5.3.5 DS3 adapter Card
5.3.5.1 Interface
DS3 adapter Card provides 5 75ΩBNC ports supporting two-way adaptation of ASI
and DS3. Definition of each port is shown in Fig. 5-45 DS3 adapter Card:
n
Fig. 5-45 DS3 adapter Card
io
5.3.5.2 Function
DS3 adapter Card provides 5 BNC ports, which are ASI_OUT, ASI_IN, DS3_OUT1,
DS3_OUT2 and DS3_IN from left to right. DS3 adapter supports two-way adapted output
of ASI and DS3.
5.3.5.2.1 Input setting

ASI input setting
is
When the ASI input is used, the input source shall be connected for the DS3 adapter
Card ASI-IN.
av
2
4
um
1
S
Fig. 5-46 DS3 Adapter Card ASI Input Parameter Setting
69 /503
Step 1: click the “ASI In” in the “DS3 adapter Card” of Web network management to
log in the ASI input port to set the page;
Step 2: click the “Config” on the page to log in the setting page;
Step 3: choose “Input” switch to be “On” and set the “Appointed PID” value to be
monitored;
Step 4: click the “Apply” on the page after setting the parameter to put the setting
n
parameter into effect.
The monitoring interface shall display the code rate information of the current
receiving ASI input source.
io
is
av
um
Fig. 5-47 DS3 Adapter Card ASI Input Monitor

S
70 /503
DS3 input setting
When the DS3 input is used, the DS3 input source shall be connected for the DS3
adapter Card DS3-IN.
2
6
n
3
5
io
4
1 is
av
Fig. 5-48 DS3 adapter Card DS3 Input Parameter Setting
Step 1: click the “DS3 In” in the “DS3 adapter Card” of Web network management to
um
log in the DS3 input port to set the page;
Step 3: choose “Input” switch to be “On”;
Step 4: set the receiving parameter according to the DS3 input source, select the
“DS3/E3 Switch Mode”, “Multi Protocol”, “Frame Format”, “Input Bit Sequence”, “RS
Decoding”, “Interleaved Decoding” and “Descramble” to realize the normal signal
receiving of DS3 input end and set the monitored “Appointed PID”;
S
Step 5: set the “Loop” switch according to the real application situation and choose to
switch on or off the function;
Switch off “Loop” function: the ASI or DS3 input and output port of DS3 adapter card
can be used for conducting the multiplexing operation both. Corresponding input source
can be accessed to the ASI or DS3 input port as per as the neutral method. Multiplex the
input program to the output port and set appropriate system code rate in corresponding
71 /503
port to realize the normal output.
Switch on “Loop” function: the input port and the output port of the DS3 adapter card
cannot be used for conducting the corresponding adaptation output rather than the
multiplex operation. Namely, the input stream of the DS3 input port can be directly
adapted to the output of the ASI output port, while the input stream of the ASI input port
can be directly adapted to the output of the DS3 output port and the program is unable to
be modified via the multiplex.
n
io
The monitoring interface shall display the code rate information of the DS3 input
source which is received currently.
is
av
um
Fig. 5-49 DS3 adapter Card DS3 Input Monitor

S
72 /503
5.3.5.2.2 Output setting

ASI output setting
n
2
io
1
is
av
Fig. 5-50 DS3 adapter Card ASI Output Parameter Setting
Step 1: click the “ASI Out” in the “DS3 adapter Card” of Web network management to
log in the ASI output port to set the page;
um
Step 2: set the “Total Bitrate” of output port and choose correspondingly outputted
“Packet Format”;
This page can display the effective code rate value outputted by ASI currently.
S
73 /503
DS3 output setting
n
2
io
1
is
av
Fig. 5-51 DS3 adapter Card DS3 Output Parameter Setting
Step 1: click the “DS3 Out” in the “DS3 adapter Card” of Web network management
to log in the DS3 output port to set the page;
Step 2: set the DS3 output parameter according to the demand of the real application,
select the “Frame Format”, “Output Bit Sequence”, “RS Coding”, “Interleaved Coding”,
um
“Scramble” and “Packet Format”.
This page can display the effective code rate value outputted by DS3 currently.
5.3.5.3 Parameter
S
Table 5-17 DS3 Adapter Card ASI Parameter

Input On/Off On
Input
Appointed PID 0～8191 0
Output Total Bitrate (bps) 0~213000000 40000000
74 /503
Table 5-18 DS3 Adapter Card DS3 Parameter

Input On/Off On
Loop On/Off Off
DS3/E3 Switch Mode DS3 Mode/E3 Mode DS3 Mode
Normal Mode/
Multi Protocol Normal Mode
Tandberg/NP Mode
Frame Format No Frame/ C-bit/ M13 M13
Input Input Bit Sequence MSB/LSB LSB
n
RS Decoding On/Off Off
Interleaved
On/Off Off
Decoding
Descramble On/Off Off
io
Input Bit Sequence MSB/LSB LSB
RS Coding On/Off Off
Output
Interleaved Coding On/Off Off
Scramble On/Off Off
5.3.6 SFN Card
5.3.6.1 Interface
is
Package Format 188 Byte/204 Byte 188 Byte
av
SFN Card provides 5 interfaces of 75ΩBNC. Two interfaces on the left are GPS 10M
and GPS 1PPS signal input respectively, the interface in the middle is ASI signal and the
two interfaces on the right are all used for the DVB-T and DTMB standards adaptation
output, as shown in Fig. 5-52 SFN Card.
um
Fig. 5-52 SFN Card
5.3.6.2 Function
With the SFN card, the ASI input stream can be adapted to the DVB-T or DTMB
standards signal output.
S
75 /503
2
6
1
n
4
io
is
Fig. 5-53 SFN Card Parameter Configuration
av
Step 1: click the “SFN Card” of Web network management to log in the card page;
Step 3: select the input “source” of the SFN Card including “ASI” and “Multiplex”.
“ASI” mode: When selecting the “ASI” mode, the input stream of the SFN Card will be
adapted.
um
“Multiplex” mode: When selecting the “Multiplex” mode, it shall multiplex the input
program to the output port of the SFN Card from the multiplexing interface. For the
program multiplex method, refer to section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting.
Step 4: set the “Alarm”, “SFN Protocol”, “Appointed PID” and “Maximum Delay Time”
according to the actual situation;
Step 5: select the “Keep Output” mode of the SFN Card including “Off”, “Keep Adapt”
S
and “Keep Output”. The SFN Card will be in the mode you selected, when GPS 10M
signal and GPS 1PPS signal are both interrupted.
“Off” mode: The SFN Card will stop outputting, when all clock signals are interrupted.
“Keep Adapt” mode: The SFN Card will output the adapted stream, when all clock
signals are interrupted.
“Keep Output” mode: The SFN Card will output the received input stream without
76 /503
adaptive processing, when all clock signals are interrupted.
receiving ASI input source and the adaptation output stream.
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-54 SFN Card Monitor

um
S
77 /503
2
4
n
io
is
Fig. 5-55 SFN Card Port Parameter Configuration
av
Step 1: click the “Port 1” in the “SFN Card” of Web network management to log in the
port setting page;
Step 2: according to the set of “SFN Protocol” in the card “Config” page, click “DVB-T”
or “DTMB” to enter the corresponding setting page;
Step 3: set the adaptation parameters according to the actual situation;

um
5.3.6.3 Parameter
Table 5-19 SFN Card Parameter

Input ASI/Multiplex ASI
Alarm On/Off Off
S
SFN Protocol DTMB/DVB-T DTMB

Maximum Delay
0~9999999 0
Time (100ns)
Keep Output Off/Keep Adapt/Keep Output Keep Adapt
78 /503
Table 5-20 SFN Card DTMB Parameter

Frame Head Mode PN420/PN595/PN945 PN420
Carrier Wave Mode C=1/C=3780 C=1
Modulation Mode 4QAM-NR/4QAM/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM 64QAM
Encode Efficiency 0.4/0.6/0.8 0.8
Interleave Mode 240/720 240
Double Frequency Add/No Add No Add
n
PN Phase Circle/No Circle No Circle
Table 5-21 SFN Card DTMB Exciter Polling Parameter
io
Polling On/Off Off
Broadcast Addressing 0~65535 0
Delay Adjustment 0~9999999 0
Frequency Shift -8388608~8388607 0
Parameter
is
Power Control(0.1dbm) 0~32767
Table 5-22 SFN Card DVB-T Parameter
Range
0
Default
av
Modulation Mode QPSK/16QAM/64QAM QPSK
Quadrant Interval α = 0/α = 1/α = 2/α = 3 α=0
Inner Coding Mode 1/2、2/3、3/4、5/6、7/8 1/2
Guard Interval 1/32、1/16、1/8、1/4 1/32
Transmission Mode 2kMode/8kMode 2kMode
RF Bandwidth 6MHz/7MHz/8MHz 7MHz
Priority Low Priority TS/None or High Priority TS Low Priority TS
um
S
79 /503
Table 5-23 SFN Card DVB-T Extend Parameter

Extend Switch All On/Off Off
Transmitter ID 0~65535 0
Time Offset On/Off Off
Time Offset Value -32768~32767 0
Frequency Offset On/Off Off
Frequency Offset Value -8388608~8388607 0
n
Bandwidth On/Off Off
Bandwidth Value 0~127 0
Bandwidth Enable Mode Waiting Enable/Immediately Waiting Enable
io
Cell ID Switch On/Off Off
Cell ID 0~65535 0
Cell ID Enable Mode Waiting Enable/Immediately Waiting Enable
Power Switch On/Off Off
Power Value 0~65535 0
Enable Signal Switch
Enable Signal Value
5.3.7 SFN Correction Card

is On/Off
Neither/Only Cell_id Enable/Only
Bandwidth Enable/Both
Off
Neither
av
5.3.7.1 Interface
SFN Correction Card provides 2 interfaces of 75ΩBNC for outputting 2-channel

corrected SFN streams. The other 1 interface of 75ΩBNC is using for receiving the GPS
10M signal sent by GPS/Beidou time service device. The SFN Correction Card also
provides an RS-232 serial port for connecting with the serial port of GPS/Beidou time
um
service device. The two Ethernet ports is reserved, as shown in Fig. 5-56 SFN Correction
Card.
S
Fig. 5-56 SFN Correction Card
80 /503
5.3.7.2 Function
The SFN Correction Card can provides the correction of 2-channel SFN streams.
2
4
n
3
io
is
av
Fig. 5-57 SFN Correction Card DTMB Parameter Configuration
Step 1: click the “SFN Correction Card” of Web network management to log in the
card page;
Step 2: click the “DTMB” on the page to log in the DTMB setting page;
um
Step 3: select the “Device Mode” including “Normal Mode” and “Satellite
Transmission mode”. Set the “ASI Out 1 Source” and “ASI Out 2 Source” as “Correction
Out 1” or “Correction Out 2” to make the corresponding stream output.
S
81 /503
4
2
n
io
is
Fig. 5-58 Output Setting Interface for Web Network management
av
Step 1: Click the “Output” in the network management interface to log in the output
setting interface;
Step 2: Click the SFN Correction Card on the left output table to log in the card
transmission setting interface;
Step 3: Set the “Output Mode” of corresponding output port as “Pass-Through” and
um
select the SFN stream input port. For the stream transmission method, refer to section
6.3Output Settings.
Step 4: Click “Apply” button to make the pass-through relationship valid.
In addition to the steps mentioned above, we also need to connect the RS-232 serial
port of EMR to the serial port of GPS/Beidou time service device and set the SFN Card as
follows:
S
82 /503
2
4
1
n
3
io
is
Fig. 5-59 SFN Card Port DTMB Parameter Configuration
av
Step 1: click the “Port 1” in the “SFN Card” of Web network management to log in the
port setting page;
Step 2: click the “DTMB” on the page to log in the DTMB setting page;
Step 3: set the “SFN Mode” as “Satellite Mode” and set the “Correction Enable” and
“Correction Time” according to the actual situation;
um
The “Stream Info” interface shall display the correction information of the two ports.
S
83 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-60 SFN Correction Card Stream Information
av
The monitoring interface shall display the code rate information of the current input
stream form backboard and the correction output stream.
um
S
Fig. 5-61 SFN Correction Card Monitor
84 /503
5.3.7.3 Parameter
Table 5-24 SFN Correction Card DTMB Parameter

Normal Mode/ Satellite
Device Mode
Satellite Transmission mode Transmission mode
Correction Out 1/
ASI Out 1 Source Correction Out 1
Correction Out 2
Correction Out 1/
ASI Out 2 Source Correction Out 1
n
Correction Out 2
5.3.8 DS3 In4 Card
io
5.3.8.1 Interface
DS3 In4 Card provides 4 75ΩBNC ports supporting 4-channel DS3 signal input, as
shown in Fig. 5-62 DS3 In4 Card.
5.3.8.2 Function
is
Fig. 5-62 DS3 In4 Card
av
ASI supports 4-channel DS3 stream input. Adjust the DS3 receiving parameter of
each port according to the front-end sending parameter to ensure the consistent
parameter and click “Apply” to normally receive the DS3 stream. The received programme
may be made complex for other cards in the “Multiplexing” page of WEB network
management. For the program multiplex method, refer to section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing
Setting.
um
S
85 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-63 DS3 In4 Card
av
5.3.8.3 Parameter
Table 5-25 DS3 In4 Card Parameter

Input On/Off Off
DS3/E3 Switch Mode DS3 Mode/E3 Mode DS3 Mode
Input Bit Sequence MSB/LSB MSB
um
Adaptation Protocol Normal Mode/TB6010 Normal Mode

Frame Format No Frame/C-bit/M13 No Frame
Interleaved Decoding On/Off Off
S
86 /503
5.3.9 DS3 Two-Way Adapter Card
5.3.9.1 Interface
DS3 Two-Way Adapter Card provides 5 75ΩBNC ports supporting two-way

adaptation of ASI and DS3. Three DS3 ports are flexible for the DS3 signal input/output.
Definition of each port is shown in Fig. 5-64 DS3 Two-Way Adapter Card:
n
Fig. 5-64 DS3 Two-Way Adapter Card
io
5.3.9.2 Function
DS3 Two-Way Adapter Card provides 5 BNC ports, which are ASI_OUT, ASI_IN,
DS3_1, DS3_2 and DS3_3 from left to right. Three DS3 ports are flexible for the DS3
signal input/output. The input and output ports can be multiplexed in “Multiplexing” page of
is
WEB network management. For the program multiplex method, refer to section
5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting.
av
4
3
um
1
S
Fig. 5-65 DS3 Two-Way Adapter Card Parameter Setting

Step 1: Click “DS3 Two-Way Adapter Card” of “Cards” of WEB network management
87 /503
to navigate to card settings page;

Step 2: select the “DS3/E3 Mode” mode according to the demand of real application;
Step 3: Customize each DS3 port as “DS3 Input” or “DS3 Output” according to the
demand;

ASI input setting
n
When the ASI input is used, the input source shall be connected for the DS3
Two-Way Adapter Card ASI-IN.
io
2
4
is 3
av
1
um
Fig. 5-66 DS3 Two-Way Adapter Card ASI Input Parameter Setting
Step 1: click the “Port2-ASI Input” in the “DS3 Two-Way Adapter Card” of Web
S
network management to log in the ASI input port to set the page;
Step 3: choose “Input” switch to be “On” and set the “Appointed PID” value to be
monitored;
88 /503
receiving ASI input source.
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-67 DS3 Two-Way Adapter Card ASI Input Monitor
um
S
89 /503
DS3 input setting
When the DS3 input is used, the DS3 input source shall be connected for the DS3
Two-Way Adapter Card DS3-IN.
2
5
n
3
io
4
1 is
av
Fig. 5-68 DS3 Two-Way Adapter Card DS3 Input Parameter Setting
um
Step 1: click the “Port n-DS3 Input” in the “DS3 Two-Way Adapter Card” of Web
network management to log in the DS3 input port to set the page;
Step 3: choose “Input” switch to be “On”;
Step 4: set the receiving parameter according to the DS3 input source, select the
“Multi Protocol”, “Frame Format”, “Bit Sequence”, “RS Decoding”, “Interleaved Decoding”
and “Descramble” to realize the normal signal receiving of DS3 input end and set the
S
monitored “Appointed PID”;
The monitoring interface shall display the code rate information of the DS3 input
source which is received currently.
90 /503
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-69 DS3 Two-Way Adapter Card DS3 Input Monitor
um
S
91 /503

ASI output setting
n
2
io
1
is
av
Fig. 5-70 DS3 Two-Way Adapter Card ASI Output Parameter Setting
Step 1: click the “Port1-ASI Output” in the “DS3 Two-Way Adapter Card” of Web
um
network management to log in the ASI output port to set the page;
Step 2: set the “Total Bitrate” of output port and choose correspondingly outputted
“Packet Format”;
This page can display the effective code rate value outputted by ASI currently.
S
92 /503
DS3 output setting
n
2
io
1
is
av
Fig. 5-71 DS3 Two-Way Adapter Card DS3 Output Parameter Setting
Step 1: click the “Port n-DS3 Output” in the “DS3 Two-Way Adapter Card” of Web
network management to log in the DS3 output port to set the page;
um
Step 2: set the DS3 output parameter according to the demand of the real application,
select the “Multi Protocol”, “Frame Format”, “Bit Sequence”, “RS Coding”, “Interleaved
Coding”, “Scramble” ,“Packet Format” ,“PCR Correction” and “Re-generate PCR”.
This page can display the effective code rate value outputted by DS3 currently.
S
93 /503
5.3.9.3 Parameter
Table 5-26 DS3 Two-Way Adapter Card Parameter

DS3/E3 Mode DS3 Mode/E3 Mode DS3 Mode
Port1 ASI Output ASI Output
Port2 ASI Input ASI Input
Port3 DS3 Output/DS3 Input DS3 Output
n
Port4 DS3 Output/DS3 Input DS3 Output
Port5 DS3 Output/DS3 Input DS3 Input
Table 5-27 DS3 Two-Way Adapter Card ASI Input Parameter
io
Port Name Character string(1-31Byte) “ASI In”
Input On/Off On
Parameter
Port Name
Input
is
Table 5-28 DS3 Two-Way Adapter Card DS3 Input Parameter
Range
Character string(1-31Byte)
On/Off
Default
“DS3 In”
On
av
Multi Protocol Normal Mode/Tandberg Normal Mode
Bit Sequence MSB/LSB LSB
Interleaved
On/Off Off
Decoding
Descramble
um
On/Off Off
Table 5-29 DS3 Two-Way Adapter Card ASI Output Parameter

Port Name Character string(1-31Byte) “ASI Out”
Total Bitrate (bps) 0~213000000 40000000
S
94 /503
Table 5-30 DS3 Two-Way Adapter Card DS3 Output Parameter

Port Name Character string(1-31Byte) “DS3 Out”
Multi Protocol Normal Mode/Tandberg Normal Mode
Bit Sequence MSB/LSB LSB
RS Coding On/Off Off
Interleaved Coding On/Off Off
n
Scramble On/Off Off
Package Format 188 Byte/204 Byte 188 Byte
PCR Correction On/Off On
io
Re-generate PCR On/Off Off
5.3.10 6-Ch.QAM Card
5.3.10.1 Interface
is
6-Ch.QAM Card provides one 6-adjacent-channel RF output interface for the output
of modulated signals, and one Ethernet interface for connecting and communicating CAS,
as shown in Fig. 5-72 6-Ch.QAM Card:
av
Fig. 5-72 6-Ch.QAM Card
5.3.10.2 Function
6-Ch.QAM Card contains a RF output port supporting 8-adjacent frequency output. It

um
can multiplex the program of other input ports to this port and output the program from this
port. For the program multiplex method, refer to section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting. Set the
QAM parameter until the real demand is satisfied. Turn on the RF switch to normally
output the RF signal.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The output frequency point quantity of 6-Ch.QAM Card is determined by the
authorization obtained. It supports the authorization of 1 to 8 frequency points.
S
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
WEB network management may check the status information of 6-Ch.QAM Card and
set the card and QAM parameter, as shown in the figure below:
95 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-73 6-Ch.QAM Card Parameter Config
av
um
S
Fig. 5-74 6-Ch.QAM Card Port Parameter Config
96 /503
5.3.10.3 Parameter
Table 5-31 6-Ch.QAM Card Parameter

Alarm On/Off On
3.0 Scramble Module/
Select Scrambler Scramble Card
Scramble Card
Channel Coding ANNEX_A/ ANNEX_B ANNEX_A
Channel BW 6MHz/8MHz 8MHz
n
Spectrum Inversion On/Off Off
RF On/Off Off
Output Level(dBuV) 95~115 100
io
Output Frequency(KHz) 52000~940000 544000
QAM Mode 64/128/256QAM 64QAM
Symbol Rate(Ksps) 5000~7000 6875
5.3.11 DVB-T/H-4 Mod. Card
5.3.11.1 Interface
is
DVB-T/H-4 Mod. Card provides a 4-frequency point output RF port to output the RF
signal of DVB-T/H standard of modulated program stream, as shown in Fig. 5-75
av
DVB-T/H-4 Mod. Card:
Fig. 5-75 DVB-T/H-4 Mod. Card

um
5.3.11.2 Function
The DVB-T/H-4 Mod. Card is provided with an RF output interface used for
modulating output of 8 TS stream routes with four frequency points in stages. It can
multiplex the program of other input ports to this port and output the program from this port.
For the program multiplex method, refer to section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting. Set the QAM
parameter until the real demand is satisfied. Turn on the RF switch to normally output the
RF signal.
S
WEB network management may check the status information of DVB-T/H-4 Mod.
Card and set the card and QAM parameter, as shown in the figure below:
97 /503
2
6
1
5
3
n
4
io
is
Fig. 5-76 DVB-T/H-4 Mod. Card Parameter Config
av
Step 1: Click “DVB-T/H-4 Mod. Card” of WEB network management to navigate to
card settings page;
Step 3: Open the “RF” switch;
Step 4: Set the “Output BandWidth” and “Spectrum Inversion”, and fill in the “Output
Level” according to the information of signal frequency point;
um
Step 5: Set the “Alarm” switch of the card to turn on or off the switch;
Step 6: After setting the parameter, click “Apply” to validate the parameter;
The monitoring interface shall display the status of the current output stream, etc.
S
98 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-77 DVB-T/H-4 Mod. Card Monitor
av
8
13
7
9
um
10 11 12
S
Fig. 5-78 DVB-T/H-4 Mod. Card RF Out Config Basic Parameter Setting
99 /503
Step 7: Click “RF Out” of “DVB-T/H-4 Mod. Card” of WEB network management to
navigate to port settings page;
Step 9: Click “Basic” to navigate to Basic parameter setting page;
Step 10: Open the “Switch” of every channel;
Step 11: Set the “Output Frequency” according to the real application requirement;
Step 12: Set the “Transfer Mode”, “Guard Interval”, “Modulation”, “Interleave Depth”,
n
“Hierarchical Mode”, “Inner Code Bitrate” and “Bitrate Adaption” according to the
information of signal frequency point;
io
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The output frequency difference value between the output frequency points of
DVB-T/H-4 modulation card shall be greater than the band width.
When the output band width values are 5, 6, 7 and 8, the difference between the
is
maximum frequency and the minimum one shall not be greater than 35MHz,
34MHz, 33MHz and 32MHz, respectively.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
av
16
14
um
15
S
Fig. 5-79 DVB-T/H-4 Mod. Card RF Out Config Advanced Parameter Setting
Step 14: click the “Advanced” on the page to log in the senior parameter setting page;
Step 15: set the senior function according to the demand, select the DVB-H signaling
100 /503
of port, cellular identification enable action, cellular identification, T.S. and MPE;
Step 16: After setting the parameter, click “Apply” to validate the parameter.
The monitoring interface shall display output code rate information of current output
stream.
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-80 DVB-T/H-4 Mod. Card RF Out Monitor
5.3.11.3 Parameter
um
Table 5-32 DVB-T/H-4 Mod. Card Parameter

Alarm On/Off On
RF On/Off On
Output BandWidth 5MHz/6MHz/7MHz/8MHz 5MHz
Spectrum Inversion On/Off Off
Output Level (dBuV) 90~120 95
S
101 /503
Table 5-33 DVB-T/H-4 Mod. Card RF Out Parameter

Switch On/Off On
Output Frequency
42~870 500
(MHz)
Transfer Mode 2k/4k/8k 2k
Guard Interval (1/4)/ (1/8)/ (1/16)/ (1/32) (1/32)
Modulation QPSK/16QAM/64QAM QPSK
n
Interleave Depth (1/4)/ (1/8)/ (1/16)/ (1/32) (1/32)
Hierarchical Mode No/Alpha1/Alpha2/Alpha3 No
Inner Code (1/2)
(1/2)/ (2/3)/ (3/4)/ (5/6) / (7/8)
Bitrate(HP/LP)
io
Bitrate Adaption On/Off On
DVB-H Signaling On/Off Off
Cell ID Enabled Enable/Disable Disable
Cell ID 0~65535 0
T.S. (HP/LP) On/Off Off
MPE (HP/LP)
5.3.12 DVB-S/S2 Mod. Card
5.3.12.1 Interface
is On/Off Off
av
DVB-S/S2 Mod. Card bases on EMR3.0 platform to provide functions of
single-channel ASI input and single-channel RF output. It is used to modulate the program
stream to the RF signal of DVB-S/S2 standard, as shown in Fig. 5-81 DVB-S/S2 Mod. Card:
um
Fig. 5-81 DVB-S/S2 Mod. Card
5.3.12.2 Function
DVB-S/S2 Mod. Card bases on EMR3.0 platform to support 1-channel ASI input (no
Multiplexing) and 1-channel RF modulated output. Its functions include: when “Backboard
Muxing TS” is chosen, it may choose the input stream of other cards for modulated output
and when “Local ASI TS” is chosen, it realizes the modulated output of the ASI input
S
stream of the current card according to DVB-S/S2 modulation standard to output the
frequency signal. For the program multiplex method, refer to section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing
Setting. Parameter setting page of WEB network management is as follows:
102 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-82 DVB-S/S2 Mod. Card
av
5.3.12.3 Parameter
Table 5-34 DVB-S/S2 Mod. Card Parameter

Alarm Switch ON/OFF ON
Input Source Backboard Muxing TS/Local ASI TS Backboard Muxing TS
um
Modulation Standard DVB-S/DVB-S2 DVB-S

FEC Rate & (QPSK-1/2)/ (QPSK-2/3)/
QPSK-1/2.
Constellation (QPSK-3/4)/ (QPSK-5/6)/ (QPSK-7/8)
FEC-Frame Type Normal/Short Normal
Pilot OFF/ON OFF
Roll off Factor 35%/25%/20% 35%
Symbol Rate (Ksps) 50-45000Ksps 27500
Output Level (dBuV) 73-113dBuV 95
Output Frequency(KHz) 950000-2150000KHz 950000
S
RF ON/OFF ON
103 /503
5.3.13 8VSB Modulation Card
5.3.13.1 Interface
8VSB Modulation Card provides one 12 nonadjacent frequency RF output interface

for the output of modulated signal of 8VSB standard, and one Ethernet interface (CTRL)
for upgrading and controlling the card. The two GbE interfaces are using for stream
receiving, as shown in Fig. 5-83 8VSB Modulation Card:
n
io
Fig. 5-83 8VSB Modulation Card
5.3.13.2 Function
is
8VSB Modulation Card provides one 12 nonadjacent frequency RF signal output. Log
on to the EMR network management and navigate to 8VSB Modulation Card page, you
can check the IP address of the Ethernet interface (CTRL) and set the alarm function.
Connect with the Ethernet interface of the card and click the “Control IP” link to log on to
av
the card network management with the initial username as Admin and password as
sumavisionrd. For the configuration method, refer to ‘8VSB Modulation Card Operation
Guide’.The network management page as shown in the figure below:
um
S
104 /503
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-84 8VSB Modulation Card
5.3.14 16 Channel QAM Modulation Card

um
5.3.14.1 Interface
16 Channel QAM Modulation Card provides a 16-frequency point output RF port to

output the RF signal of QAM standard of modulated program stream, as shown in Fig. 5-85
16 Channel QAM Modulation Card:
S
Fig. 5-85 16 Channel QAM Modulation Card
5.3.14.2 Function
The 16 Channel QAM Modulation Card is provided with an RF output interface used
for modulating output of 16 TS stream routes with 16 frequency points in stages. It can
multiplex the program of other input ports to this port and output the program from this port.
For the program multiplex method, refer to section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting. Set the QAM
105 /503
RF signal.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The output frequency point quantity of 16 Channel QAM Modulation Card is
determined by the authorization obtained. It supports the authorization of 1 to 16
frequency points.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
n
WEB network management may check the status information of 16 Channel QAM
Modulation Card and set the card parameter, as shown in the figure below:
io
4
1
is 3
2
av
um
Fig. 5-86 16 Channel QAM Modulation Card Parameter Config

Step 1: Click “16 Channel QAM Modulation Card” of WEB network management to
navigate to card settings page;
Step 2: Set the “Encoding Type” according to the information of signal frequency
S
point;
106 /503
6
8
5 7
n
9 11
io
10
is
av
Fig. 5-87 16 Channel QAM Modulation Card RF Out Config Parameter Setting
Step 5: Click “RF Out 1” of “16 Channel QAM Modulation Card” of WEB network
management to navigate to port settings page;
Step 7: Fill in the “Output Level” and open the “Port Switch”;
um
Step 8: After setting the parameter, click “Apply” of “Output Configuration” to validate
the parameter;
Step 9: Click the “Add Channel” on the page;
Step 10: Set the “Channel”, “Frequency”, “Modulation”, “Symbol Rate” and “Channel
Mode” according to the real application requirement;
Step 11: After setting the parameter, click “Apply” to of “RF Configuration” validate the
parameter;
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
S
The output frequency difference value between the output frequency points of 16
Channel QAM Modulation Card shall be greater than the band width.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
107 /503
13
n
io
12
is
av
Fig. 5-88 16 Channel QAM Modulation Card RF Out Config Parameter Setting
Step 12: Set the “Channel Mode” as “Delete” according to the real application
requirement;
Step 13: After setting the parameter, click “Apply” to delete the frequency point.
um
S
108 /503
The frequency parameters can also be modified on the page of each frequency point.
1
2
n
3
io
is
av
Fig. 5-89 16 Channel QAM Modulation Card Channel Parameter Setting
Step 1: Click “Channel 1.x” of “RF Out 1” of WEB network management to navigate to
channel settings page;
Step 2: Open the “Channel switch”;
um
Step 3: Fill in the “Frequency”, “SymbolRate” and “Atten”, and set the “Modulation”
according to the information of signal frequency point;
S
109 /503
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-90 16 Channel QAM Modulation Card RF Out Monitor
um
S
110 /503
5.3.14.3 Parameter
Table 5-35 16 Channel QAM Modulation Card Parameter
Type Parameter Range Default

Encoding Type ITU-A/ITU-B/ITU-C ITU-A
Card
Alarm On/Off On
Output Level 95.0~122.0dBuV 95.0 dBuV
Frequency
RF Output 42~1005MHz 42~1005
Range
n
Port Control On/Off On
Frequency 42~1005MHz 500 MHz
1:128,1/2:128,2/3:64,2/4:128,3/5:32,4/
io
Interleaving 6:128,4/7:16,8/8:128,5/9:8,16/10:128,6/ 9:8,16
RF Port 12:128,7/14:128,8
Output Modulation QAM64/QAM128/QAM256 QAM64
Configuration Symbol
3.5~7Mbaud 6.875
Rate(Mbaud)
Normal/Spec_inv/Mute/
Channel Mode Normal
Carrier Wave/Delete
Channel
Configuration
Channel
switch
Frequency
Symbol
Rate(Mbaud)
is On/Off
42~1005Mhz
3.5~7Mbaud
On
500 MHz
6.875
av
Atten 0~65 6.100
5.3.15 ISDB-T/Tb Card
5.3.15.1 Interface
ISDB-T/Tb Card provides one 6 nonadjacent frequency RF output interface for the
um
output of modulated signal of ISDB-T/Tb standard, as shown in Fig. 5-91 ISDB-T/Tb Card:
Fig. 5-91 ISDB-T/Tb Card

S
5.3.15.2 Function
The ISDB-T/Tb Card is provided with an RF output interface used for modulating
output of 6 TS stream routes with 6 frequency points in stages. It can multiplex the
program of other input ports to this port and output the program from this port. For the
program multiplex method, refer to section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting. Set the QAM
111 /503
RF signal.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The output frequency point quantity of ISDB-T/Tb Card is determined by the
authorization obtained. It supports the authorization of 1 to 6 frequency points.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
WEB network management may check the status information of ISDB-T/Tb Card and
set the card parameter, as shown in the figure below:
n
3
io
1
is
av
um
Fig. 5-92 ISDB-T/Tb Card Parameter Config

Step 1: Click “ISDB-T/Tb Card” of WEB network management to navigate to card
settings page;
S
112 /503
5
7
4 6
n
10
8
io
9
is
av
Fig. 5-93 ISDB-T/Tb Card RF Out Config Parameter Setting
Step 4: Click “RF Out 1” of “ISDB-T/Tb Card” of WEB network management to
um
Step 6: Fill in the “Output Level” and open the “Port Switch”;
Step 7: After setting the parameter, click “Apply” of “Output Configuration” to validate
the parameter;
Step 8: Click the “Add Channel” on the page;
Step 9: Set the “Channel”, “Frequency”, “Bandwidth”, “Transmode”, “Guard” and
“Pattern” according to the real application requirement;
Step 10: After setting the parameter, click “Apply” to of “RF Configuration” validate the
S
parameter;
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The output frequency difference value between the output frequency points of
ISDB-T/Tb Card shall be greater than the band width.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
113 /503
12
n
io
11
is
av
Fig. 5-94 ISDB-T/Tb Card RF Out Config Parameter Setting
Step 11: Set the “Pattern” as “Delete” according to the real application requirement;
Step 12: After setting the parameter, click “Apply” to delete the frequency point.
um
S
114 /503
The frequency parameters can also be modified on the page of each frequency point.
n
4
io
5
is 6
av
Fig. 5-95 ISDB-T/Tb Card Channel Parameter Setting
Step 1: Click “Channel 1.x” of “RF Out 1” of WEB network management to navigate to
um
channel settings page;

Step 2: Click “Channel Config” to navigate to setting page;
Step 3: Open the “Channel switch”;
Step 4: Fill in the “Frequency” and “Atten”, and set the “Bandwidth”, “Transmode”,
“Guard” and “Partial Reception” according to the information of signal frequency point;
Step 5: Fill in the “Segments” and set the “Modulation”, “Code Rate” and “Time Intlv”
according to the information of signal frequency point;
S
115 /503
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The “Partial Reception” can be enabled only when the number of “segments” in
the A layer is 1;
The number of layers should be allocated to the A, B, and C layers in order, and
the total number of segments is 13, that is, the number of A-layer segments
cannot be 0, or when the number of segments in the B-layer is not allocated, the
C-layer cannot allocate the number of segments.
n
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
io
7
is
av
8
um
Fig. 5-96 ISDB-T/Tb Card Stream Path Parameter Setting

Step 7: Click “Stream Path” to navigate to setting page;
Step 8: Set the “Layer set” to assign each PID to the specified layer according to the
S
information of signal frequency point;

＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
In the “Stream Path” setting, programs of the same PCR should be assigned to
the same layer.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
116 /503
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-97 ISDB-T/Tb Card RF Out Monitor
um
S
117 /503
5.3.15.3 Parameter
Table 5-36 ISDB-T/Tb Card Parameter

Card Alarm On/Off On
Output Level 85~122dBuV 95 dBuV
45~269MHz/75~300MHz/
176~400MHz/275~499MHz/
Frequency
RF Output 375~600MHz/476~700MHz/ 375~600MHz
n
Range
575~799MHz/675~900MHz/
776~1000MHz
Port Control On/Off On
Frequency 45~1000MHz 400 MHz
io
Bandwidth 6/7/8MHz 8MHz
RF Transmode 1/2/3 1
Configuration Guard (1/4)/(1/8)/(1/16)/(1/32) 1/4
Channel
Channel Normal/Spec_inv/Mute/
Configuration Normal
Mode Carrier Wave/Delete
Layer Para
Configuration
Channel
switch
Segments
Modulation
is On/Off
A+B+C = 13
64QAM/16QAM/QPSK
On
A:13 B:0 C:0
A:64QAM
B:64QAM
C:64QAM
av
A:7/8 B:1/2
Code Rate (1/2)/(2/3)/(3/4)/(5/6)/7/8
C:1/2
Time Intlv 1/2/3/4 1
Stream Path
Layer set A/B/C A
Configuration
5.3.16 MPEG2 SD AENC Card

um
5.3.16.1 Interface
MPEG2 SD AENC Card provides the video input interface of 75ΩBNC, and provides
audio input interface as the phoenix printed circuit board terminals of MINI COMBICON
(MC) socket and plug, plug direction parallel with conductors axial. MPEG2 SD AENC
Card is shown in Fig. 5-98 MPEG2 SD AENC Card:
S
Fig. 5-98 MPEG2 SD AENC Card
5.3.16.2 Function
MPEG2 SD AENC Card may code 2-channel analog signals to code the input analog
video and analog audio to TS. The coded programme may be made complex for the
118 /503
output card in “Multiplexing” page of WEB network management. For the program
multiplex method, refer to section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting. WEB network management
may set the coding parameter of MPEG2 SD AENC Card, as shown in the figure below:
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-99 MPEG2 SD AENC Card
5.3.16.3 Parameter
Table 5-37 MPEG2 SD AENC Card Parameter

um

Switch On/Off On
No Source Control Color bar/No Output Color bar
Format PAL/NTSC/AUTO/PAL-M/PAL-N/SECAM PAL
Video Level 0-255 128
Chroma Phase 0-255 128
Black Level 0-255 128
Chroma Gain 0-255 128
Video
S
Bitrate (bps) 1500000-15000000 4200000

VBR (bps) 1300000-14800000 3800000
GOP Structure III/IPP/IBP/IBBP IBBP
Gop Size 4-30 12
Aspect Ratio 4:3/16:9 4:3
Resolution D1/(3/4D1)/HD1/SIF D1
MP2 MP2 Coding On/Off On
119 /503
Audio stereo/joint stereo /Dual Channel/Single

MP2 Mode stereo
Channel
MP2 Volume -24db-6db 0
64Kbps/96Kbps/112 Kbps/ 128Kbps/
MP2 Bitrate 160Kbps/192 Kbps/224 Kbps/256 Kbps/ 256Kbps
320 Kbps/384Kbps
MP2 Sample Rate 48kHz/44.1kHz/32kHz 48kHz
AC3 Coding On/Off Off
AC3 Mode 2/0 / 1/0 2/0
n
AC3 Volume -20db-20db 0
56Kbps/64Kbps/80Kbps/96Kbps/
AC3 112 Kbps/ 128Kbps/ 160Kbps/
Audio AC3 Bitrate 192 Kbps/224 Kbps/256 Kbps/ 192Kbps
io
320 Kbps/384Kbps/448Kbps/
512Kbps/576Kbps/640Kbps
AC3 Sample Rate 48kHz/44.1kHz/32kHz 48kHz
AC3 Coding Delay
-500-500 0
(ms)
DRA Coding On/Off Off
DRA
Audio
DRA Mode
DRA Bitrate
DRA Sample Rate
DRA Coding Delay
(ms)
Multiplex
is stereo
128Kbps/192Kbps
48kHz
-500-500
On/Off
stereo
192Kbps
48kHz
300
On
av
Service ID 1-65535 Slot releted
Service Name 0~31 characters Slot releted
Service Provider 0~31 characters Slot releted
PCR PID 32-8190 Slot releted
TS
PMT PID 32-8190 Slot releted
Video PID 32-8190 Slot releted
MP2 PID 32-8190 Slot releted
um
AC3 PID 32-8190 Slot releted

DRA PID 32-8190 Slot releted
CC On/Off Off
CC Even Field On/Off Off
CC Odd Field On/Off Off
VBI TT On/Off Off
Even Field Line Line10-Line22 Line 21
Odd Field Line Line10-Line22 Line 21
S
TT PID 32-8190 Slot releted

Audio Select AC3 2.0/DRA 2.0 AC3 2.0
General
Alarm On/Off On
120 /503
5.3.17 MPEG2 SD DENC Card
5.3.17.1 Interface
The digital video input port of the MPEG2 SD DENC Card is 75ΩBNC port; the audio
input port is MINI COMBICON (MC for short) socket and plug of PCB terminal of Phoenix,
and the plugging direction is parallel to the wire axis. Distance between MC socket and
plug is small, outline dimension is low, wiring capacity is abundant and the socket and
n
plug are protected against incorrect plugging and dislocation, as shown in Fig. 5-100
MPEG2 SD DENC Card:
io
Fig. 5-100 MPEG2 SD DENC Card
5.3.17.2 Function
is
MPEG2 SD DENC Card may code 2-channel digital signals to code the input digital
av
may set the coding parameter of MPEG2 SD DENC Card, as shown in the figure below:
um
S
Fig. 5-101 MPEG2 SD DENC Card
121 /503
5.3.17.3 Parameter
Table 5-38 MPEG2 SD DENC Card Parameter

Switch On/Off On
Format PAL/NTSC/AUTO/PAL-M/PAL-N/SECAM PAL
Bitrate (bps) 1500000-15000000 4200000
n
VBR (bps) 1300000-14800000 3800000
Video
Gop Size 4-30 12
io
Resolution D1/3/4D1/HD1/SIF D1
No Source Control Color bar/No Output Color bar
MP2 Coding On/Off On
stereo/joint stereo /Dual Channel/Single
MP2 Mode stereo
Channel
MP2
Audio
Embedded
Channel
No Source Control
MP2 Input
MP2 Volume
is channel1,2/channel3,4/channel5,6/
channel7,8/channel9,10/channel11,12/
channel13,14/channel15,16
Silence/No output
Digital/Embeded
-24db-6db
channel1,2
Silence
Digital
0
av
64Kbps/96Kbps/112 Kbps/ 128Kbps/
MP2 Bitrate 160Kbps/192 Kbps/224 Kbps/256 Kbps/ 256Kbps
320 Kbps/384Kbps
MP2 Sample Rate 48kHz/44.1kHz/32kHz 48kHz
AC3 Coding On/Off Off
AC3 Mode 2/0 / 1/0 2/0
AC3 Volume -20db-20db 0
um
AC3 Input Digital/Embeded Embeded

56Kbps/64Kbps/80Kbps/96Kbps/
AC3 112 Kbps/ 128Kbps/ 160Kbps/
Audio AC3 Bitrate 192 Kbps/224 Kbps/256 Kbps/ 192Kbps
320 Kbps/384Kbps/448Kbps/
512Kbps/576Kbps/640Kbps
AC3 Sample Rate 48kHz/44.1kHz/32kHz 48kHz
AC3 Coding Delay
-500-500 0
(ms)
DRA Coding On/Off Off
S
DRA Mode stereo stereo

DRA Bitrate 128Kbps/192Kbps 192Kbps
DRA
Audio DRA Input Digital/Embeded Embeded
DRA Sample Rate 48kHz 48kHz
DRA Coding Delay
-500-500 300
(ms)
Multiplex On/Off On
TS
122 /503

PCR PID 32-8190 Slot releted
PMT PID 32-8190 Slot releted
Video PID 32-8190 Slot releted
MP2 PID 32-8190 Slot releted
AC3 PID 32-8190 Slot releted
DRA PID 32-8190 Slot releted
n
CC On/Off Off
CC Even Field On/Off Off
CC Odd Field On/Off Off
VBI TT On/Off Off
io
Even Field Line Read only Line 21
Odd Field Line Read only Line 21
TT PID 32-8190 Slot releted
Audio Select AC3 2.0/DRA 2.0 AC3 2.0
General
Alarm On/Off On
5.3.18 Analog SD ENC Card
5.3.18.1 Interface
is
av
Analog SD ENC Card provides the video input interface of 75ΩBNC, and provides
(MC) socket and plug, plug direction parallel with conductors axial. Analog SD ENC Card
is shown in Fig. 5-102 Analog SD ENC Card:
um
Fig. 5-102 Analog SD ENC Card
5.3.18.2 Function
Analog SD ENC Card may code 2-channel analog signals to code the input analog
S

may set the coding parameter of Analog SD ENC Card, as shown in the figure below:
123 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-103 Analog SD ENC Card
av
5.3.18.3 Parameter
Table 5-39 Analog SD ENC Card Parameter

General Alarm On/Off On
On/Off On/Off On
um
Format PAL/NTSC/Auto/PAL-M/PAL-N/SECAM PAL

Encoding
MPEG-2/H.264 MPEG-2
Type
MPEG-2:1000000~11000000
Bitrate (bps) 4200000
H.264: 500000~6000000
GOP Size 1~40 12
GOP
Auto/IP/IPB/IPBB/IPBBB IPBB
Structure
Video Entropy
CAVLC/CABAC CABAC
Coding
No IDRs/
S
IDR Every I-Frame is an IDR/

No IDR
Frequency Every second I-Frame is an IDR/
Every third I-Frame is an IDR
GOP Type Open GOP/Closed GOP Open GOP
H.264 Profile Main/High Main
Video Level 0~255 128
Chroma
0~255 128
Phase
124 /503
Black Level 0~255 128

Chroma Gain 0~255 128
Resolution D1/(3/4D1)/HD1 D1
MPEG-2: 4:3/16:9/1:1
Aspect Ratio 4:3
H.264: 4:3/16:9/1:1/2.35:1
No Source
Color bar/Black Screen/No Output Color bar
Control
On/Off On/Off On
Sample Rate 48 KHz /44.1 KHz /32 KHz 48KHz
n
MPEG-1 Layer II /AAC-LC/HEAAC-V1 MPEG-1
Type
/HEAAC-V2 Layer II
MPEG-1 Layer II: Stereo
AAC-LC: Stereo / L Channel Mono /
Audio
io
R Channel Mono / LR Mixed Mono
Mode Stereo
HEAAC-V1: Stereo / L Channel Mono /
HEAAC-V2: Stereo
Bitrate 32Kbps-384Kbps(see Table1) 192Kbps
Volume -24 dB ~6 dB 0 dB
TS
Service ID
Service Name
Service
Provider
PCR PID
is 1-65535
0~15 characters
0~15 characters
32~8190
Slot releted
Slot releted
Slot releted
Slot releted
av
PMT PID 32~8190 Slot releted
Video PID 32~8189 Slot releted
Audio PID 32~8190 Slot releted
TT PID 32~8190 Slot releted
TT On/Off Off
VBI CC On/Off Off
CC Delay 0/1/2/3 0
um
5.3.19 Digital SD ENC Card
5.3.19.1 Interface
Digital SD ENC Card provides the video input interface of 75ΩBNC, and provides
(MC) socket and plug, plug direction parallel with conductors axial. Digital SD ENC Card is
S
shown in Fig. 5-104 Digital SD ENC Card:
Fig. 5-104 Digital SD ENC Card
125 /503
5.3.19.2 Function
Digital SD ENC Card may code 2-channel Digital signals to code the input Digital
video and Digital audio to TS. The coded programme may be made complex for the output
card in “Multiplexing” page of WEB network management. For the program multiplex
method, refer to section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting. WEB network management may set
the coding parameter of Digital SD ENC Card, as shown in the figure below:
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-105 Digital SD ENC Card

um
5.3.19.3 Parameter
Table 5-40 Digital SD ENC Card Parameter

General Alarm On/Off On
On/Off On/Off On
Format PAL/NTSC/Auto/PAL-M/PAL-N/SECAM PAL
Encoding Type MPEG-2/H.264 MPEG-2
S
MPEG-2:1000000~11000000
Bitrate (bps) 4200000
H.264: 500000~6000000
Video GOP Size 1~40 12
GOP Structure Auto/IP/IPB/IPBB/IPBBB IPBB
Entropy Coding CAVLC/CABAC CABAC
No IDRs/
Every I-Frame is an IDR/
IDR Frequency No IDR
Every second I-Frame is an IDR/
Every third I-Frame is an IDR
126 /503
GOP Type Open GOP/Closed GOP Open GOP

H.264 Profile Main/High Main
Resolution D1/(3/4D1)/HD1 D1
MPEG-2: 4:3/16:9/1:1
Aspect Ratio 4:3
H.264: 4:3/16:9/1:1/2.35:1
No Source
Color bar/Black Screen/No Output Color bar
Control
Sample Rate 48 KHz /44.1 KHz /32 KHz 48KHz
General Audio Source
EMBedded/Digital EMBedded
n
Select
On/Off On/Off On
MPEG-1 Layer II /AAC-LC/HEAAC-V1 MPEG-1
Type
/HEAAC-V2 Layer II
io
MPEG-1 Layer II: Stereo
AAC-LC: Stereo / L Channel Mono / R
Channel Mono / LR Mixed Mono
Mode Stereo
HEAAC-V1: Stereo / L Channel Mono /
Audio HEAAC-V2: Stereo
Bitrate 32Kbps-384Kbps(see Table1) 192Kbps
Volume
NoInputsrc Mode
Embedded
Channel
is -24 dB ~6 dB
No output/silence
Channel1,2/ Channel 3,4/
Channel 5,6/ Channel 7,8/
0 dB
No output
0 dB
av
PCR PID 32~8190 Slot releted
TS PMT PID 32~8190 Slot releted
um

Dolby PID 32~8190 Slot releted
TT On/Off Off
CC On/Off Off
VBI
CEA608MODE Line21/S334(RAW) S334(RAW)
CC Delay 0/1/2/3 0
Video Encoding Type Video bitrate
Video Info Read only
Input status
Monitor
Audio Type Audio Rate Audio
S
Audio Info Read only

SampleRate
127 /503
5.3.20 DVI Enc Card
5.3.20.1 Interface
DVI Enc Card provides the video input interface of DVI-A/DVI-D, and provides audio
input interface as the phoenix printed circuit board terminals of MINI COMBICON (MC)
socket and plug, plug direction parallel with conductors axial. This card also provides a
MIC socket for audio input and a 100/1000M Ethernet interface for transmitting data. DVI
n
Enc Card is shown in Fig. 5-106 DVI Enc Card:
io
Fig. 5-106 DVI Enc Card
5.3.20.2 Function
DVI Enc Card may code DVI-A(analog)/DVI-D(digital) signal to code the input analog/
is
digital video and analog audio to TS. The corresponding encoding parameters can be set
at the card interface of the WEB network management. The DVI Enc Card don’t support
multiplexing function, the encoding program can only be output by the Ethernet port of this
card. By setting the IP parameter of this card, the program can output to the specified IP
av
and port. WEB network management may set the coding parameter of DVI Enc Card, as
shown in the figure below:
um
S
Fig. 5-107 DVI Enc Card
128 /503
5.3.20.3 Parameter
Table 5-41 DVI Enc Card Parameter

On/Off On/Off On
Bitrate(bps) 300000 ~ 9000000 4000000
Input DVI-A/DVI-D/Auto Auto
Input Gain 0 ~ 100 50
n
Auto/640 x 480/800 x 600/1024 x
768/
1280 x 720/1280 x 768/1280 x 800/
Output Resolution Auto
1280 x 960/1280 x 1024/1360 x 768/
1440 x 900/1600 x 900/1680 x 1050/
io
1920 x 1080/1920 x 1200
Video
GOP Structure IPP IPP
GOP Size 1~60 10
Encoding Type H.264 H.264
Coding Mode Frame Frame
Coding Profile
Brightness
Contrast
Saturation
Hue
is Base/Main/High
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
High
128
128
128
128
av
On/Off Off/On On
Encode Type AAC-LC AAC-LC
Mode Mono Mono
Sample Rate 48KHz 48KHz
Audio 1 56 kbps/64 kbps/80 kbps/96 kbps/
Bitrate 128kbps
112 kbps/128kbps/160 kbps
Volume 0dB 0dB
um
G.711 Algorithm A-law/μ-law A-law

AAC Format ADTS/LATM ADTS
On/Off Off/On Off
Encode Type AAC-LC AAC-LC
Mode Mono Mono
Sample Rate 48KHz 48KHz
Audio2 56 kbps/64 kbps/80 kbps/96 kbps/
Bitrate 128kbps
112 kbps/128kbps/160 kbps
Volume 0dB 0dB
S
G.711 Algorithm A-law/μ-law A-law

AAC Format ADTS/LATM ADTS
IP Address unicast IP not include
192.165.54.233
127.XXX.XXX.XXX
Network Gateway unicast IP not include
127.XXX.XXX.XXX，must the same 192.165.54.1
Speed and Duplex Auto-negotiation Auto-negotiation
129 /503
Alarm On/Off On
IGMP Version IGMPv2/IGMPv3 IGMPv2
Name 0~31 characters Port1
Destination IP
unicast IP or multicast IP 192.165.54.61
Address
Destination UDP Port 1~65535 12350
Transmit Bitrate Mode CBR/VBR CBR
Total Bitrate 0 ~ 10000000 6000000
n
Alarm On/Off On
Output On/Off On
Service id 1 ~ 65535 Slot releted
io
TS
Audio1 PID
Audio2 PID
5.3.21 AVC HD ENC Card

is 32~8190
32~8190
Slot releted
Slot releted
av
5.3.21.1 Interface
AVC HD ENC Card provides many input interfaces for one program encoding,
including 1 SDI input interface, 1 HD input and 1 extensible DVI interface EXT-IN. EXT-IN
expanded by the adapter interface comprises 1 analog video CVBS interface, 1
high-definition component interface Y (shared with CVBS), Pb, Pr, 4 digital audio
um
interfaces and 3 analog audio interfaces. AVC HD ENC Card is shown in Fig. 5-108 AVC
HD ENC Card:
Fig. 5-108 AVC HD ENC Card
5.3.21.2 Function
S
AVC HD ENC Card may code 1-channel digital/analog signal base on the H.264/ AVC
standard to code the input Digital video and Digital audio to TS. The coded programme
may be made complex for the output card in “Multiplexing” page of WEB network
Setting. WEB network management may set the coding parameter of AVC Digital ENC
Card.
In the AVC HD ENC Card setting page, you can set the authorization code and
130 /503
upgrade the firmware, the current authorization status will also be displayed on this page.
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-109 AVC HD ENC Card Parameter Configuration
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
um
The high-definition video, Dolby, and four-channel audio encoding functions

supported by the AVC HD ENC Card requires corresponding authorization
support. It can be realized by purchasing the authorization.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
AVC HD ENC Card encoding parameter setting page as shown in the figure below:
S
131 /503
2
3
n
io
1
is 4
av
Fig. 5-110 AVC HD ENC Card Port Video Parameter Configuration
Step 1: Click “Port1” of “AVC HD ENC Card” of WEB network management to
Step 2: Click “Video” to navigate to video parameter setting page;
um
Step 3: Set parameters such as video, subtitles and VBI according to the real
application requirement;
S
132 /503
5
6
n
io
is
av
7
Fig. 5-111 AVC HD ENC Card Port Audio Parameter Configuration

Step 5: Click “Audio” to navigate to audio parameter setting page;
Step 6: Set parameters such as “Work Mode” and “Encoding Type”, and select the
um
audio source for each audio channel according to the real application requirement;
S
133 /503
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
Audio 1 supports stereo, Dolby 5.1 and Dolby 7.1 audio encoding; Audio 2
supports stereo and Dolby 5.1 audio encoding; Audio 3 and Audio 4 only support
stereo encoding.
In stereo mode, the audio source is composed of “L R Channel”; in Dolby 5.1
mode, the audio source is composed of “L R Channel”, “C LFE Channel” and “Ls
Rs Channel”; in Dolby 7.1 mode, the audio source is composed of “L R Channel”,
n
“C LFE Channel”, “Ls Rs Channel” and “Lrs Rrs Channel”.
The audio source for each audio channel can be selected from eight-channel SDI
audio, four-channel HD audio, and four-channel digital audio and three-channel
io
analog audio extended with adapters. The corresponding options for each audio
are as follows:
Eight-channel SDI audio: “SDI-Ch 1,2”, “SDI-Ch 3,4”, ..., “SDI-Ch 15,16”
Four-channel HD audio: “HD-Ch 1,2”, “HD-Ch 3,4”, “HD-Ch 5,6” and “HD-Ch 7,8”
Four-channel digital audio: “EXT-1,2”, “EXT-3,4”, “EXT-5,6” and “EXT-7,8”
is
Three-channel analog audio: “EXT-9,10”, “EXT-11,12” and “EXT-13,14”
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The function of ALC can maintain the audio loudness of encoded output at the
loudness level of the input source at that time. After setting, the loudness of the audio
av
output will remain unchanged no matter whether the loudness of the input source is
changed or not. The function setting method is as follows.
um
S
134 /503
3
4
n
io
1
is 6
av
Fig. 5-112 AVC HD ENC Card Port Audio Parameter Configuration
Step 1: Click “Port” of “AVC HD ENC Card” of WEB network management to navigate
to port settings page;
um
Step 3: Set the “ALC Mode” as “Target Loud Mode” to maintain the audio loudness of
encoded output at the loudness level of the current input source;
Step 4: Select the “Calc Window Interval” and “Compensation Delay” according to the
real application requirement. It will determine the adjustment time required to restore the
target loudness when the loudness of the input audio changes;
Step 5: Set the “Target Loudness” and “Background Loudness” to adjust the audio
loudness of encoded output;
S
135 /503
5.3.21.3 Parameter
Table 5-42 AVC HD ENC Card Parameter

On/Off On/Off On
Bitrate（bps） 300kbps~50Mbps 8Mbps
CVBS ENC/SDI ENC/YPbPr ENC/
Mode HDMI ENC/Color Bar ENC/ SDI ENC
n
Black Screen ENC/Pass Through
Auto /1920*1080/1440*1080/1280*1080/
960*1080/1280*720/960*720/640*720/
720*576/480/544*576/480/480*576/480/
352*576/480
io
Output FrameRate Auto/50I/59.94I/60I/50P/59.94P/60P Auto
Profile Baseline/Main/High High
Level 3.0~4.1 4.0
Sync Mode Video Sync/Internal Sync Internal Sync
Aspect Ratio Auto/4:3/16:9 Auto
GOP Structure
GOP Size
IDR Frequency
(GOPs)
Entropy Coding
is III/IPP/IBP/IBBP
0~30
0~15
CAVLC/CABAC
IBBP
12
1
CABAC
av
Fault Handling No Video PID/Color Bar/
No Video PID
Mode Black Screen/Freezing Frame
Video PAL/NTSC/720P@24/[email protected]/
720P@30/[email protected]/720P@25/
Test Pattern 720P@60/[email protected]/720P@50/ PAL
1080I@30/[email protected]/1080I@25/
1080P@25/[email protected]/1080P @30
Pass Delay(ms) 0~500 0
Adaptive GOP Fixed GOP/Adaptive GOP Adaptive GOP
um
Adaptive SPS Fixed SPS/Adaptive SPS Adaptive SPS

Adaptive PPS Fixed PPS/Adaptive PPS Adaptive PPS
Brightness 0~255 128
Contrast 0~255 128
Saturation 0~255 128
Hue 64~191 128
Start PosX 0~1919 0
Start PosY 0~1079 0
Text Content 32 Characters NULL
TT 0ff/On 0ff
S
CC 0ff/On 0ff
Off/SDI Passthrough/16x9 Top Aligned/
14x9 Top Aligned/Wider Than 16x9/
Full Frame/4x3 Full Frame/
AFD 16x9 Full Frame/14x9 Pillar Or Letterbox/ Off
4x3 With Shoot And Protect 14x9 Center/
16x9 With Shoot And Protect 4x3 Center
Audio Sample Rate 48kHz/44.1kHz/32kHz 48kHz
136 /503
ALC Mode Off/Target Loud Mode Off

Calc Window
0~300 50
Interval(s)
Target
-45~-7 -15
Loudness(LUFS)
Background
-70~-30 -60
Loudness(LUFS)
Compensation
20~800 400
Delay(ms)
Work Mode Off/Encode/Pass Through/Transcode Encode
n
AAC-LC/HE-AAC v1/HE-AAC v2/
MPEG-1 Layer
Encoding Type MPEG-1 Layer II/Dolby Digital/
II
Dolby Digital Plus
SDI-Ch1,2 ~SDI-CH15,16/
io
HD -CH1,2 ~HD-CH7,8/
L R Channel SDI-Ch1,2
EXT-CH1,2~EXT-CH15，16/
Test Tone
C LFE Channel SDI-Ch1,2
Ls Rs Channel
is Test Tone
Test Tone
SDI-Ch1,2
av
Lrs Rrs Channel SDI-Ch1,2 ~SDI-CH15,16/
SDI-Ch1,2
Test Tone
Bitrate 32kbps~384kbps 128kbps
Volume -20dB~20dB 0dB
Mode Mono/Stereo/5.1CH/7.1CH Stereo
um
Delay(ms) -500~800 0
Service ID 1~65535 slotNo releative
Service Name 0~31 Characters slotNo releative
Service Provider 0~31 Characters slotNo releative
PMT PID 32~8190 slotNo releative
PCR PID 32~8190 slotNo releative
TS Video PID 32~8190 slotNo releative
Audio 1 PID 32~8190 slotNo releative
S

TT PID 32~8190 slotNo releative
137 /503
5.3.22 AVC Digital ENC Card
5.3.22.1 Interface
AVC Digital ENC Card provides 2 SDI input interfaces and 2 HD input interfaces for 2
programs encoding. Each program uses 1 SDI input interface and 1 HD input interface.
AVC Digital ENC Card is shown in Fig. 5-113 AVC Digital ENC Card:
n
io
Fig. 5-113 AVC Digital ENC Card
5.3.22.2 Function
AVC Digital ENC Card may code 2-channel Digital signals base on the H.264/ AVC
standard to code the input Digital video and Digital audio to TS. The coded programme
is
Setting. WEB network management may set the coding parameter of AVC Digital ENC
Card, as shown in the figure below:
av
um
S
Fig. 5-114 AVC Digital ENC Card Port Parameter Configuration

138 /503
The function of ALC can maintain the audio loudness of encoded output at the
loudness level of the input source at that time. After setting, the loudness of the audio
output will remain unchanged no matter whether the loudness of the input source is
changed or not. The function setting method is as follows.
n
1 5
3 4
io
is
av
6
Fig. 5-115 AVC Digital ENC Card Port Audio Parameter Configuration
um
Step 1: Click “Port” of “AVC Digital ENC Card” of WEB network management to
Step 3: Set the “ALC Mode” as “Target Loud Mode” to maintain the audio loudness of
encoded output at the loudness level of the current input source;
Step 4: select the “Loudness Mode” including “10s” and “30s” according to the real
application requirement. It will determine the adjustment time required to restore the target
loudness when the loudness of the input audio changes;
S
Step 5: Set the “Target Loudness” to adjust the audio loudness of encoded output;
139 /503
5.3.22.3 Parameter
Table 5-43 AVC Digital ENC Card Parameter

Real time
License Character
change
Real time
License Status Character, Read Only
change
Cancel/Firmware 1 Update/
Firmware Update Cancel
n
Firmware 2 Update
Card Real time
Working Status Character, Read Only
change
Output Sample
48kHz/44.1kHz/32kHz 48kHz
io
Rate
Resample Off/On Off
LogOnOff Off/On Off
Card Set Cancel/Clear CC/Card Reset Cancel
On/Off Off/On On
Bitrate(bps) 300000~50000000 8000000
Input
Output Resolution
isSDI/HDMI/Color Bar/Black Screen
Auto/1920x1080/1440x1080/1280x1080/
960x1080/1280x720/960x720/640x720/
720x576/480/544x576/480/480x576/480/
352x576/480
Auto/50I/59.94I/60I/50P/59.94P/60P/25P/
SDI
Auto
av
Output FrameRate Auto
29.97P/30P/24P/23.98P/
Level 3.0/3.1/3.2/4.0/4.1/ 4.0
Aspect Ratio Auto/4:3/16:9 Auto
GOP Size 1~30 12
IDR
um
0~15 1
Frequency(GOPs)
Video Entropy Coding CAVLC/CABAC CABAC
Fault Handling No Video PID/Color Bar/
No Video PID；
Mode Black Screen/Freezing Frame
Test Pattern PAL PAL
Compatibility
Encoding Mode Compatibility Prior/Quality Prior
Prior
Adaptive GOP Fixed GOP/Adaptive GOP Fixed GOP
Adaptive SPS Fixed SPS/Adaptive SPS Fixed SPS
S
Adaptive PPS Fixed PPS/Adaptive PPS Fixed PPS

Start PosX 1~1919 1
Update Station
Cancel/Confirm Cancel
Caption
Start PosY 1~1079 1
Display On/Off Off/On Off
TT Off/On Off
CC Off/On Off
140 /503
Off/SDI Passthrough/16x9 Top Aligned/

14x9 Top Aligned/Wider Than 16x9/
Full Frame/4x3 Full Frame/16x9 FullFrame/
AFD 14x9 Pillar or Letterbox/ off
Input Sample Rate 48kHz/44.1kHz/32kHz 48kHz
ALC Mode Off/Target Loud Mode Off
Target
n
-45~-7 -10
Loudness(LUFS)
Loudness Mode 10s/30s 30s
On/Off Off/Encoding/Passthrough Encoding
io
MPEG-1
Encoding Type MPEG-1 LayerII/Dolby Digital/
LayerII；
Dolby Digital Plus
SDI-Ch 1,2/SDI-Ch 3,4/SDI-Ch 5,6/
L R Channel SDI-Ch 13,14/SDI-Ch 15,16/ SDI-Ch 1,2
HDMI-Ch 1,2/HDMI-Ch 3,4/
Audio
C LFE Channel
is
HDMI-Ch 5,6/HDMI-Ch 7,8/Test Tone
SDI-Ch 13,14/SDI-Ch 15,16/
SDI-Ch 1,2
av
Ls Rs Channel SDI-Ch 13,14/SDI-Ch 15,16/ SDI-Ch 1,2
32kbps/48kbps/56kbps/64kbps/80kbps/
Bitrate 96kbps/112kbps/128kbps/160kbps/192kbps/ 128kbps
224kbps/256kbps/320kbps/384kbps
Volume (-20~20) Company:dB 0
um
Mode Mono/Stereo/5.1 CH Only Audio 1 Stereo

Delay(ms) (-500~1400) 0
Service ID 1~65535； Slot releted
Service Name Character Slot releted
Service Provider Character DVT
TS PCR PID 20~8189 Slot releted
S
Audio 1 PID 20~8189 Slot releted

141 /503
5.3.23 ENC TRC Card
5.3.23.1 Interface
ENC TRC Card provides 4 SDI input interface of 75ΩBNC (Reserved), as shown in
Fig. 5-116 ENC TRC Card and Fig. 5-117 ENC TRC Card(Transcode only):
n
Fig. 5-116 ENC TRC Card
io
Fig. 5-117 ENC TRC Card(Transcode only)
5.3.23.2 Function
is
ENC TRC Card may transcode the input SD/HD program into the required resolution
and type. The transcoded program may be made complex for the output card in
“Multiplexing” page of WEB network management. For the program multiplex method,
refer to section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting. WEB network management may set the
av
transcoding parameter of ENC TRC Card, as shown in the figure below:
um
S
Fig. 5-118 ENC TRC Card Program Configuration

142 /503
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The processing power of the ENC TRC Card is decided by the authorization. The
maximum processing power refers to 8 SD program (one HD program is
equivalent to 4 SD programs). The processing power can be realized by
purchasing corresponding authorization.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The “Monitor” interface can display relevant information of currently-transcoded
n
program.
io
is
av
um
Fig. 5-119 ENC TRC Card Program Monitor
5.3.23.3 Parameter
Table 5-44 ENC TRC Card Parameter

Real time
Temperature Character ,Read Only
change
S
Firmware 2 Update/Logo Upload
Real time
Card Working Status Character ,Read Only
change
Real time
Card License Character
change
Real time
Program License Character
change
Reset Card Reset Auto/Manual Auto
143 /503
Manner
Firmware Reset
Auto/Manual Auto
Manner
Output Error
Off/On Off
Process
Input Error Pass Through/Next Frame/
Pass
Process Next I Frame
Manual Reset Cancel/Card Reset/Firmware Reset/
Cancel
Select Clear CC/Get Log
Multi-Screen 1 Input 1 Output/1 Input 2 Output/ 1 Input 1
n
Mode 1 Input 3 Output/1 Input 4 Output Output
Off/SDI-Encode/Color Bar-Encode/
Selection Transcode
Black Screen-Encode/Transcode
Encoding Type H.264/MPEG-2 H.264
io
Bitrate(bps) 300,000~60,000,000 2000000
Auto /1920x1080/1440x1080/1280x1080/
Output 960x1080/1280x720/960x720/640x720/
Auto
Resolution (720x576/480)/(704x576/480)/(544x576/480)/
(528x576/480)/(480x576/480)/(352x576/480)
Auto/IPP/IPB/IPBB/IPBBB/
GOP Structure Auto
GOP Size
Coding Mode
Rate Control
Scene Change
Detection
is IPBBBB/IPBBBBB
0~300
Frame/Field/MBAFF/PAFF
CBR/VBR
Off/Insert I Frame/Insert IDR Frame/
Insert P Frame
12
PAFF
CBR
Insert I
Frame
av
Aspect Ratio 4:3/16:9/Auto Auto
No Video PID/Color Bar/Black Screen/
OP Video Loss No Control
No Control
PAL/NTSC/720p @50/720p @59.94/
Test Pattern 720p @60/1080i @25/1080i @29.97/1080i PAL
Video @30
Internal
Sync Mode Video Sync/Internal Sync
Sync
um
Pre-Processing Off/On On
ETE Delay(ms) 3500~5000 4500
Auto/1.0/1.1/1.2/1.3/2.0/2.1/2.2/
Level Auto
3.0/3.1/3.2/4.0/4.1/4.2
IDR
0~255 1
Frequency(GOPs)
Profile Main Main
S
Level Auto/High/High 1440/Main Auto

Closed
Closed GOP Open GOP/Closed GOP
GOP
AFD DAR 4:3/16:9/Auto Auto
Normal/Normal With Default/Override/
AFD Input Mode Normal
Remove/Passthrough
16x9 Top Aligned/14x9 Top Aligned/
16x9 Top
AFD Code Wider Than 16x9/Full Frame/
Aligned
4x3 Full Frame/16x9 FullFrame/
144 /503
14x9 Pillar or Letterbox/

Start PosX 1~1919 1
Start PosY 1~1079 1
Text Content 0~63
PIP On/Off Off/On Off
Resolution 96×96/128×96/176×144/192×192 96×96
n
Bitrate(kbps) 96,000~400,000 96000
Sample Rate 48kHz/44.1kHz/32kHz 48kHz
Status Off/Encoding/Pass Through/Transcoding Transcoding
io
MPEG-1
Encoding Type MPEG-1 LayerII/Dolby Digtal/
LayerII
Dolby Digtal Plus/LPCM
L R Channel SDI-Ch 7,8/SDI-Ch 9,10/SDI-Ch 11,12/ SDI-Ch 1,2
SDI-Ch 13,14/SDI-Ch 15,16/Test Tone
Audio C LFE Channel
Ls Rs Channe
isSDI-Ch 7,8/SDI-Ch 9,10/SDI-Ch 11,12/
32kbps/48kbps/56kbps/64kbps/80kbps/96kbps/
SDI-Ch 1,2
SDI-Ch 1,2
av
Bitrate 112kbps/128kbps/160kbps/192kbps/224kbps/ 128kpbs
256kbps/320kbps/384kbps
Volume(dB) -20~20(dB) 0
Mode Mono/Stereo/5.1 Channel Stereo
Delay(ms) -300~300 0
Service ID 1~65535； Slot releted
um

TS
Real time
Logo info Character ,Read Only
change
Cancel/clear current logo/
Logo clear Cancel
cleat current port logo/clear current card logo
S
Logo Switch Hide/Show Hide

Destination X 0~1920 0
Destination Y 0~1080 0
Logo Type Static Static
Opacity(%) 0~100 100
Real time
ES Pass Source PID Character ,Read Only
change
Through
Information Character ,Read Only Real time
145 /503
change
Pass Through Off/On Off
Delay Time(ms) -500~1500 0
Destination PID 32~8191 Slot releted
5.3.24 High Density TRC Card
5.3.24.1 Interface
n
High Density TRC Card provides 2 power socket for the fan of card, as shown in Fig.
5-120 High Density TRC Card:
io
5.3.24.2 Function
is
Fig. 5-120 High Density TRC Card
High Density TRC Card may transcode the input SD/HD program into the required
av
resolution and type. The transcoded program may be made complex for the output card in
refer to section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting. WEB network management may set the
transcoding parameter of High Density TRC Card.
5.3.24.2.1 Board card setting

um
The functions of card license, massive modification of video and audio parameters
and statistic multiplex are displayed on the card settings page.
S
146 /503
1
3
n
5
io
5
is
Fig. 5-121 High Density TRC Card Configuration
av
Step 1: click the “High Density TRC Card” of WEB network management to log in the
High Density TRC Card setting page;
Step 2: click the “Card” on the page to log in the card parameter setting page;
Step 3: select the “Firmware Update” and set the “Work Mode License” and “Program
License”;
um
parameter into effect;
Step 5: After authorization, the corresponding authorization will display in the “Card”
page and other setting pages.
S
147 /503
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The processing power of the High Density TRC Card is decided by the
authorization. The maximum processing power refers to 24 SD program (one HD
program is equivalent to 4 SD programs). The processing power can be realized
by purchasing corresponding authorization.
The number of SD/HD program authorization is determined by the Work Mode
License.
n
The function of statistic multiplex and the audio type supported are determined
by the Program License.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
io
The corresponding parameters can be massive modified in the "Video ", "Audio" and
"TS" pages of the High Density TRC Card. For the method of massive modification, refer
to section 6.2Massive modification function.
is
av
um
Fig. 5-122 High Density TRC Card Video Configuration

S
The High Density TRC Card also supports the statistical multiplexing function of
transcoding program.
148 /503
3
1
n
io
5
is 6
Fig. 5-123 High Density TRC Card Statmux Configuration

av
Step 1: click the “High Density TRC Card” of WEB network management to log in the
High Density TRC Card setting page;
Step 2: click the “Statmux” on the page to log in the statistical multiplex page;
Step 3: select the “Statmux” mode according to the demand of real application. There
are “One Statmux Group”, “Two Statmux Group” and “There Statmux Group” to choose
um
from;
Step 4: set the “Single Program Min Bitrate”, “Single Program Max Bitrate” and
“System Bitrate” and select the “Input Pattern” according to the demand of real
application;
Step 5: set the “Select Statmux Group” and “Program Statmux Weight” according to
the demand of real application. The parameters of “Select Statmux Group” and “Program
Statmux Weight” can be massive modified. For the method of massive modification, refer
S
to section 6.2Massive modification function.;
parameter into effect;
149 /503
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The statistical multiplexing group "System Bitrate" determines the total rate of all
programs of the group. The “Single Program Min Bitrate” is limited by the
"System Bitrate". The average minimum bit rate of program is calculated
according to the "System Bitrate" and the number of programs in the group. If the
average minimum bit rate is less than the “Single Program Min Bitrate”, the
system will automatically change the value of the “Single Program Min Bitrate” to
n
the average minimum bit rate.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
5.3.24.2.2 Program setting
io
WEB network management may set the transcoding parameter of High Density TRC
Card, as shown in the figure below:
is
av
um
Fig. 5-124 High Density TRC Card Program Configuration

The “Monitor” page can display relevant information of currently-transcoded program.
S
150 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-125 High Density TRC Card Program Monitor
av
5.3.24.3 Parameter
Table 5-45 High Density TRC Card Parameter

Real time
Temperature Character ,Read Only
change
um

Firmware 2 Update/Logo Upload
Real time
Card Working Status Character ,Read Only
change
Real time
Work Mode License Character
change
Real time
Program License Character
change
One Statmux Group/Two Statmux Group/ One Statmux
Statmux
Three Statmux Group Group
Single Progaram Min
600,000~15,000,000 1,000,000
Bitrate (bps)
S
Single Progaram Max

600,000~15,000,000 5,000,000
Bitrate (bps)
StatMux
Systeme Bitrate (bps) 600,000~60,000,000 20,000,000
MPEG-2
Input Pattern MPEG-2
H.264
Off/First Statmux Group/
Select Statmux Group Second Statmux Group/ Off
Third Statmux Group
151 /503
Program Statmux
0.5~3.5 1.0
Weigh
Card Reset Manner Auto/Manual Auto
Firmware Reset
Auto/Manual Auto
Manner
Reset Output Error Process Off/On Off
Input Error Process Pass Through/Next Frame/Next I Frame Pass
Cancel/Card Reset/Firmware Reset/
Manual Reset Select Cancel
Clear CC
n
On/Off Off/On On
Encoding Type H.264/MPEG-2 H.264
Bitrate(bps) 300,000~15,000,000 2000000
Auto /1920x1080/1440x1080/1280x1080/
io
960x1080/1280x720/960x720/640x720/
(720x576/480)/(704x576/480)/(544x576/480)/
(528x576/480)/(480x576/480)/(352x576/480)
GOP Dynamic Max IPP/IPB/IPBB/IPBBB/IPBBBB/IPBBBBB IPBBB
GOP Dynamic Min IPP/IPB/IPBB/IPBBB/IPBBBB/IPBBBBB IPP
GOP Size 0~300 12
Coding Mode
Rate Control
Scene Change
Detection
Aspect Ratio
is Frame/Field/MBAFF/PAFF
CBR/VBR
Off/Insert I Frame/Insert IDR Frame/
4:3/16:9/Auto
PAFF
CBR
Insert I Frame
Auto
av
OP Video Loss No Control
No Control
Pre-Processing Off/On On
ETE Delay(ms) 3500~4500 4500
Video Profile Baseline/Main/High High
Auto/1.0/1.1/1.2/1.3/2.0/2.1/2.2/
Level Auto
3.0/3.1/3.2/4.0/4.1/4.2
IDR
um
0~255 1
Frequency(GOPs)
Profile Main Main
Level Auto/High/High 1440/Main Auto
AFD DAR 4:3/16:9/Auto Auto
Normal/Normal With Default/Override/
AFD Input Mode Normal
Remove/Passthrough
16x9 Top Aligned/14x9 Top Aligned/
Wider Than 16x9/Full Frame/
4x3 Full Frame/16x9 FullFrame/
S
16x9 Top
AFD Code 14x9 Pillar or Letterbox/
Aligned
PIP On/Off Off/On Off
Resolution 96×96/128×96/176×144/192×192 96×96
Bitrate(kbps) 96,000~400,000 96000
Audio Sample Rate 48kHz/44.1kHz/32kHz 48kHz
152 /503
Status Off/Encoding/Pass Through/Transcoding Pass Through

MPEG-1
Encoding Type MPEG-1 LayerII/Dolby Digtal/
LayerII
Dolby Digtal Plus/LPCM
32kbps/48kbps/56kbps/64kbps/80kbps/96kbps/
Bitrate 112kbps/128kbps/160kbps/192kbps/224kbps/ 128kpbs
256kbps/320kbps/384kbps
Volume(dB) -20~20 0
Mode Mono/Stereo/5.1 Channel Stereo
n
Delay(ms) -300~300 0
PSI Manual/Follow Input Manual
Service ID 1~65535 Slot releted
io
TS PMT PID 32~8190 Slot releted
Audio 2 PID
5.3.25 TRC Card
5.3.25.1 Interface
is 32~8190 Slot releted
av
ENC TRC Card (Hardware version 1.0) provides 2 HD-SDI Output interfaces
(Reserved), as shown in Fig. 5-126 TRC Card (Hardware version 1.0):
um
Fig. 5-126 TRC Card (Hardware version 1.0)

ENC TRC Card (Hardware version 2.0) provides 2 SDI Output interfaces for decoding
the first program of each channel, as shown in Fig. 5-127 TRC Card (Hardware version 2.0):
Fig. 5-127 TRC Card (Hardware version 2.0)

S
5.3.25.2 Fucntion
TRC Card may transcode 2-channel SD/HD programs. It’s used for transcoding the
input SD/HD program into the required resolution and type. It can decode the first program
in each transcoding stream, and then output it in the form of SDI. The transcoded program
153 /503

Setting. WEB network management may set the transcoding parameter of TRC Card.
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-128 TRC Card Program Configuration
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The HD processing power of the TRC Card is decided by the authorization.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The “Monitor” interface can display relevant information of currently-transcoded
um
program.
S
154 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-129 TRC Card Program Monitor
av
5.3.25.3 Parameter
Table 5-46 TRC Card Parameter

Real time
License Character Read Only
change
Real time
License Status Character
um
change
Port1 Working Real time
Character Read Only
Status change
Card Port2 Working Real time
Character Read Only
Status change
Cancel/FTP Port 1/FTP Port 2/
(FTP Port 1/2)
Update PID 0x20~0x1ffe 0x1b58
Alarm Off/On On
Reset Select Cancel/CC Clear Cancel
S
Transcode Off/On On
Bitrate (bps) 300,000~20,000,000，unit：bps 2000000
(1920×1080/60i)/(1920×1080/50i)/
Resolution (1280×720/60p)/(1280×720/50p)/ Auto
Video
(720×576/50i)/(720×480/60)/iAuto
Horizontal Scaler Off/(3/4 Scaler)/(2/3 Scaler)/(1/2 Scaler) Off
Level 3.0/3.1/3.2/4.0/4.1 4.0
155 /503
Aspect Ratio 4:3/16:9/Auto Auto

GOP Structure IPP/IPB/IPBB IPBB
GOP Size 0~30 12
IDR Frequency
0~15 1
(GOPs)
Compatibility
Encoding Mode Compatibility Prior/Quality Prior
Prior
Adaptive GOP Fixed GOP/Adaptive GOP Fixed GOP
n
Adaptive SPS Fixed SPS/Adaptive SPS Fixed SPS
Adaptive PPS Fixed PPS/Adaptive PPS Adaptive PPS
Video Test Output Off/On Off
io
Scale Method FullScreen/LetterBox/CenterCut/Mixed LetterBox
HD Aspect Ratio 4:3/16:9 16:9
4:3
SD Aspect Ratio 4:3/16:9
TT Off/On Off
CC Off/On Off
AFD Mode
is
Off/SDI Passthrough/16x9 top aligned/
14x9 top aligned/Wider than 16x9/
Full frame/4x3 full frame/16x9 full frame/
14x9 pillar or letterbox/
4x3 with shoot and protect 14x9 center/
16x9 with shoot and protect 14x9 center/
Off
av
16x9 with shoot and protect 4x3 center
Transcode Off/On Off
Delay (ms) -200~200 0
Source Select Audio 1/Audio 2/Audio 3 Audio 1
32kbps/48kbps/56kbps/64kbps/80kbps/
96kbps/112kbps/128kbps/160kbps/
Bitrate 128Kbps
192kbps/224kbps/256kbps/320kbps/
384kbps
um
Volume -18dB~20dB 0dB

MPEG1 Layer
Audio Encode Type MPEG1 Layer II/AAC/Dolby Digital
II
Channel Mode Mono/Stereo Stereo
Relate with
Source PID 0~31 Character
input
Relate with
Type 0~31 Character
input
Pass Through Off/On On
Delay Time (ms) -500 ~ 500 0
S
Destination PID 0x20 ~ 0x1ffe Relate with slot

Service ID 1~65535； Relate with slot
Service Name 0~31 Character Relate with slot
TS Service Provider 0~31 Character DVT
PMT PID 32~8190 Relate with slot
PCR PID 32~8190 Relate with slot
Video PID 32~8190 Relate with slot
156 /503
Audio 1 PID 32~8190 Relate with slot

TT PID 32~8190 Relate with slot
General Alarm Off/On On
5.3.26 AVS DIGITAL ENC TRC Card
n
5.3.26.1 Interface
AVS DIGITAL ENC TRC Card provides 1 SDI input interfaces (SDI_IN-1) for digital
io
video and audio input. AVS DIGITAL ENC TRC Card also provides an Ethernet interface
(GbE-1) for upgrading and the other interfaces are reserved. AVS DIGITAL ENC TRC
Card is shown in Fig. 5-130 AVS DIGITAL ENC TRC Card:
is
av
Fig. 5-130 AVS DIGITAL ENC TRC Card
5.3.26.2 Function
AVS DIGITAL ENC TRC Card may code 1-channel SD/HD digital signal. It’s used for
encoding the input digital video and audio to the corresponding coding standard TS. AVS
um
DIGITAL ENC TRC Card can also transcode the input SD/HD program into the required
resolution and type. The AVS+, AVS, H.264 and MPEG2 coding standards are supported.
The transcoded program may be made complex for the output card in “Multiplexing” page
of WEB network management. For the program multiplex method, refer to section
5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting. WEB network management may set the transcoding parameter
of AVS DIGITAL ENC TRC Card, as shown in the figure below:
S
157 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-131 AVS DIGITAL ENC TRC Card Program Configuration
The transcoding parameters and coding parameters of the AVS DIGITAL ENC TRC
av
Card are both set in the video, audio and stream pages. The actual function of the card
should be selected in the board interface, as shown in the figure below:
um
S
Fig. 5-132 AVS DIGITAL ENC TRC Card Configuration

158 /503
The “Transcode” interface can display relevant program information of

currently-transcoded program.
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-133 AVS DIGITAL ENC TRC Card Transcode Configuration
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
Do not multiplex any program other than the program need to be transcoded,
when AVS DIGITAL ENC TRC Card is working in the “transcode” mode.
The audio coding types supported by AVS DIGITAL ENC TRC Card such as AAC,
um
AC3 and EAC3 require corresponding authorization support. It can be realized by

purchasing the authorization.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The “Monitoring” interface can display relevant information of currently-transcoded
program.
S
159 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-134 AVS DIGITAL ENC TRC Card Program Monitor
av
5.3.26.3 Parameter
Table 5-47 AVS DIGITAL ENC TRC Card Parameter

On/Off On/Off On
Video Bitrate
ES Bitrate/TS Bitrate ES Bitrate
Type
um
Bitrate(bps) 100000~24000000 3000000

Video Source External Input/Test-Color Bar/Test-Black Screen External Input
Frame
25 25
Rate(fps)
Auto/ 1920x1080 / 1280x720 / 720x576/480 /
Output
704x576/480 / 544x576/480 / 528x576/480 / Auto
Resolution
AVS+ 480x576/480 / 352x576/480
Video Aspect Ratio 4:3/16:9 4:3
GOP Size 1~150 25
S
Max B Frames 0~7 2

Scene Change
On/Off On
Detection
DeInterlace
On/Off On
Proccess
OP Video Loss Color Bar
Freezing Frame
Profile Broadcast Broadcast
Level 6.0.0.08.60/6.0.1.08.60/6.0.3.08.60/ 6.0.1.08.60
160 /503
4.0.0.08.30/4.2.0.08.30/4.0.2.08.60
Picture
Frame/Field/PAFF Frame
Structure
Adaptive B
On/Off Off
Frames
2-Pass On/Off Off
On/Off On/Off On
Video Bitrate
ES Bitrate/TS Bitrate ES Bitrate
Type
n
Bitrate(bps) 100000~24000000 3000000
Video Source External Input/Test-Color Bar/Test-Black Screen External Input
Frame
25 25
Rate(fps)
io
Auto/ 1920x1080 / 1280x720 / 720x576/480 /
Output
704x576/480 / 544x576/480 / 528x576/480 / Auto
Resolution
480x576/480 / 352x576/480
Aspect Ratio 1:1/4:3/16:9 1:1
H.264 GOP Size 1~150 25
Video
Max B Frames
Scene Change
Detection
DeInterlace
Proccess
is 0~7
On/Off
On/Off
No Video PID/Color Bar/Black Screen/Freezing
2
On
On
av
OP Video Loss Color Bar
Frame
Profile Broadcast Broadcast
Level 3.0/3.1/3.2/4.0/4.2 4.2
Picture
Frame/MBAFF Frame
Structure
Adaptive B
On/Off Off
Frames
um
On/Off On/Off On
Encoding MPEG1 LayerⅡ/MPEG1 LayerⅢ MPEG1 Layer
Format /DRA/AAC/AC3/EAC3 Ⅱ
32/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224
Bitrate 192kbps
/256/320/384/448/1536kbps
Mono/L-R Mode/Stereo/
Mode L-R Mode
5.1 Surround Sound
Volume(dB) -20~20 0
Audio Delay(ms) -500~1000 0
SDI-Ch1,2/SDI-Ch3,4/SDI-Ch5,6/SDI-Ch7,8/
S
L R Channel SDI-Ch9,10/SDI-Ch11,12/SDI-Ch13,14/ SDI-Ch1,2

SDI-Ch15,16
Ls Rs Channel SDI-Ch9,10/SDI-Ch11,12/SDI-Ch13,14/ SDI-Ch1,2
SDI-Ch15,16
C LFE Channel SDI-Ch9,10/SDI-Ch11,12/SDI-Ch13,14/ SDI-Ch1,2
SDI-Ch15,16
TS Service ID 1~65535 Slot related
161 /503
Service Name 0~31 characters Slot related

Service
0~31 characters Slot related
Provider
PCR PID 32~8190 Slot related
PMT PID 32~8190 Slot related
Video PID 32~8190 Slot related
Audio PID 32~8190 Slot related
5.3.27 AVS ENC TRC Card
n
5.3.27.1 Interface
io
AVS ENC TRC Card provides 1 SDI input interfaces for digital video and audio input，
which is a 75ΩBNC port on the left side of the card. AVS ENC TRC Card also provides an
Ethernet interface for upgrading and the other interfaces are reserved. AVS ENC TRC
Card is shown in Fig. 5-135 AVS ENC TRC Card:
5.3.27.2 Function
is
Fig. 5-135 AVS ENC TRC Card
av
AVS ENC TRC Card may code 1-channel digital signal. It’s used for encoding the
input digital video and audio to the corresponding coding standard TS. The AVS+ and
H.264 coding standards are both supported. The transcoded program may be made
complex for the output card in “Multiplexing” page of WEB network management. For the
program multiplex method, refer to section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting. WEB network
um
management may set the transcoding parameter of AVS ENC TRC Card, as shown in the
figure below:
S
162 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-136 AVS ENC TRC Card Program Configuration
av
program.
um
S
Fig. 5-137 AVS ENC TRC Card Program Monitor

163 /503
5.3.27.3 Parameter
Table 5-48 AVS ENC TRC Card Parameter

On/Off On/Off On
Statistic
On/Off Off
Multiplex
Aspect Ratio 1:1/4:3/16:9 1:1
Bitrate(bps) 100000~60000000 3000000
n
Max B Frames 0~7 2
Video Source SDI/Test-Color Bar/Test-Black Screen SDI
Scene Change
On/Off On
io
Detection
Frame Rate(fps) 25 25
DeInterlace
AVS+ On/Off On
Proccess
Video Auto/ 720x576/480 / 704x576/480 /
Output
544x576/480 / 528x576/480 / 480x576/480 Auto
Resolution
/ 352x576/480
OP Video Loss
Rate Control
Profile
Picture
is No Video PID/Color Bar/Black
Screen/Freezing Frame
CBR/ABR/VBR
Broadcast
Frame/Field/PAFF
No Video PID
CBR
Broadcast
Frame
av
Structure
Level 4.0.0.08.30/4.2.0.08.30/4.0.2.08.60 4.2.0.08.30
Adaptive B
On/Off Off
Frames
On/Off On/Off On
Statistic
On/Off Off
Multiplex
Aspect Ratio 1:1/4:3/16:9 1:1
um
Bitrate(bps) 100000~60000000 3000000

Max B Frames 0~7 2
Scene Change
On/Off On
Detection
Frame Rate(fps) 25 25
H.264 DeInterlace
Video On/Off On
Proccess
Auto/ 720x576/480 / 704x576/480 /
Output
S
544x576/480 / 528x576/480 / 480x576/480 Auto

Resolution
/ 352x576/480
No Video PID/Color Bar/Black
OP Video Loss No Video PID
Rate Control CBR/ABR/VBR CBR
Profile Auto/High/Main/Baseline Baseline
Picture
Frame/MBAFF Frame
Structure
Level 3.0/3.1/3.2/4.0/4.2 3.0
164 /503
Adaptive B
On/Off Off
Frames
On/Off On/Off On
Mode Mono/L-R Mode/Stereo L-R Mode
MPEG-1
LayerII Volume(dB) -20~20 0
Audio 32/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
Bitrate 192kbps
160/192/224/256/320/384kbps
Delay(ms) -500~1000 0
On/Off On/Off On
n
DRA Audio Volume(dB) -20~20 0
32/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
Bitrate 192kbps
160/192/224/256/320/384kbps
io
Delay(ms) -500~1000 0
Service
0~31 characters Slot releted
Provider
TS
PMT PID
Video PID
Audio PID
5.3.28 AVS+ Multi ENC Card

is 32~8190
32~8190
32~8190
Slot releted
Slot releted
Slot releted
av
5.3.28.1 interface
AVS+ Multi ENC Card provides 2 SDI 75ΩBNC ports for digital video and audio input. AVS
ENC TRC Card also provides an GbE interface for upgrading and the other interfaces are
reserved. AVS+ Multi ENC Card is shown in Fig. 5-138 AVS+ Multi ENC Card:
um
Fig. 5-138 AVS+ Multi ENC Card
5.3.28.2 Function
AVS+ Multi ENC Card may code 2-channel digital signals. It’s used for encoding the
S
input digital video and audio to the corresponding coding standard TS. The MPEG2, AVS,
AVS+ and H.264 coding standards are supported. The transcoded program may be made
complex for the output card in “Multiplexing” page of WEB network management. For the
management may set the transcoding parameter of AVS+ Multi ENC Card, as shown in
the figure below:
165 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-139 AVS+ Multi ENC Card Program Configuration
av
program.
um
S
Fig. 5-140 AVS+ Multi ENC Card Program Monitor
166 /503
5.3.28.3 Parameter
Table 5-49 AVS+ Multi ENC Card Parameter

On/Off On/Off On
Statistic Multiplex On/Off Off
Aspect Ratio 1:1/4:3/16:9 1:1
GOP Size 0~255 25
n
Bitrate(bps) 100000~60000000 3000000
Video Bitrate Type ES Bitrate/TS Bitrate ES Bitrate
Max B Frames 0~7 2
io
Scene Change
On/Off On
Detection
AVS+ Frame Rate(fps) 25 25
Video DeInterlace
On/Off On
Proccess
Auto/ 720x576/480 / 704x576/480 /
Output Resolution
OP Video Loss
Rate Control
Profile
is 544x576/480 / 528x576/480 /
480x576/480 / 352x576/480
CBR/ABR/VBR
Broadcast
Auto
No Video PID
CBR
Broadcast
av
Picture Structure Frame/Field/PAFF Frame
Level 4.0.0.08.30/4.2.0.08.30/4.0.2.08.60 4.2.0.08.30
Adaptive B Frames On/Off Off
On/Off On/Off On
Statistic Multiplex On/Off Off
Aspect Ratio 1:1/4:3/16:9 1:1
um
GOP Size 0~255 25

Bitrate(bps) 100000~60000000 3000000
Video Bitrate Type ES Bitrate/TS Bitrate ES Bitrate
Max B Frames 0~7 2
Scene Change
On/Off On
Detection
H.264
Video Frame Rate(fps) 25 25
DeInterlace
On/Off On
Proccess
S
Auto/ 720x576/480 / 704x576/480 /

Output Resolution 544x576/480 / 528x576/480 / Auto
480x576/480 / 352x576/480
OP Video Loss No Video PID
Rate Control CBR/ABR/VBR CBR
Profile Auto/High/Main/Baseline Baseline
Picture Structure Frame/MBAFF Frame
Level 3.0/3.1/3.2/4.0/4.2 3.0
167 /503
Adaptive B Frames On/Off Off

On/Off On/Off On
MPEG1 LayerⅡ/MPEG1 LayerⅢ MPEG1 Layer
Encoding Format
Audio /DRA/AAC/AC3/EAC3 Ⅱ
Volume(dB) -20~20 0
32/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
Bitrate 192kbps
160/192/224/256/320/384kbps
Delay(ms) -500~1000 0
n
io
TS PCR PID 32~8190 Slot releted
5.3.29 SD-ADEC Card
5.3.29.1 Interface
is
SD-ADEC Card provides the video output interface of 75ΩBNC, and provides audio
av
output interface as the phoenix printed circuit board terminals of MINI COMBICON (MC)
socket and plug, plug direction parallel with conductors axial. SD-ADEC Card is shown in
Fig. 5-141 SD-ADEC Card:
um
Fig. 5-141 SD-ADEC Card
5.3.29.2 Function
The SD-ADEC Card can be used for decoding the SD program, support the output of
two video routes and two audio routes and decoding and outputting the TS stream to the
television set or monitor. The decoded program can be selected via multiplex. For the
S
management may check the status information of SD-ADEC Card and set the card
parameter.
168 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-142 SD-ADEC Card Parameter
av
The board card “License” setting and the current “License Status” display can be
realized on SD-ADEC Card setting interface. In addition, such interface can be used for
upgrading the DSP drive and displaying the current status. The DSP drive upgrading
method is as shown in DSP drive upgrading method for SD-ADEC Card.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
um
The audio decoding type supported by the SD-ADEC Card requires

corresponding authorization support. It can be realized by purchasing the
authorization.
The authorization status is divided into “EAC3, HEAAC”, “HEAAC” or “AC3”,
which support “All Audio Types”, “AAC Audio” or “Dolby Audio”, respectively.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
When the SD-ADEC Card is used for decoding, it shall multiplex the program to be
S
decoded in the multiplex interface to the output port of the SD-ADEC Card at first. For the
program multiplex method, refer to section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting. The introduction to
board card parameter setting is as below:
169 /503
n
4
io
5
is 6
Fig. 5-143 SD-ADEC Card Port Parameter Config

av
Step 1: click the “port n” in the “SD-ADEC Card” of WEB network management to log
in the port setting page;
Step 2: click the “Config” on the page to log in the port setting page;
Step 3: click the “Decode” switch on the page to be “On” and select the “Error
Handle” and the “Sync Mode”;
um
Step 4: set the “Service” and choose corresponding program or “Custom”. When the
“Custom” decoding is selected, it needs to set corresponding “PCR PID”, “Video PID”,
“Audio PID” and “Teletext PID” to realize the user-defined decoding;
Step 5: set “Video Decoding”, “Audio Decoding” and “VBI” parameter according to the
demand of real application.
S
The “Monitoring” page can display relevant information of currently-decoded

program.
170 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-144 SD-ADEC Card Port Monitor
av
5.3.29.3 Parameter
Table 5-50 SD-ADEC Card Parameter

Decode On/Off On
General Error Handle Freeze/Black/Colorbar/No Output Black
um
PCR Master/Video Master/Audio

Sync Mode PCR Master
Master
Service Custom/Set Program Set Program
PCR PID 0~8191 8191
Service
Decoding Video PID 0~8191 8191
Audio PID 0~8191 8191
Teletext PID 0~8191 8191
Video Pattern Auto/PAL/NTSC/SECAM/PAL-N/PAL-M Auto
Video
Decoding Aspect Ratio LetterBox/FullPage/centerCut LetterBox
S
Image Scaling Auto/4:3/16:9 Auto

Output Mute Normal/Mute Normal
Audio Vol
0~30 0
Decoding Attenuation(dB)
Audio Mode Stereo/Left Channel/Right Channel Stereo
CC Off/On Off
VBI
CC Delay(frame) 1~25 1
171 /503
5.3.30 ANA DEC TRC Card
5.3.30.1 Interface
ANA DEC TRC Card provides the video output interface of 75ΩBNC, and provides
audio output interface as the phoenix printed circuit board terminals of MINI COMBICON
(MC) socket and plug, plug direction parallel with conductors axial. ANA DEC TRC Card is
shown in Fig. 5-145 ANA DEC TRC Card:
n
io
Fig. 5-145 ANA DEC TRC Card
5.3.30.2 Function
The ANA DEC TRC Card can be used for decoding the SD/HD program, support the
is
output of two programs decoding and SD signal outputting the TS stream to the television
set or monitor. The decoded program can be selected via multiplex. For the program
may check the status information of ANA DEC TRC Card and set the card parameter.
av
um
S
Fig. 5-146 ANA DEC TRC Card Parameter
172 /503
realized on ANA DEC TRC Card setting interface. In addition, such interface can be used
for upgrading the Channel Firmware.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The transcoding and advanced audio decoding type supported by the ANA DEC
TRC Card requires corresponding authorization support. It can be realized by
purchasing the authorization.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
n
When the ANA DEC TRC Card is used for decoding, it shall multiplex the program to
be decoded in the multiplex interface to the output port of the ANA DEC TRC Card at first.
io
For the program multiplex method, refer to section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting. The
introduction to board card parameter setting is as below:
1
is 3
av
4
5
um
Fig. 5-147 ANA DEC TRC Card Channel Decode Parameter configuration
Step 1: click the “Channel n” in the “ANA DEC TRC Card” of WEB network
S
management to log in the Channel setting page;
Step 2: click the “Decode” on the page to log in the Decoding parameters setting
page;
Step 3: select the “Sync Mode” according to the demand of actual application. There
are “Async”, “Audio-based Sync” and “PCR-based Sync” to choose from;
173 /503
“Audio PID” and “TT PID” to realize the user-defined decoding;
Step 5: click the “Decode” switch on the page to be “On”. Set “Video Decoding” and
“Audio Decoding” parameter according to the demand of real application.
n
The function of “Show PID List” can display the PID information of the current input
stream.
io
is
av
um
Fig. 5-148 ANA DEC TRC Card Show PID List

S
174 /503
1 3
n
io
is 4
Fig. 5-149 ANA DEC TRC Card Channel Display Parameter configuration
av
Step 1: click the “Channel n” in the “ANA DEC TRC Card” of WEB network
Step 2: click the “Display” on the page to log in the display parameters setting page;
Step 3: select the “Resolution” and the “Scale Method”;
um
The “Monitor” interface can display relevant information of currently-decoded

program.
S
175 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-150 ANA DEC TRC Card Channel Monitor
av
5.3.30.3 Parameter
Table 5-51 ANA DEC TRC Card Parameter

License 32 bits hexadecimal number（A~F） ********************************
License Status HD，SD，TRC，AC3/AAC/DRA SD
um
OK/Decode Ok, Transcode Err/

Chan1 Working
Decode Err, Transcode Ok/ OK
Status
Decode Err, Transcode Err/Updating
Chan2 Working
Status
Firmware Update Cancel/Channel 1/Channel 2 Cancel
CH1 Update PID 32-8190 7000
CH2 Update PID 32-8190 7000
Alarm Off/On On
S
Table 5-52 ANA DEC TRC Card Channel General Parameter

Alarm Off/On On
176 /503
Table 5-53 ANA DEC TRC Card Channel Decode Parameter

Sync Mode Async/Audio-based Sync/PCR-based Sync PCR-based Sync
None
Name of first program
Name of second program
Service None
┇
Name of nth program
Custom
n
Audio PID 32~8191 8191
PCR PID 32~8191 8191
TT PID 32~8191 8191
Video PID 32~8191 8191
io
Video Decode Off/On On
SD Aspect Ratio 4:3/16:9 4:3
Audio Decode Off/On On
Stereo/Left Channel/Right Channel/
Channel Mode Stereo
Exchanged Output/Right Only/Left Only/Mute
Volume(dB) (-70~20) Unit：dB 0
Resample
Parameter
Delay
is
32KHZ/44.1KHZ/48KHZ
Table 5-54 ANA DEC TRC Card Channel Display Parameter

Range
Off/On
48KHZ
Default
Off
av
Brightness 0~100 50
Delay Value (ms) 0~700 0
Contrast 0~100 50
Resolution Auto/PAL/NTSC/SECAM/PAL-N/PAL-M Auto
Saturation 0~100 50
Hue 0~100 50
Delay Off/On Off
um
5.3.31 Digital DEC TRC Card
5.3.31.1 Interface
Digital DEC TRC Card provides 2 SDI output interfaces and 2 HD output interfaces
for 2 programs decoding. Each program uses 1 SDI output interface and 1 HD output
interface to output. Digital DEC TRC Card also provides an Ethernet interface for
S
upgrading. Digital DEC TRC Card is shown in Fig. 5-151 Digital DEC TRC Card:
Fig. 5-151 Digital DEC TRC Card
177 /503
5.3.31.2 Function
The Digital DEC TRC Card can be used for decoding the SD/HD program, support
the output of two programs decoding and outputting the TS stream to the television set or
monitor. The decoded program can be selected via multiplex. For the program multiplex
method, refer to section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting. WEB network management may check
the status information of Digital DEC TRC Card and set the card parameter.
n
io
is
av
um
Fig. 5-152 Digital DEC TRC Card Parameter
realized on Digital DEC TRC Card setting interface. In addition, such interface can be
used for upgrading the Channel Firmware.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The HD video decoding, transcoding and advanced audio decoding type
supported by the Digital DEC TRC Card requires corresponding authorization
S
support. It can be realized by purchasing the authorization.

＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
When the Digital DEC TRC Card is used for decoding, it shall multiplex the program
to be decoded in the multiplex interface to the output port of the Digital DEC TRC Card at
first. For the program multiplex method, refer to section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting. The
introduction to board card parameter setting is as below:
178 /503
1 3
n
4
io
5
is 6
Fig. 5-153 Digital DEC TRC Card Channel Decode Parameter configuration
av
Step 1: click the “Channel n” in the “Digital DEC TRC Card” of WEB network
page;
Step 3: select the “Error Handle” and the “Sync Mode”;

um
Step 5: click the “Decode” switch on the page to be “On”. Set “Video Decoding”,
“Audio Decoding” and “VBI” parameter according to the demand of real application.
S
stream.
179 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-154 Digital DEC TRC Card Show PID List
av
2
1
um
3
S
Fig. 5-155 Digital DEC TRC Card Channel Display Parameter configuration
Step 1: click the “Channel n” in the “Digital DEC TRC Card” of WEB network
180 /503
Step 3: select the “Output Delay” and the “Dolby Pass-through” and fill the
parameters, such as “Output Delay Value”, etc;
n
program.
io
is
av
um
Fig. 5-156 Digital DEC TRC Card Channel Monitor
5.3.31.3 Parameter
Table 5-55 Digital DEC TRC Card Channel General Parameter

S
Alarm Off/On On
181 /503
Table 5-56 Digital DEC TRC Card Parameter

License 32 bits hexadecimal number（A~F） ********************************
License Status HD，SD，TRC，AC3/AAC/DRA SD
Chan1 Working
Status
Chan2 Working
n
Status
Firmware
Cancel/Channel 1/Channel 2 Cancel
Update
Alarm Off/On On
io
Net Select Channel 1/Channel 2 Channel 1
Table 5-57 Digital DEC TRC Card Channel Decode Parameter

Sync Mode Async/Audio-based Sync/PCR-based Sync PCR-based Sync
Error Handle
Service
is
Freeze/Black/Colorbar/No Output
None
Name of second program
┇
Name of nth program
Black
None
av
Custom
Audio PID 32~8191 8191
PCR PID 32~8191 8191
TT PID 32~8191 8191
Video PID 32~8191 8191
AFD Off/On Off
HD Aspect
um
4:3/16:9 16:9
Ratio
Video Test
Off/Custom Off
Output
SD Aspect
4:3/16:9 4:3
Ratio
Audio Decode Off/On On
Channel Mode Exchanged Output/Right Only/Left Only/ Stereo
Mute
Volume(dB) (-70~20) Unit：dB 0
S
Resample 32KHZ/44.1KHZ/48KHZ 48KHZ

VBI Off/On Off
Subtitle List Character string subtitle
VBI Mode S334/Line21 Line21
182 /503
Table 5-58 Digital DEC TRC Card Channel Display Parameter

Delay Off/On Off
Brightness 0~100 50
Contrast 0~100 50
1920×1080/60i/1920×1080/50i/
Resolution 1280×720/60p/1280×720/50p/ Auto
720×576/50i/720×480/60i/Auto
n
Saturation 0~100 50
FullScreen/LetterBox/
Scale Method LetterBox
CenterCut/Mixed
Hue 0~100 50
Delay Off/On Off
io
Output Delay Off/On Off
Output Delay Value (ms) 0~700 0
Audio 1 Dolby
32~8191 0x100
Pass-through
Audio 2 Dolby
Pass-through
Audio 3 Dolby
Pass-through
Audio 4 Dolby
Pass-through
Audio 5 Dolby
is 32~8191
32~8191
32~8191
0x101
0x102
0x103
av
32~8191 0x104
Pass-through
Audio 6 Dolby
32~8191 0x105
Pass-through
Audio 7 Dolby
32~8191 0x106
Pass-through
Audio 8 Dolby
32~8191 0x107
Pass-through
Off/Audio Decode/
um
Dolby Pass-through 1/
EMB1,2 Audio Source Dolby Pass-through 2/
EMB3,4 Audio Source Dolby Pass-through 3/
EMB5,6Audio Source Dolby Pass-through 4/
Audio Decode
EMB15,16Audio Source Test Audio 48KHz/
Test Audio 44.1KHz/
Test Audio 32KHz
S
183 /503
5.3.32 4K DEC Card
5.3.32.1 Interface
4K DEC Card provides one HD output interface and four 3G-SDI output interfaces
on the top for 4K video and audio decoding, and one 3G-SDI output interface below that
can only be used for non-4K video and audio decoding output. The 12G-SDI output
interface and 2 SFP interfaces are reserved. 4K DEC Card is shown in Fig. 5-157 4K DEC
n
Card:
io
5.3.32.2 Function is
Fig. 5-157 4K DEC Card
The 4K DEC Card can be used for decoding the SD, HD and 4K program, support the
av
output of one program decoding and outputting the decoded TS stream to the television
set or monitor. The decoded program can be selected via multiplex. For the program
may check the status information of 4K DEC Card and set the card parameter.
um
S
184 /503
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-158 4K DEC Card Parameter
realized on 4K DEC Card setting interface. In addition, such interface can be used for
upgrading the Firmware and setting the audio decode mode and alarm switch.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
um
The advanced audio decoding type supported by the 4K DEC Card requires
corresponding authorization support. It can be realized by purchasing the
authorization.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
When the 4K DEC Card is used for decoding, it shall multiplex the program to be
decoded in the multiplex interface to the output port of the 4K DEC Card at first. For the
program multiplex method, refer to section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting. The introduction to
S
board card parameter setting is as below:
185 /503
1
3
n
4
io
5
is 7
6
av
Fig. 5-159 4K DEC Card Display Parameter configuration
Step 1: click the “Decode” in the “4K DEC Card” of WEB network management to log
in the decoding setting page;
um
Step 3: select the “Error Handle”;
Step 4: set “Video” decoding parameter according to the demand of real application.
Video decoding output supports SD, HD and 4K resolution and different frame rates. 4K
Mode can select "2SI " or " SQD " mode as needed;
Step 5: set “Audio” decoding parameter according to the demand of real application.
Audio decoding supports multiple channel modes such as “stereo”, “5.1 channel” and “7.1
channel”, and can select the audio source of each embedded audio as needed;
S
Step 6: set “VBI” and “HDR” parameters according to the demand of real application.
186 /503
n
4
io
5
is 6
av
Fig. 5-160 4K DEC Card Decode Parameter configuration
Step 1: click the “Decode” in the “4K DEC Card” of WEB network management to log
in the decoding setting page;
page;
um
Step 3: select the “Sync Mode”;
Step 5: click the “Decode” switch on the page to be “On”. When the “Dolby Metadata
Display” function is turned on, the “Monitor” page will display its related information;
S
stream.
187 /503
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-161 4K DEC Card Show PID List

program.
um
S
188 /503
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-162 4K DEC Card Monitor
5.3.32.3 Parameter
Table 5-59 4K DEC Card Parameter

um
License Character string 0

License Status Decoding/Advanced Audio Decoding
Working Well/Decode ERR/
Working Status OK
Updating,Please don't power off
Update PID 32~8190 7000
Audio Decode Single Mode/Multi Mode Single Mode
Alarm Off/On On
Firmware
Cancel/Update Cancel
Update
S
189 /503
Table 5-60 4K DEC Card Display Parameter

Black
General Error Handle Freeze/Black/Colorbar
4K Mode 2SI/SQD 2SI
Delay Off/On Off
Delay frame 2~5 2
3840×2160/50p/3840×2160/60p/
3840×2160/25p/3840×2160/30p/
n
1920×1080/60p/1920×1080/50p/
Video Resolution 1920×1080/50i
1920×1080/60i/1920×1080/50i/
1280×720/60p/1280×720/50p/
720×576/50i/720×480/60i
io
Video Test Off/On Off
Audio1 Delay Off/On Off
Audio1 Delay
0~700 0
Time (ms)
Audio1
Channel
Mode
Audio1
Volume(dB)
is
Exchanged Output/Right Only/
Left Only/Mute/5.1 channel/
7.1 channel
-24~12
Stereo
0
av
Audio Dolby
Pass-through Off/On Off
Delay
Dolby
Pass-through 0~1000 150
Delay(ms)
EMB1~8 Off/Audio1/Dolby Pass-through1/
Audio1
Source Dolby Pass-through2/Test Audio
um
Audio1
32kHz/44.1kHz/48kHz 48kHz
Resample
CEA608Mode Line21/S334(RAW) Line21
CC Switch Off/On Off
VBI CC Delay
1~25 1
Out(Frame)
Row Setting 4~22 9
HDR Mode SDR/HDR-PQ/HDR-HLG SDR
S
190 /503
Table 5-61 4K DEC Card Decode Parameter

Async/Audio-based Sync/ PCR-based
General Sync Mode
PCR-based Sync Sync
None
Name of second program None
Service
┇
Name of nth program
n
Custom
Service Audio1 PID 32~8191 8191
Selecting PCR PID 32~8191 8191
TT PID 32~8191 8191
io
Video PID 32~8191 8191
Dolby
32~8191 8191
Pass-through 1
Dolby
32~8191 8191
Pass-through 2
Audio 1
Dolby Metedata
5.3.33 Descramble Card

Display
Decode
is Off/On
Off/On
Off
On
av
5.3.33.1 Interface
The Descramble Card can provide two CAM card slots for de-scrambling the back
board programs, as shown in Fig. 5-163 Descramble Card:
um
Fig. 5-163 Descramble Card
5.3.33.2 Function
The Descramble Card is used for de-scrambling the scrambled program received by
the back board. The received de-scrambling program can be multiplexed to the
S
Descramble Card via the multiplex interface. The clear stream is refreshed to other output
ports of the backboard by its input port after being de-scrambled by the Descramble Card
to realize the de-scrambling function. For the program multiplex method, refer to section
It can set the CAM de-scrambling parameter and the BISS de-scrambling parameter
of the Descramble Card by the WEB network management.
191 /503
5.3.33.2.1 CAM descrambling setting

When the CA scrambling program is found in the received program, it can set the
descrambling information in the “CAM Setting” page. After the de-scrambling, the
clear-stream program is the multiplex output. For the program multiplex method, refer to
n
4
io
2
3
is
av
Fig. 5-164 Descramble Card CAM Config

um
Step 1: click WEB network management “Descramble Card” to log in the board card
setting page;
Step 2: click the “CAM Config” on the page to log in the CAM setting page;
Step 3: choose “On” in the “CAM Descramble Switch; choose the “CAM CLK”
according to the demand. Choose “On” via the Alarm switch of CAM card and set the
CAPMT interval of CAM card.
S
When the CAM card is inserted on the board card, the CAM information page will
show the CAS_ID of corresponding card.
192 /503
n
6
io
is
Fig. 5-165 Descramble Card CAM Descrambling
av
Step 5: click the “CAM Descramble” on the “Descramble Card” of WEB network
management;
Step 6: choose the de-scrambling CAM card for each program;
parameter into effect. In this moment, the current de-scrambling status of program can be
um
displayed on the de-scrambling location on the page.
5.3.33.2.2 BISS descrambling setting

When the BISS scrambling program is found in the received program, it can set the
descrambling information in BISS. After the de-scrambling, the clear-stream program is
the multiplex output. For the program multiplex method, refer to section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing
Setting.
S
193 /503
n
4
io
5
is 6
Fig. 5-166 Descramble Card BISS Setting

av
Step 1: click WEB network management “Descramble Card” to log in the board card
setting page;
Step 2: click the “BISS” on the page to log in the BISS de-scrambling setting page;
Step 3: choose “On” on the “BISS Descramble” Switch;

um
Step 4: set the de-scrambling secrete key information, choose “Biss mode”, set the
secrete “Key”, choose and set the “ID”;
Step 5: set the BISS program de-scrambling, fill the “Service ID” to be de-scrambled
and choose corresponding secrete key;
Step 6: click the “Apply” on the page to put the setting parameter into effect.
S
194 /503
5.3.33.3 Parameter
Table 5-62 Descramble Card CAM Descrambling Parameter

CAM Descramble Switch On/Off Off
CAM CLK 7M/9M/12M/15M 7M
CAM A Alarm On/Off Off
CAM B Alarm On/Off Off
n
CAM A CAPMT Interval(ms) 0~255 100
CAM B CAPMT Interval(ms) 0~255 100
No Descramble/CAM
CAM No Descramble
A/CAM B
io
Table 5-63 Descramble Card BISS Descrambling Parameter

Biss Descramble On/Off Off
Biss Mode Biss Mode 1/Biss Mode E Biss Mode 1
Key
ID Mode
ID
is
(Length of Key should be
between 12 and 16)
Injected ID/Buried ID
(Length of ID should be
between 12 and 16)
none
Injected ID
none
av
Service ID 0~65535 0
Key Select Key1~Key8 Key1~Key8
Select Key 1 For
On/Off Off
All The Programs
5.3.34 DVB-S2 Desc Card

um
5.3.34.1 Interface
DVB-S2 Desc Card provides 1 RF input port, 1 RF looping output port and 2 CAM
card slots for the reception and descrambling of RF signal of DVB-S/DVB-S2 standard, as
shown in Fig. 5-167 DVB-S2 Desc Card:
Fig. 5-167 DVB-S2 Desc Card

S
5.3.34.2 Function
DVB-S2 Desc Card provides 1 RF input port and 1 RF looping output port for the
reception and descrambling of DVB-S/DVB-S2 standard of RF signal.
WEB network management may set the receiving information, CAM descrambling
parameter and BISS descrambling parameter of DVB-S2 Desc Card.
195 /503
5.3.34.2.1 Receiving Parameter
n
1
3
io
is
av
Fig. 5-168 DVB-S2 Desc Card Receiving Parameter Config
Step 1: Click “Port 1” of “DVB-S2 Desc Card” of WEB network management to
navigate to port page;
Step 3:Set the “Tuner” as “On” and choose the “Standard”, “Polarize” and “22Khz”
according to the satellite programme to be received, and fill in the “Down Frequency”,
um
“Local Frequency” and “Symbol Rate”;

If the parameter modification cause that the satellite signal cannot be locked, it can
use the “Search” function to search the locking signal.
The monitoring interface shall display the code rate information which is currently
received.
S
196 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-169 DVB-S2 Desc Card Receiving Parameter Monitor
av
5.3.34.2.2 CAM Descrambling Settings
descrambling information in the “CAM Config” page. After the de-scrambling, the
unscrambling stream programme will output in the output port. For the program multiplex
method, refer to section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting.
um
S
197 /503
4
3
1
n
io
is
Fig. 5-170 DVB-S2 Desc Card CAM Descrambling Settings
av
Step 1: Click “DVB-S2 Desc Card” of WEB network management to navigate to the
board card page;
Step 2: Click “CAM Config” to navigate to CAM setting page;
Step 3: Choose “On” in “CAM Descramble Switch”, choose “CAM CLK” according to
the need and choose “On” of the alarm switch of the CAM card, then set other parameter
of the port;
um
S
198 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-171 DVB-S2 Desc Card CAM Information
av
5
7
um
6
S
Fig. 5-172 DVB-S2 Desc Card CAM Descramble

Step 5: Click “CAM Descramble” in the “DVB-S2 Desc Card” of WEB network
199 /503
management;
Step 6: Choose the CAM card for the descrambling of each programme;
Step 7: After setting the parameter, click “Apply” in the page to validate the parameter.
The page will display the descrambling status of the programme.
5.3.34.2.3 BISS Descrambling Settings

descrambling information in the “BISS” page. After the de-scrambling, the unscrambling
n
stream programme will output in the output port. For the program multiplex method, refer
to section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting.
io
2
3
1
is 4
av
5
um
Fig. 5-173 DVB-S2 Desc Card BISS Descrambling Settings

Step 1: Click “DVB-S2 Desc Card” of WEB network management to navigate to the
board card page;
Step 2: Click “BISS” to navigate to BISS setting page;
Step 3: Choose “On” of the “BISS Descramble” switch
S
Step 4: Set the descrambling key information, choose the “BISS Mode”, set the “Key”,
and choose and set the “ID”;
Step 5: Set the BISS programme descrambling, fill in the “Service ID” of the BISS
programme to be descrambled and choose the corresponding key;
200 /503
5.3.34.3 Parameter
Table 5-64 DVB-S2 Desc Card Receiving Parameter

Tuner On/Off Off
Standard DVB-S/DVB-S2 DVB-S
Search Stop/Start Stop
Polarize Right/Left/Off Off
n
22KHz On/Off Off
1~99999
Downlink （the difference of downlink Freq and Local 4080
Frequency(MHz)
io
Freq must be between 950~2150）
1~99999
Local （the difference of downlink Freq and Local 5150
Frequency(MHz)
Symbol
1000~45000 27500
Rate(Ksps)
Parameter
CAM Descramble Switch
is
Table 5-65 DVB-S2 Desc Card CAM Descrambling Parameter
Range
On/Off
Default
Off
av
um
Table 5-66 DVB-S2 Desc Card BISS Descrambling Parameter

Biss Descramble On/Off Off
Biss Mode Biss Mode 1/Biss Mode E Biss Mode 1
Key none
between 12 and 16)
ID Mode Injected ID/Buried ID Injected ID
ID none
between 12 and 16)
S
Select Key 1 For
On/Off Off
All The Programs
201 /503
5.3.35 ABS-S Demod Card
5.3.35.1 Interface
The ABS-S Demod Card is based on the EMR3.0 platform to provide two CAM card
slots to the single route RF input for receiving and de-scrambling RF signal of direct
broadcast satellite, as shown in Fig. 5-174 ABS-S Demod Card.
n
io
Fig. 5-174 ABS-S Demod Card
5.3.35.2 Function
ABS-S Demod Card provides 1 RF input port for the reception and descrambling of
the RF signal of ABS-S standard.
is
WEB network management may set the demodulating information of ABS-S Demod
Card and the descrambling parameter of CAM.

av
2
4
3
um
1
S
Fig. 5-175 ABS-S Demod Card Receiving Parameter

Step 1: Click “Port 1” of “ABS-S Demod Card” of WEB network management to
202 /503

Step 3: Set the “Tuner” as “On” and choose the “Standard”, “Polarize” and “22Khz”
according to the satellite programme to be received, and fill in the “Down Frequency”,
“Local Frequency” and “Symbol Rate”;
received.
n
descrambling information in the “CAM Config” page. After the de-scrambling, the
io
unscrambling stream programme will output in the output port. For the program multiplex
method, refer to section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting.
is 2
4
3
av
1
um
Fig. 5-176 ABS-S Demod Card CAM Descrambling Setting

Step 1: Click “ABS-S Demod Card” of WEB network management to navigate to the
S
board card page;

Step 2: Click “CAM Config” to navigate to CAM setting page;
Step 3: Choose “On” in “CAM Descramble Switch”, choose “CAM CLK” according to
the need and choose “On” of the alarm switch of the CAM card, then set other parameter
of the port;
203 /503
n
7
io
is
av
Fig. 5-177 ABS-S Demod Card CAM Descramble
Step 5: Click “CAM Descramble” in the “ABS-S Demod Card” of WEB network
management;
Step 6: Choose the CAM card for the descrambling of each programme;
Step 7: After setting the parameter, click “Apply” in the page to validate the parameter.
um
The page will display the descrambling status of the programme.
5.3.35.3 Parameter
Table 5-67 ABS-S Demod Card Receiving Parameter

Tuner On/Off Off
S
Polarize Right/Left Right

22KHz On/Off Off
Bypass Mode Demod/Descramble Demod
Downlink
1~65535 12020
Frequency(MHz)
Local
1~65535 10750
Frequency(MHz)
Symbol
1000~60000 28800
Rate(Ksps)
204 /503
Table 5-68 ABS-S Demod Card CAM Descrambling Parameter

n
No Descramble/CAM
CAM No Descramble
A/CAM B
5.3.36 DVB-C Demod Desc Card
io
5.3.36.1 Interface
DVB-C Demod Desc Card provides 1 RF input port, 1 RF looping output port and 2
CAM card slots for the reception and descrambling of RF signal of DVB-C standard, as
is
shown in Fig. 5-178 DVB-C Demod Desc Card:
av
Fig. 5-178 DVB-C Demod Desc Card
um
S
205 /503
5.3.36.2 Function
n
4
3
io
1
is
av
Fig. 5-179 DVB-C Demod Desc Card Receiving Parameter Config
Step 1: Click “RF” of “DVB-C Demod Desc Card” of WEB network management to
Step 3:Set the “Tuner” as “On” and choose the “Standard” , “TS Change” according to
um
the RF signal to be received, and fill in the “Center Frequency”, “Symbol Rate” and
“Appointed PID”;
If the parameter modification cause that the RF signal cannot be locked, it can use
the “Search” function to search the locking signal.
S
received.
206 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-180 DVB-C Demod Desc Card Receiving Parameter Monitor
av
5.3.36.2.2 Selection of input source
The input of this card and the multiplexing input are both the options for the input
source of DVB-C Demod Desc Card. When the option of input from this card is selected,
the input ports CAM-A, CAM-B and BISS of the multiplexing interface shall display the
program list inputted from this card according to the selection of the input source. The
de-scrambling is realized by corresponding de-scrambling setting (the details are as
um
shown in 5.3.36.2.3CAM Descrambling Settings and 5.3.36.2.4BISS Descrambling Settings).

The required program can be multiplexed from the input ports CAM-A, CAM-B and BISS
to the output port and outputted then. When selecting the multiplex input, it shall multiplex
the input program to the output ports CAM-A, CAM-B and BISS from the multiplexing
interface. By doing so, the multiplexed program list can be displayed on the input ports
CAM-A, CAM-B and BISS. The de-scrambling can be realized by corresponding
de-scrambling setting (the details are as shown in 5.3.36.2.3CAM Descrambling Settings
S
and 5.3.36.2.4BISS Descrambling Settings). Finally, the required program is multiplexed to

the output port via the input ports CAM-A, CAM-B and BISS and outputted from the output
port. CAM descrambling setting. For the program multiplex method, refer to section

207 /503
program descrambling information in the “CAM-A” and “CAM-B” page. After the
de-scrambling, the clear-stream program is the multiplex output. For the program
multiplex method, refer to section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting.
n
4
3
io
1
is
av
Fig. 5-181 DVB-C Demod Desc Card CAM Descrambling System Parameter Setting
Step 1: click “CAM-A” or “CAM-B” on the “DVB-C Demod Desc Card” of WEB
network management to log in the CAM setting page;
um
Step 2: click the “System” on the page to log in the CAM System setting page;
Step 3: select the input source of de-scrambled program, select the “CAM
Descramble” switch to be “On”, select the “Clock” according to the needs and set the
“CaPmt Interval” and other relevant parameters.
S
208 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-182 DVB-C Demod Desc Card CAM Descrambling Program Setting
av
Step 5: click the “Program” in the “DVB-C Demod Desc Card” CAM setting page of
the WEB network management to log in the program setting page;
Step 6: decide whether to adopt the de-scrambling action for each program;
parameter into effect. In this moment, the de-scrambling status of program can be
um
The monitoring interface can display the input/output system code rate of
descrambled program and the effective code rate information.
S
209 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-183 DVB-C Demod Desc Card CAM Descrambling Monitor
av
um
S
210 /503
6
3
4
n
5
io
1
is
Fig. 5-184 DVB-C Demod Desc Card BISS Descrambling System Parameter Setting
av
Step 1: click the “BISS” on the “DVB-C Demod Desc Card” page of WEB network
management to log in the BISS de-scrambling setting page;
Step 2: click the “System” on the page to log in the BISS descrambling system setting
page;
Step 3: choose the input “source” of the de-scrambling program and set the “BISS
um
Descramble” switch to be “On”.
Step 4: set the “Key Select Mode” to be “Global”, “Program” or “PID”;
“Global”: the same secrete key is used for de-scrambling all PIDs to be
de-scrambled.
“Program Level”: the same secrete key is used for de-scrambling all PIDs under
the same program;
S
“PID level”: one secrete key can be chosen to de-scramble each PID.
Step 5: set the “Appointed Input PID” and “Appointed Output PID” to monitor the code
rate.
211 /503
n
9
io
10
is
Fig. 5-185 DVB-C Demod Desc Card BISS Descrambling Key Setting
av
Step 7 click the “Key” in the “DVB-C Demod Desc Card” BISS descrambling setting
page of the WEB network management to log in the secrete key setting page;
Step 8: click the “Add” on the page to pop up the BISS secrete key adding and
modification page;
Step 9: fill in the “Name” and “Key” and choose the “BISS Mode” and “ID Mode”;
um
Step 10: click the “Apply” on the page to finish the addition of secrete key;
If is required to modify secrete key, click to log in the modification page. If the
deletion is required, click the “Delete” and the “Delete All” to realize the deletion operation.
S
212 /503
11
14 12
n
13
io
is
Fig. 5-186 DVB-C Demod Desc Card BISS Descrambling Program Setting
av
Step 11: click the “Program” in the “DVB-C Demod Desc Card” BISS de-scrambling
setting page of the WEB network management to log in the program setting page;
Step 12: click the “Show Detail” on the page to spread the program secrete key
selection page.
Step 13: set the BISS Descrambling “switch” of the descrambling program to be “On”
um
and select corresponding secrete key according to the “Key Select Mode” to make the
de-scrambling action.
S
213 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-187 DVB-C Demod Desc Card BISS Descrambling Monitor
av
5.3.36.3 Parameter
Table 5-69 DVB-C Demod Desc Card Receiving Parameter

Tuner Off/On Off
Standard DVB-C/QAM-B DVB-C
um
Center Frequency(KHz) 52000~858000 554000

Symbol Rat(Ksps) 3500~7000 6875
TS Change Off/On Off
Appointed PID 0~0x1FFF 0x1FFF
S
214 /503
Table 5-70 DVB-C Demod Desc Card CAM Descrambling Parameter

Source Local Input/Multiplexing Input Multiplexing Input
CAM Descramble Off/On Off
Clock (MHz) 6/7/9/12/15/17/20/25/27 7
CaPmt Interval (ms) 0~255 100
CAPMT Query Off/On Off
CAM Filter Off/On Off
n
Appointed Input PID 0~0x1FFF 0x1FFF
Appointed Output PID 0~0x1FFF 0x1FFF
Null Packet Filter Off/On Off
io
Table 5-71 DVB-C Demod Desc Card BISS Descrambling Parameter

BISS Descramble Off/On Off
Key Select Mode
Appointed Input PID
Appointed Output PID
Null Packet Filter
Name
is Global/Program/PID
0~0x1FFF
0~0x1FFF
Off/On
Program
0x1FFF
0x1FFF
Off
none
av
between 12 and 16)
BISS Mode Mode 1/Mode E Mode 1
Key none
between 12 and 16)
ID (Length of Key should be 14) none
5.3.37 DVB-S2 Demod Desc Card

um
5.3.37.1 Interface
DVB-S2 Demod Desc Card provides 1 RF input port, 1 RF looping output port and 2
CAM card slots for the reception and descrambling of RF signal of DVB-S/DVB-S2
standard, as shown in Fig. 5-188 DVB-S2 Demod Desc Card:
S
Fig. 5-188 DVB-S2 Demod Desc Card
215 /503
5.3.37.2 Function
n
4
3
1
io
is
av
Fig. 5-189 DVB-S2 Demod Desc Card Receiving Parameter Config
Step 1: Click “RF” of “DVB-S2 Demod Desc Card” of WEB network management to
um
Step 3:Set the “Tuner” as “On” and choose the “Standard” , “TS Change” , “22KHz” ,
“Polarize” and “DiSEqC” according to the satellite programme to be received, and fill in the
“Downlink Frequency”, “Local Frequency”, “Symbol Rate” and “Appointed PID”;
S
received.
216 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-190 DVB-S2 Demod Desc Card Receiving Parameter Monitor
av
source of DVB-S2 Demod Desc Card. When the option of input from this card is selected,
um

de-scrambling setting (the details are as shown in 5.3.37.2.3CAM Descrambling Settings and
S
5.3.37.2.4BISS Descrambling Settings). Finally, the required program is multiplexed to the

output port via the input ports CAM-A, CAM-B and BISS and outputted from the output

217 /503
n
4
3
io
1
is
av
Fig. 5-191 DVB-S2 Demod Desc Card CAM Descrambling System Parameter Setting
Step 1: click “CAM-A” or “CAM-B” on the “DVB-S2 Demod Desc Card” of WEB
network management to log in the CAM setting page;
um
“CaPmt Interval” and other relevant parameters.
S
218 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-192 DVB-S2 Demod Desc Card CAM Descrambling Program Setting
av
Step 5: click the “Program” in the “DVB-S2 Demod Desc Card” CAM setting page of
um
S
219 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-193 DVB-S2 Demod Desc Card CAM Descrambling Monitor
av
um
S
220 /503
6
3
4
n
1
5
io
is
Fig. 5-194 DVB-S2 Demod Desc Card BISS Descrambling System Parameter Setting
av
Step 1: click the “BISS” on the “DVB-S2 Demod Desc Card” page of WEB network
page;
um
de-scrambled.
the same program;
S
rate.
221 /503
n
9
io
10
is
Fig. 5-195 DVB-S2 Demod Desc Card BISS Descrambling Key Setting
av
Step 7 click the “Key” in the “DVB-S2 Demod Desc Card” BISS descrambling setting
modification page;
um
S
222 /503
11
14 12
n
13
io
is
Fig. 5-196 DVB-S2 Demod Desc Card BISS Descrambling Program Setting
av
Step 11: click the “Program” in the “DVB-S2 Demod Desc Card” BISS de-scrambling
selection page.
um
S
223 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-197 DVB-S2 Demod Desc Card BISS Descrambling Monitor
av
5.3.37.3 Parameter
Table 5-72 DVB-S2 Demod Desc Card Receiving Parameter

Tuner Off/On Off
um

22KHz Off/On Off
Polarize Vertical/Horizontal/Off Off
DiSEqC Satellite 1/…/ Satellite 16 Satellite 1
1~99999
Downlink （the difference of downlink Frequency and 4080
Frequency(MHz)
Local Frequency must be between 950~2150）
1~99999
S
Local （the difference of downlink Frequency and 5150

Frequency(MHz)
Local Frequency must be between 950~2150）
Symbol
1000~45000 27500
Rate(Ksps)
224 /503
Table 5-73 DVB-S2 Demod Desc Card CAM Descrambling Parameter

Clock (MHz) 6/7/9/12/15/17/20/25/27 7
Appointed Input PID 0~8191 8191
Appointed Output
0~8191 8191
n
PID
Table 5-74 DVB-S2 Demod Desc Card BISS Descrambling Parameter
io
Key Select Mode Global/Program/PID Program
Appointed Input PID 0~8191 8191
Appointed Output PID 0~8191 8191
Name
BISS Mode
Key
is(Length of Key should be
between 12 and 16)
Mode 1/Mode E
between 12 and 16)
none
Mode 1
none
av
5.3.38 ABS-S Demod Desc Card
5.3.38.1 Interface
um
The ABS-S Demod Desc Card is based on the EMR3.0 platform to provide two CAM
card slots to the single route RF input for receiving and de-scrambling RF signal of direct
broadcast satellite, as shown in Fig. 5-198 ABS-S Demod Desc Card.
Fig. 5-198 ABS-S Demod Desc Card

S
225 /503
5.3.38.2 Function
n
4
3
io
1
is
av
Fig. 5-199 ABS-S Demod Desc Card Receiving Parameter Config
Step 1: Click “RF” of “ABS-S Demod Desc Card” of WEB network management to
Step 3: Set the “Tuner” as “On” and choose the “TS Change” , “22KHz” , “Polarize”
um
and “DiSEqC” according to the satellite programme to be received, and fill in the
“Downlink Frequency”, “Local Frequency”, “Symbol Rate” and “Appointed PID”;
S
received.
226 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-200 ABS-S Demod Desc Card Receiving Parameter Monitor
av
source of ABS-S Demod Desc Card. When the option of input from this card is selected,
um

de-scrambling setting (the details are as shown in 5.3.38.2.3CAM Descrambling Settings
S
and 5.3.38.2.4BISS Descrambling Settings). Finally, the required program is multiplexed to

the output port via the input ports CAM-A, CAM-B and BISS and outputted from the output

227 /503
n
4
3
io
1
is
av
Fig. 5-201 ABS-S Demod Desc Card CAM Descrambling System Parameter Setting
Step 1: click “CAM-A” or “CAM-B” on the “ABS-S Demod Desc Card” of WEB network
management to log in the CAM setting page;
um
“CAPMT Interval” and other relevant parameters.
S
228 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-202 ABS-S Demod Desc Card CAM Descrambling Program Setting
av
Step 5: click the “Program” in the “ABS-S Demod Desc Card” CAM setting page of
um
S
229 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-203 ABS-S Demod Desc Card CAM Descrambling Monitor
av
um
S
230 /503
6
3
4
n
5
io
1
is
Fig. 5-204 ABS-S Demod Desc Card BISS Descrambling System Parameter Setting
av
Step 1: click the “BISS” on the “ABS-S Demod Desc Card” page of WEB network
page;
um
de-scrambled.
the same program;
S
rate.
231 /503
n
9
io
10
is
Fig. 5-205 ABS-S Demod Desc Card BISS Descrambling Key Setting
av
Step 7 click the “Key” in the “ABS-S Demod Desc Card” BISS descrambling setting
modification page;
um
S
232 /503
11
14 12
n
13
io
is
Fig. 5-206 ABS-S Demod Desc Card BISS Descrambling Program Setting
av
Step 11: click the “Program” in the “ABS-S Demod Desc Card” BISS de-scrambling
selection page.
um
S
233 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-207 ABS-S Demod Desc Card BISS Descrambling Monitor
av
5.3.38.3 Parameter
Table 5-75 ABS-S Demod Desc Card Receiving Parameter

Tuner Off/On Off
um
22KHz Off/On Off

Polarize Left/Right/Off Off
DiSEqC Satellite 1/…/ Satellite 16 Satellite 1
1~99999
Downlink （the difference of downlink Freq and Local 4080
Frequency(MHz)
1~99999
Local （the difference of downlink Freq and Local 5150
S
Frequency(MHz)
Symbol
1000~45000 27500
Rate(Ksps)
Appointed PID 0~0x1FFF 0x1FFF
234 /503
Table 5-76 ABS-S Demod Desc Card CAM Descrambling Parameter

Clock (MHz) 6/7/9/12/15/17/20/25/27 7
CAPMT Query Off/On Off
CAM Filter Off/On Off
n
Null Packet Filter Off/On Off
Table 5-77 ABS-S Demod Desc Card BISS Descrambling Parameter
io
Key Select Mode Global/Program/PID Program
Null Packet Filter
Name
BISS Mode
Key
is Off/On
between 12 and 16)
Mode 1/Mode E
between 12 and 16)
Off
none
Mode 1
none
av
5.3.39 4-Ch.DVB-T2 Demod Card
5.3.39.1 Interface
um
4-Ch.DVB-T2 Demod Card provides four RF input interfaces, for

DVB-C/DVB-T/DVB-T2 standard RF signal reception. 4-Ch.DVB-T2 Demod Card is
shown in Fig. 5-208 4-Ch.DVB-T2 Demod Card.
Fig. 5-208 4-Ch.DVB-T2 Demod Card

S
5.3.39.2 Function
4-Ch.DVB-T2 Demod Card provides 4 RF input ports to receive the RF signal of

DVB-C/DVB-T/DVB-T2 standard. WEB network management may check the current
status and set the receiving parameter of the 4-Ch.DVB-T2 Demod Card. The input
5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting and the output is multiplexed finally.
235 /503
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The receiving frequency point quantity of the 4-Ch.DVB-T2 Demod Card is
decided by the authorization obtained. The authorization for four frequency
points at most is supported.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-209 4-Ch.DVB-T2 Demod Card Parameter

Set the “Alarm” switch of the card to turn on or off the switch. After setting the
um
parameter, click “Apply” to validate the parameter;

S
236 /503
2
6
3
5
n
4
io
is
Fig. 5-210 4-Ch.DVB-T2 Demod Card Port Config
av
Step 1: Click “Port n” of “4-Ch.DVB-T2 Demod Card” of WEB network management
to navigate to port settings page;
Step 3: Open the “Demod” switch;
Step 4: Set the “Bandwidth”, “Standard” and “Profile”, and fill in the “PLP ID” and
“Center Frequency” according to the frequency point information of receiving program;
um
Step 5: Click the “TS change” on the page, it can choose the “type1”, “type2” or “off”;
received.
S
237 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-211 4-Ch.DVB-T2 Demod Card Port Monitor
av
5.3.39.3 Parameter
Table 5-78 4-Ch.DVB-T2 Demod Card Parameter

Alarm On/Off On
Demod On/Off Off
um
Ts change Off/Type1/Type2 Off

Bandwidth 8MHz/7MHz/6MHz/5MHz 8MHz
Standard DVB-C/DVB-T/DVB-T2 DVB-T2
Profile HP/LP HP
PLP ID 0~255 0
S
238 /503
5.3.40 4-Ch.DVB-S2 Demod card
5.3.40.1 Interface
4-Ch.DVB-S2 Demod card provides four RF input interfaces for DVB-S/S2 standard
RF signal reception, 4-Ch.DVB-S2 Demod card is shown in Fig. 5-212 4-Ch.DVB-S2 Demod
card:
n
Fig. 5-212 4-Ch.DVB-S2 Demod card
io
5.3.40.2 Function
4-Ch.DVB-S2 Demod card provides 4 RF input ports for the reception of the RF
signal of DVB-S/DVB-S2 standard. WEB network management may check the current
status information and set the receiving parameter of the 4-Ch.DVB-S2 Demod card. The
is
input program can be refreshed as per as the Setting Method for Multiplex in Section

av
5
2
3 4
1
um
S
Fig. 5-213 4-Ch.DVB-S2 Demod card Receiving Parameter Config

Step 1: Click “Port n” of “4-Ch.DVB-S2 Demod card” of WEB network management to
239 /503

Step 2: Click “Demod” to navigate to demodulation page;
Step 3: Click “Config” to navigate to Setting page;
Step 4:Set the “Tuner” as “On” and choose the “Standard”, “TS Change”, “Polarize”,”
DiSEqC” and “22KHz” according to the satellite programme to be received, and fill in the
“Downlink Frequency”, “Local Frequency” and “Symbol Rate”;
n
received.
io
is
av
um
Fig. 5-214 4-Ch.DVB-S2 Demod card Receiving Parameter Monitor

S
240 /503
2
3
n
4
io
5
is 6
Fig. 5-215 4-Ch.DVB-S2 Demod card BISS Descrambling Settings

av
Step 1: Click “Port n” of WEB network management to navigate to port page;
Step 2: Click “BISS” to navigate to BISS setting page;
Step 3: Choose “On” of the “BISS Descramble” switch
Step 4: Set the descrambling key information, choose the “BISS Mode”, set the “Key”,
and choose and set the “ID”;
Step 5: Set the BISS programme descrambling, fill in the “Service ID” of the BISS
um
programme to be descrambled and choose the corresponding key;

S
241 /503
5.3.40.3 Parameter
Table 5-79 4-Ch.DVB-S2 Demod card Receiving Parameter

Tuner On/Off Off
TS Change On/Off Off
22KHz On/Off Off
n
Polarize Vertical/Horizontal/Off Off
Satellite 1~Satellite 4(Version1.0/2.0)
Satellite
DiSEqC Satellite 1~Satellite 16(Version1.1/2.1)
1(Version1.0/2.0)
Resend DiSEqC
io
Symbol Rate(Ksps) 1000~45000 27500
Local Frequency(MHz) 1~99999 5150
Downlink Frequency(MHz) 1~99999 4080
BISS Descramble
Biss Mode
Key
is
Table 5-80 4-Ch.DVB-S2 Demod card BISS Descrambling Parameter
Parameter Range
On/Off
Biss Mode 1/Biss Mode E
Default
Off
Biss Mode 1
none
av
between 12 and 16)
ID none
between 12 and 16)
Select Key 1 For
On/Off Off
All The Programs
um
5.3.41 DVB-S2 Demod Card
5.3.41.1 Interface
DVB-S2 Demod card provides four RF input interfaces for DVB-S/S2 standard RF
signal reception, DVB-S2 Demod card is shown in Fig. 5-216 DVB-S2 Demod card:
S
Fig. 5-216 DVB-S2 Demod card
5.3.41.2 Function
DVB-S2 Demod card provides 4 RF input ports for the reception of the RF signal of
DVB-S/DVB-S2 standard. WEB network management may check the current status
242 /503
information and set the receiving parameter of the DVB-S2 Demod card. The input
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The receiving frequency point quantity of the DVB-S2 Demod Card is decided by
the authorization obtained. The authorization for four frequency points at most is
supported.
n
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
io
is
av
um
Fig. 5-217 DVB-S2 Demod Card Parameter

parameter, click “Apply” to validate the parameter.
S
243 /503
2
4
1
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-218 DVB-S2 Demod card Port Interface Config
Step 1: Click “Port n” of “DVB-S2 Demod card” of WEB network management to
Step 2: Click “Interface” to navigate to interface page;
um
Step 3: Set the “Input” switch as “On”, choose the “TS Change” and fill in the
“Appointed PID”;
S
244 /503
5
7
n
6
io
is
av
Fig. 5-219 DVB-S2 Demod card Port Demodulation Config
Step 5: Click “Config” to navigate to demodulation page;
Step 6: Choose the “Standard”, “Polarize”, “DiSEqC” and “22KHz”, and fill in the
“Downlink Frequency”, “Local Frequency” and “Symbol Rate” according to the satellite
program to be received;
um
received.
S
245 /503
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-220 DVB-S2 Demod Card Port Monitor

um

S
246 /503
2
6
1
4
3
n
5
io
is
av
Fig. 5-221 DVB-S2 Demod Card BISS Descrambling System Parameter Setting
Step 1: Click “Port n” of “DVB-S2 Demod Card” of WEB network management to
Step 2: Click the “BISS” on the “DVB-S2 Demod Card” page of WEB network
um
Step 3: Click the “System” on the page to log in the BISS descrambling system
setting page;
Step 4: Set the “BISS Descramble” switch to be “On”.
Step 5: Set the “Key Select Mode” to be “Global”, “Program” or “PID”;
de-scrambled.
S
the same program;
247 /503
n
io
9
10
is
av
Fig. 5-222 DVB-S2 Demod Card BISS Descrambling Key Setting
Step 7 Click the “Key” in the “DVB-S2 Demod Card” BISS descrambling setting page
of the WEB network management to log in the secrete key setting page;
Step 8: Click the “Add” on the page to pop up the BISS secrete key adding and
modification page;
um
Step 9: Fill in the “Name” and “Key” and choose the “BISS Mode” and “ID Mode”;
Step 10: Click the “Apply” on the page to finish the addition of secrete key;
S
248 /503
11 14 12
13
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-223 DVB-S2 Demod Card BISS Descrambling Program Setting
Step 11: click the “Program” in the “DVB-S2 Demod Card” BISS de-scrambling
selection page.
um
S
5.3.41.3 Parameter
Table 5-81 DVB-S2 Demod Card Parameter

License string: 32 characters ********************************
Alarm On/Off On
249 /503
Table 5-82 DVB-S2 Demod Card Port Parameter

Input On/Off Off
TS Change Off/Type1/Type2 Off
Table 5-83 DVB-S2 Demod Card Receiving Parameter

n
22KHz Off/On Off
Polarize Vertical/Horizontal/Off Vertical
Resend DiSEqc/
Satellite 1
DiSEqc Satellite 1~Satellite 4(Version1.0/2.0)/
io
(Version 1.0/2.0)
Satellite 1~Satellite 16(Version1.1/2.1)
Symbol Rate
1000~45000 27500
(Ksps)
Local Frequency
1~99999 5150
(MHz)
Downlink Frequency
(MHz)
ISI
is 1~99999
NULL/…
Table 5-84 DVB-S2 Demod Card BISS Descrambling Parameter

4080
NULL
av
Key Select Mode Global/Program/PID Global
Name
between 0 and 32)
BISS Mode Mode-1/Mode-E Mode-1
Key
between 12 and 16)
um
ID Mode Injected ID/Buried ID Injected

ID
between 0 and 32)
5.3.42 ISDB-T Demod Card
5.3.42.1 Interface
ISDB-T Demod Card provides four RF input interfaces for ISDB-T standard RF signal
S
reception, ISDB-T Demod Card is shown in Fig. 5-224 ISDB-T Demod Card:
Fig. 5-224 ISDB-T Demod Card
250 /503
5.3.42.2 Function
ISDB-T Demod Card provides 4 RF input ports for the reception of the RF signal of
ISDB-T standard. WEB network management may check the current status information
and set the receiving parameter of the ISDB-T Demod Card. The input program can be
refreshed as per as the Setting Method for Multiplex in Section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting
and the output is multiplexed finally.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
n
The receiving frequency point quantity of the ISDB-T Demod Card is decided by
supported.
io
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
is
av
um
Fig. 5-225 ISDB-T Demod Card Parameter Configuration

S
251 /503
2
6
1
3
4
n
5
io
is
Fig. 5-226 ISDB-T Demod Card Port Parameter Configuration
av
Step 1: Click “Port n” of “ISDB-T Demod Card” of WEB network management to
Step 2: Click “Interface” to navigate to interface setting page;
Step 3: Open the “Input” switch;
Step 5: Set the “Appointed PID” according to the demand of actual application to
um
query the Bitrate of this PID;

S
252 /503
2
4
1
3
n
io
is
Fig. 5-227 ISDB-T Demod Card Port Parameter Configuration
av
Step 1: Click “Port n” of “ISDB-T Demod Card” of WEB network management to
Step 2: Click “Config” to navigate to demodulation setting page;
Step 3: Choose the “Bandwidth” and fill in the “Center Frequency” according to the
frequency point information of the signal to be received;
um
The “Monitor” interface shall display the code rate information which is currently
received.
S
253 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-228 ISDB-T Demod Card Port Monitor
av
5.3.42.3 Parameter
Table 5-85 ISDB-T Demod Card Parameter

Alarm On/Off On
um
Table 5-86 ISDB-T Demod Card Interface Parameter

Input On/Off Off
Table 5-87 ISDB-T Demod Card demodulation Parameter

S
Bandwidth 8MHz/7MHz/6MHz/5MHz 8MHz
254 /503
5.3.43 8VSB Demod Card
5.3.43.1 Interface
8VSB Demod Card provides four RF input interfaces for 8VSB standard RF signal
reception, 8VSB Demod Card is shown in Fig. 5-229 8VSB Demod Card:
n
Fig. 5-229 8VSB Demod Card
io
5.3.43.2 Function
8VSB Demod Card provides 4 RF input ports for the reception of the RF signal of
8VSB standard. WEB network management may check the current status information and
set the receiving parameter of the 8VSB Demod Card. The input program can be
is

av
2
4
3
1
um
S
Fig. 5-230 8VSB Demod Card Port Interface Config

Step 1: Click “Port n” of “8VSB Demod Card” of WEB network management to
255 /503

Step 2: Click “Interface” to navigate to Interface Parameter setting page;
Step 3: Set the “Input” as “On” and choose the “TS Change”, and fill in the “Appointed
PID”;
n
5
7
io
6
is
av
um
Fig. 5-231 8VSB Demod Card Port Config

Step 5: Click “Config” to navigate to Config Parameter setting page;
Step 6: Fill in the “Center Frequency” according to the input signal to be received;
received.
S
256 /503
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-232 8VSB Demod Card Port Monitor

um

S
257 /503
3 2
6
4
1
n
5
io
is
av
Fig. 5-233 8VSB Demod Card BISS Descrambling System Parameter Setting
Step 1: Click “Port n” of “8VSB Demod Card” of WEB network management to
Step 2: Click the “BISS” on the “8VSB Demod Card” page of WEB network
um
Step 3: Click the “System” on the page to log in the BISS descrambling system
setting page;
Step 4: Set the “BISS Descramble” switch to be “On”.
Step 5: Set the “Key Select Mode” to be “Global”, “Program” or “PID”;
de-scrambled.
S
the same program;
258 /503
n
9
io
10
is
av
Fig. 5-234 8VSB Demod Card BISS Descrambling Key Setting
Step 7 Click the “Key” in the “8VSB Demod Card” BISS descrambling setting page of
the WEB network management to log in the secrete key setting page;
Step 8: Click the “Add” on the page to pop up the BISS secrete key adding and
modification page;
um
Step 9: Fill in the “Name” and “Key” and choose the “BISS Mode” and “ID Mode”;
Step 10: Click the “Apply” on the page to finish the addition of secrete key;
S
259 /503
11 14 12
n
13
io
is
av
Fig. 5-235 8VSB Demod Card BISS Descrambling Program Setting
Step 11: click the “Program” in the “8VSB Demod Card” BISS de-scrambling setting
page of the WEB network management to log in the program setting page;
selection page.
um
S
5.3.43.3 Parameter
Table 5-88 DTMB Demod Card Parameter

Alarm On/Off On
260 /503
Table 5-89 DTMB Demod Card Port Parameter

Input On/Off Off
Table 5-90 DTMB Demod Card Receiving Parameter

n
Table 5-91 DTMB Demod Card BISS Descrambling Parameter
io
BISS Descramble On/Off On
Key Select Mode Global/Program/PID Global
Name 0~32
BISS Mode Mode-1/Mode-E Mode-1
Mode-1:12bit
5.3.44 DTMB Demod Card

Key
ID Mode
ID
is Mode-E:16bit
Injected/Buried
Mode-1:
Mode-E:14bit
Injected
av
5.3.44.1 Interface
DTMB Demod Card provides four RF input interfaces for DTMB standard RF signal
reception, DTMB Demod Card is shown in Fig. 5-236 DTMB Demod Card:
um
Fig. 5-236 DTMB Demod Card
5.3.44.2 Function
DTMB Demod Card provides 4 RF input ports for the reception of the RF signal of
DTMB standard. WEB network management may check the current status information
and set the receiving parameter of the DTMB Demod Card. The input program can be
S
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The receiving frequency point quantity of the DTMB Demod Card is decided by
supported.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
261 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-237 DTMB Demod Card Parameter Configuration
av
2
6
um
3
4
5
1
S
Fig. 5-238 DTMB Demod Card Port Parameter Configuration
262 /503
Step 1: Click “Port n” of “DTMB Demod Card” of WEB network management to

Step 2: Click “Interface” to navigate to interface setting page;
Step 3: Open the “Input” switch;
Step 5: Set the “Appointed PID” according to the demand of actual application to
query the Bitrate of this PID;
n
io
2
4
1 is
av
um
Fig. 5-239 DTMB Demod Card Port Parameter Configuration

Step 1: Click “Port n” of “DTMB Demod Card” of WEB network management to
Step 2: Click “Config” to navigate to demodulation setting page;
Step 3: Choose the “Bandwidth” and fill in the “Center Frequency” according to the
frequency point information of the signal to be received;
S
The “Monitor” interface shall display the code rate information which is currently
received.
263 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-240 DTMB Demod Card Port Monitor
av
5.3.44.3 Parameter
Table 5-92 DTMB Demod Card Parameter

Alarm On/Off On
um
Table 5-93 DTMB Demod Card Interface Parameter

Input On/Off Off
Table 5-94 DTMB Demod Card demodulation Parameter

S
Bandwidth 8MHz/7MHz/6MHz 8MHz
264 /503
5.3.45 StatMux4 Card
5.3.45.1 Interface
The StatMux4 Card can provide four routes of 75ΩBNC interfaces for ASI signal
output, as shown in Fig. 5-241 StatMux4 Card:
n
Fig. 5-241 StatMux4 Card
5.3.45.2 Function
io
The StatMux4 Card is used for accounting multiplex of ASI output program and the
fixed code rate output. This card supports the ASI code stream output of four routes. Once
the program priority and the code rate are set according to the use condition, click “Apply”.
The program can be multiplexed to the output port via the “Multiplex” interface of WEB
is
network management and used as the output. For the program multiplex method, refer to
av
um
S
Fig. 5-242 StatMux4 Card Parameter Setting
It can set the authorization code and the board card warning switch on the board card
setting interface of the StatMux4 Card and such interface can display the current
265 /503
authorization status and the error rate.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The processing power of the StatMux4 Card 4 is decided by the authorization.
The maximum processing power refers to 30 SD program (one HD program is
equivalent to five SD programs). The processing power can be realized by
purchasing corresponding authorization.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
n
When the StatMux4 Card is used for statistic multiplex, it shall multiplex the program
in the multiplex interface to the output port of the StatMux4 Card at first. For the program
io
multiplex method, refer to section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting. The introduction to board
card parameter setting is as below:
1
is 4
3
av
um
Fig. 5-243 StatMux4 Card Port Config
Step 1: click the “Port n” in the “StatMux4 Card” of WEB network management to log
S
in the port setting page;
Step 3: set the “Total Bitrate” and the “Statistic Multiplex Bitrate” of the output port,
select corresponding outputted “Packet Format” and set the “Re-generate PCR” and
“Alarm” function to be on or off.
266 /503
5
11
n
io
6 7 8 9 10
is
av
Fig. 5-244 StatMux4 Card Service Setting
Step 5: click the “Service” on the page to log in the program setting page;
Step 6: set the “Service Type” of corresponding program to be “SD” or “HD”;

um
Step 7: set the program “Output Mode” to be “Bypass”, “Statistic Multiplex” or “CBR”
according to the real application situation;
“Bypass”: no treatment is made to the program and the direct output is made as per
as the original code rate.
“Statistic Multiplex”: the adjustment is made to the code rate according to

corresponding priority, maximum code rate and minimum code rate setting and then the
output is made.
S
“CBR”: the output is made according to the fixed code rate setting.
Step 8: set the program “Priority” based on the importance degree of program. The
“Priority” can be divided into five levels, including the “High”, “Higher”, “Middle”, “Lower”
and “Low”.
Step 9: set the code rate parameter according to the output mode selected for the
267 /503
program. When the “Statistic Multiplex” mode is selected, set the “Minimum Bitrate” and
the “Maximum Bitrate” to limit the code rate fluctuation rage. When the “CBR” mode is
selected, set the “CBR” Bitrate value to output the program as per as the code rate setting.
Step 10: set the “DTS Interval” according to the real application demand and choose
the “Source Interval” or “Frame*1”.
n
The monitoring interface shall display relevant code rate information of current output
port.
io
is
av
um
Fig. 5-245 StatMux4 Card Port Monitor
5.3.45.3 Parameter
Table 5-95 StatMux4 Card Parameter

S

License Status 0~30SD-Cell 30SD-Cell
Alarm On/Off On
268 /503
Table 5-96 StatMux4 Card Port Parameter

Total Bitrate(bps) 0~200000000 0
Statistic Multiplex
0~200000000 0
Bitrate(bps)
Packet Format 188Byte/204Byte 188Byte
Re-generate PCR Off/On Off
Alarm Off/On On
n
Table 5-97 StatMux4 Card Service Parameter
io
Service Type SD/HD SD
Output Mode Bypass/Statistic Multiplex/CBR Bypass
Priority Low/Lower/Middle/Higher/High Middle
SD：2000000~8000000bps； SD：2000000bps
Minimum Bitrate
HD：10000000~18000000bps； HD：12000000bps
Maximum Bitrate
CBR
is
SD：2000000~8000000bps； SD：5000000bps
HD：12000000~32000000bps； HD：20000000bps
SD：2000000~8000000bps； SD：8000000bps
HD：10000000~32000000bps； HD：14000000bps
av
DTS Interval Source Interval/Frame * 1 Source Interval
5.3.46 CA01B Switch Card
5.3.46.1 Interface
The CA01B Switch Card provides 3 ASI input interfaces and 2 ASI outputs for backup
um
switch of ASI signal programs, as shown in Fig. 5-246 CA01B Switch Card:
Fig. 5-246 CA01B Switch Card
5.3.46.2 Function
S
The CA01B Switch Card can be used for backup and switch of ASI input signal
program. The card supports the three-route ASI code stream input. When the main,
backup and Aux parameters are set according to the use condition, click “Apply” to
normally realize the switch of backup. The program of the main route can be outputted to
the output port via the “Multiplexing” interface of WEB network management. For the
269 /503

In addition to the back board backup function, the CA01B Switch Card also has
several functions in equipment power-off situation and abnormality, as the power-off
selection, three-route abnormality selection and the output port 2 section. It has the
convenient use. In addition, the CA01B Switch Card has the port and program code rate
abnormality switch function. It can realize the switch on the condition that the PID code
rate, the video and the audio are abnormal.
n
io
2
3
4
5
1
is 7 6
7
av
8
um
Fig. 5-247 CA01B Switch Card Parameter Setting
Step 1: click WEB network management “CA01B Switch Card” to log in the board
card page;
Step 2: click the “Monitor Mode” option on the page and select the “Port Monitoring”
or “Program Monitoring” switch mode according to the actual application requirement.
Step 3: click the “Shutdown Output Mode” on the page, choose “Memory” and the
S
output shall be remained in the state before the equipment power-off; choose “Same As
Input Port 1”, “Same As Input Port 2” or “Same As Input Port 3”; and the output is chosen
as the input stream of port after equipment power-off.
Step 4: click the “All Port Error Select” option on the page. When the “Hold Output” is
selected, the three input ports are abnormal and the program stream is outputted from the
current port as still. When the “Cut Output” is selected, the three input ports are abnormal
270 /503
and the output is turned off.
Step 5: click “Output Port 2 Select” option on the page. When the “Same As Output
Port 1” is selected, the output port 2 shall output the program stream as the same as that
of the output port 1. When the “Same As Input Port 1”, “Same As Input Port 2” or “Same
As Input Port 3” is selected, the output port 2 shall output the input stream of the selected
port.
Step 6: click the “Alarm” switch option on the page and choose to turn “On” or “Off”
n
warning function.
Step 7: when the “Port Monitoring” option is selected under the monitoring mode, the
io
“PID Bitrate” is displayed on the monitoring content, as shown in the above figure. If this
function is initialized, the PID code rate of the port shall be monitored and used as the
switch basis for abnormality judgment of port. When the “Program Monitoring” is selected
under the monitoring mode, the monitoring content shall be changed to the “Video
Abnormal” and “Audio Abnormal” in the above red box. If this function is initialized, the
program abnormality. is
audio and video program shall be monitored and used as the switch basis for judgment of
av
5.3.46.2.2 Output port setting:

The code rate of output system, the output format and the warning switch can be set
on the switch card of the output port interface of CA01B Switch Card.
um
S
271 /503
2
4
3
n
1
io
is
Fig. 5-248 CA01B Switch Card Output Port Parameter Setting
av
Step 1: click the “Output Port” in the web network management “CA01B Switch Card”
to log in the output port setting page;
Step 2: set the “Total Bitrate” on the page and the code rate range of the output
system is 0-200,000,000bps;
Step 3: click the “Packet Format” option on the page to choose the “188 Byte” or “204
um
Byte” output;
warning function.
It can view the real outputted effective code rate.

S
5.3.46.2.3 Port backup

The port backup of CA01B Switch Card is based on the port backup function of the
back board. It shall select the “Port Monitoring” option as per as the step 2 operation in
5.3.46.2.1Board card setting. Click the “apply” to initialize the port monitoring function. The
backup relationship between the master equipment and the backup equipment is as
shown in 6.4.2Port Backup. The Aux port setting method is as shown in 6.4.1Service Backup
272 /503
in details. In addition, the port backup of the CA01B Switch Card can realize the
monitoring to PID code rate and the switch. The main, backup and aux port shall support
the monitoring of two PIDs. In this time, it needs to set the multi-program aux playing
function for the aux port. To realize the PID monitoring function, it shall follow the step 7
operation of 5.3.46.2.1Board card setting: turn on the PID code rate switch, click “Apply” and
turn on the “PID Bitrate” monitoring function.
n
4
io
2
3
1
is
av
um
Fig. 5-249 CA01B Switch Card Output Port Parameter Setting
Step 1: click the “Main Port”, the “Backup Port” or the “Aux Port” in the web network
management “CA01B Switch Card” to log in the port setting page;
warning function.
Step 3: set the “Monitor PID”, “PID Lower Limit Bitrate” and “PID Upper Limit Bitrate”
on the page. When the code rates of two PIDs are beyond the upper limit and the lower
S
limit of corresponding PID code rate, it is believed that the port is abnormal and the switch
shall be made.
When the single program aux playing option is used on the aux port, it needs to click
273 /503
the “Program Research” on the bottom to refresh the page. When the input program
names are totally shown in the “Aux Program Select”, it can select one program from the
drop-down box to duplicate the program. In addition, it shall fill the “Independent PCR
Count” and the “Video Carry PCR Count” according to the real condition of the backup
program to realize the backup.
n
4
io
1
is 2
3
av
Fig. 5-250 CA01B Switch Card Single Program Aux Playing Function
um
Step 1: click the “Aux Port” in the web network management “CA01B Switch Card” to
log in the Aux Port setting page;
Step 2: click the “Aux Mode” option on the page and choose the “Single Program”
option.
Step 3: click the “Program Research” option on the page and select “On”.
Step 4: click the “Apply” on the page after setting the parameter to search the table.
S
274 /503
n
6
io
5
is
Fig. 5-251 CA01B Switch Card Single Program Aux Playing Searching List
av
Step 5: click the “Aux Program Select” option after searching the list and choose the
aux playing program from the list.
Step 6: fill the “Independent PCR Count” and “Video Carry PCR Count” according to
the real condition of the main route program;
um
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The single program aux playing function supports 16 programs at most. Namely,
the sum of the “Independent PCR Count” and the “Video Carry PCR Count” shall
not be greater than 16.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
S
275 /503
8 9
10
n
11
io
is
Fig. 5-252 CA01B Switch Card Single Program Aux Playing Function Multiplexing
av
Step 8: click the “Multiplexing” of the network management interface to log in the
program multiplex interface;
Step 9: select “CA01B Switch Card” to view the input port;
Step 10: right click the “ASI 3” port and manually select and refresh the input list
um
Step 11: display the appointed single program with corresponding number on the port
after the refreshing and realize the program backup operation of backboard (aux playing
of single program). The program setting method for back board is as shown in 6.4.1Service
Backup.
5.3.46.2.4 Program backup

The program backup of CA01B Switch Card is based on the program backup function
of the back board. It shall select the “Program Monitoring” option as per as the step 2
S
operation in 5.3.46.2.1Board card setting. Click the application to initialize the program
monitoring function. The program backup relationship between the main port and the
backup port is as the same as the program backup setting method of the back board. For
details, refer to 6.4.1Service Backup. In addition, the program backup of CA01B Switch
Card can be used for monitoring the audio and video and make the switch then. The main
and backup ports support the monitoring for 8 videos or audios. To realize the video and
audio monitoring function, it needs to follow the step 7 operation in 5.3.46.2.1Board card
276 /503
setting: turn on the video abnormality switch or audio abnormality switch and click “Apply”
to switch on corresponding monitoring function.
2
4
n
3
io
1
is
av
Fig. 5-253 CA01B Switch Card Monitor Program
Step 1: click the “Main Port” or the “Backup Port” in the web network management
“CA01B Switch Card” to log in the port setting page;
Step 2: click the “Monitor Program” on the page to log in the monitoring program
um
page;
Step 3: check the program which is the audio and video monitoring target. When the
audio is mute or the video is composed of the color bar, it is believed that the program is
abnormal.
Step 4: after checking, click the “Apply” on the page after setting the parameter to put
the setting parameter into effect.
S
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The program monitoring function can support the monitoring for the video or
audio of 8 programs at most.
The audio must be monitored in such a way that it is ensured that the program is
a pure audio one and no video is given.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
277 /503
5.3.46.3 Parameter
Table 5-98 CA01B Switch Card Parameter

Port
Monitor Mode Program Monitoring/Port Monitoring
Monitoring
Shutdown Memory/Same As Input Port 1/ Same As Input Port 2/
Memory
Output Mode Same As Input Port 3
All Port Error
Hold Output/Cut Output Hold Output
n
Select
Output Port 2 Same As Output Port 1/ Same As Input Port 1/ Same Same As
Select As Input Port 2/ Same As Input Port 3 Output Port 1
Alarm On/Off On
PID Bitrate On/Off Off
io
Video Abnomal On/Off Off
Audio Abnomal On/Off Off
Table 5-99 CA01B Switch Card Output Port Parameter

Alarm
Package Format
is
Total Bitrate(bps) 0～200000000
On/Off
188 Byte/204Byte
0
On
188 Byte
Table 5-100 CA01B Switch Card Input Port Parameter

av
Alarm On/Off On
Monitoring PID 1(2) 0~8191 8191
PID 1(2) Lower Limit
0~200000000 0
Bitrate(bps)
PID 1(2) Upper Limit
0~200000000 0
Bitrate (bps)
um
Multiple Program/Single Multiple

Aux Mode
Program Program
Independent PCR
0～16 0
Number
Video PCR Number 0～16 0
Aux Program Select No Program /Program List No Program
Program Search Cancel/Ok Cancel
S
278 /503
5.3.47 ASI Switch Card Type-D
5.3.47.1 Interface
The ASI Switch Card Type-D provides 3 ASI input interfaces and 2 ASI outputs for
backup switch of ASI signal programs. The RJ45 Ethernet interface is used to connect to
the switch controller to implement switching control of the card, and the CTRL Ethernet
interface is reserved, as shown in Fig. 5-254 ASI Switch Card Type-D:
n
io
Fig. 5-254 ASI Switch Card Type-D
5.3.47.2 Normal mode function
is
The ASI Switch Card Type-D can be used for backup and switch of ASI input signal
program. The card supports the three-route ASI code stream input. When the main,
backup and aux parameters are set according to the use condition, click “Apply” to
av
normally realize the switch of backup. The program of the main route can be outputted to
the output port via the “Multiplexing” interface of WEB network management. For the
um
S
279 /503
n
io
is 3
av
Fig. 5-255 ASI Switch Card Type-D Parameter Setting
Step 1: click WEB network management “ASI Switch Card Type-D” to log in the board
card page;
um
Step 2: set the “Work Mode” as “Normal”;

In addition to the back board backup function, the ASI Switch Card Type-D also has
selection, three-route abnormality selection，the output port 1 section and the output port 2
S
section. It has the convenient use. In addition, the ASI Switch Card Type-D has the port
and program code rate abnormality switch function. It can realize the switch on the
condition that the Synchronization status, Effective Bitrate, PID Bitrate, the video and the
audio are abnormal.
280 /503
2
3
5 4
1
7
n
6
io
8
is 9
av
card page;
um
Step 2: click the “Monitor Level” option on the page and select the “Port Monitoring”
or “Program Monitoring” switch mode according to the actual application requirement.
Main Port”, “Same As Backup Port” or “Same As Aux Port”, and the output is chosen as
the input stream of port after equipment power-off.
S
Step 5: click “Output Port 1 Src Select” option on the page. When the “Back Board” is
selected, the output port 1 shall output the Multiplexed program stream from the
backboard. When the “Main Port”, “Backup Port” or “Aux Port” is selected, the output port
281 /503
1 shall output the input stream of the selected port.
of the output port 1. When the “Same As Main Port”, “Same As Backup Port” or “Same As
Aux Port” is selected, the output port 2 shall output the input stream of the selected port.
warning function.
n
Step 8: when the “Port Monitoring” option is selected under the monitoring mode, the
“Sync Status”, “Effective Bitrate” and “PID Bitrate” are displayed on the monitoring content,
io
as shown in the above figure. If this function is initialized, the synchronization status,
effective Bitrate and PID Bitrate of the port shall be monitored and used as the switch
basis for abnormality judgment of port. When the “Program Monitoring” is selected under
the monitoring mode, the monitoring content shall be changed to the “Video Abnormal”
and “Audio Abnormal” in the above red box. If this function is initialized, the audio and
abnormality. is
video program shall be monitored and used as the switch basis for judgment of program
av
5.3.47.2.2 Output port setting:

The code rate of output system, the output format and the warning switch can be set
on the switch card of the output port interface of ASI Switch Card Type-D.
um
S
282 /503
2
6
3
5
n
4
1
io
is
av
Fig. 5-257 ASI Switch Card Type-D Output Port Parameter Setting
Step 1: click the “Output Port” in the web network management “ASI Switch Card
Type-D” to log in the output port setting page;
um
Step 2: click the “config” on the page to log in the parameter setting page;
Step 3: set the “Total Bitrate” on the page and the code rate range of the output
system is 0-200,000,000bps;
Step 4: click the “Packet Format” option on the page to choose the “188 Byte” or “204
Byte” output;
S
warning function.
The monitoring interface shall display the output source and effective bitrate.
283 /503
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-258 ASI Switch Card Type-D Output Port Monitor
5.3.47.2.3 Port backup

The port backup of ASI Switch Card Type-D is based on the port backup function of
um
the back board. It shall select the “Port Monitoring” option as per as the step 2 operation in
5.3.47.2.1Board card setting. Click the “apply” to initialize the port monitoring function. The
backup relationship between the master equipment and the backup equipment is as
shown in 6.4.2Port Backup. The aux port setting method is as shown in 6.4.1Service Backup
in details. In addition, the port backup of the ASI Switch Card Type-D can realize the
monitoring to the synchronization status, effective Bitrate and PID Bitrate, make the switch
then. The main, backup and aux port shall support the monitoring of two PIDs. In this time,
S
it needs to set the multi-program aux playing function for the aux port. To realize the
synchronization status, effective Bitrate and PID Bitrate monitoring function, it shall follow
the step 8 operation of 5.3.47.2.1Board card setting: turn on the corresponding switch, click
“Apply” and turn on the monitoring function.
284 /503
2
7
3
4
1
n
5
io
is
av
management “ASI Switch Card Type-D” to log in the port setting page;
um
warning function.
Step 4: set the “Abnormal Trigger Delay” and “Abnormal Resume Delay” for delay
adjustment.
Step 5: set the “Effective Bitrate Lower Limit” and “Effective Bitrate Upper Limit” on
S
the page. When the code rate of port is beyond the upper limit and the lower limit, it is
believed that the port is abnormal and the switch shall be made.
Step 6: set the “Monitor PID”, “PID Bitrate Lower Limit” and “PID Bitrate Upper Limit”
shall be made.
285 /503
When the single program aux playing option is used on the aux port, it needs to click
the “Program Research” on the bottom to refresh the page. When the input program
names are totally shown in the “Aux Program Select”, it can select one program from the
drop-down box to duplicate the program. In addition, it shall fill the “Independent PCR
Count” and the “Video Carry PCR Count” according to the real condition of the backup
n
program to realize the backup.
io
2
5
1 is
av
3
4
um
Fig. 5-260 ASI Switch Card Type-D Single Program Aux Playing Function
Step 1: click the “Aux Port” in the web network management “ASI Switch Card
S
Type-D” to log in the Aux Port setting page;
Step 3: click the “Aux Mode” option on the page and choose the “Single Program”
option.
Step 4: click the “Program Research” option on the page and select “On”.
286 /503
Step 5: click the “Apply” on the page after setting the parameter to search the table.
n
io
7
is 6
av
Fig. 5-261 ASI Switch Card Type-D Single Program Aux Playing Searching List
Step 5: click the “Aux Program Select” option after searching the list and choose the
um
aux playing program from the list.
Step 6: fill the “Independent PCR Count” and “Video Carry PCR Count” according to
the real condition of the main route program;
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
S
The single program aux playing function supports 16 programs at most. Namely,
the sum of the “Independent PCR Count” and the “Video Carry PCR Count” shall
not be greater than 16.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
287 /503
9 10
11
n
12
io
is
av
Fig. 5-262 ASI Switch Card Type-D Single Program Aux Playing Function Multiplexing
Step 9: click the “Multiplexing” of the network management interface to log in the
um
Step 10: select “ASI Switch Card Type-D” to view the input port;
Step 11: right click the “ASI 3” port and manually select and refresh the input list
Step 12: display the appointed single program with corresponding number on the port
after the refreshing and realize the program backup operation of backboard (aux playing
of single program). The program setting method for back board is as shown in 6.4.1Service
Backup.
S
5.3.47.2.4 Program backup

The program backup of ASI Switch Card Type-D is based on the program backup
function of the back board. It shall select the “Program Monitoring” option as per as the
step 2 operation in 5.3.47.2.1Board card setting. Click the application to initialize the
program monitoring function. The program backup relationship between the main port and
the backup port is as the same as the program backup setting method of the back board.
288 /503
For details, refer to 6.4.1Service Backup. In addition, the program backup of ASI Switch
Card Type-D can be used for monitoring the audio and video and make the switch then.
The main and backup ports support the monitoring for 8 videos or audios. To realize the
video and audio monitoring function, it needs to follow the step 8 operation in
5.3.47.2.1Board card setting: turn on the video abnormality switch or audio abnormality
switch and click “Apply” to switch on corresponding monitoring function.
n
2
4
io
1 3
is
av
um
Fig. 5-263 ASI Switch Card Type-D Monitor Program
Step 1: click the “Main Port” or the “Backup Port” in the web network management
“ASI Switch Card Type-D” to log in the port setting page;
Step 2: click the “Monitor Program” on the page to log in the monitoring program
S
page;
Step 3: check the program which is the audio and video monitoring target. When the
audio is mute or the video is composed of the color bar, it is believed that the program is
abnormal.
Step 4: after checking, click the “Apply” on the page after setting the parameter to put
the setting parameter into effect.
289 /503
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The program monitoring function can support the monitoring for the video or
audio of 8 programs at most.
The audio must be monitored in such a way that it is ensured that the program is
a pure audio one and no video is given.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
5.3.47.3 3 Switch 2 mode function
n
The 3 Switch 2 mode of ASI Switch Card Type-D can be used for backup and switch
the ASI input signal. The card supports the three-route ASI code stream input. When the
io
main port, backup port and the backup parameters are set according to the use condition,
click “Apply” to normally realize the switch of backup. The two output ports shall
automatically output the current stream according to the real backup situation. No
additional multiplexing or backup operation is required.
is 2
av
1
um
3
S
card page;
290 /503
Step 2: set the “Work Mode” as “3 Switch 2”;

In addition to the back board backup function, the ASI Switch Card Type-D also has
n
selection, three-route abnormality selection and the output port 2 section. It has the
convenient use. In addition, the ASI Switch Card Type-D has the port and code rate
abnormality switch function. It can realize the switch on the condition that the
io
Synchronization status, Effective Bitrate and PID Bitrate are abnormal.
1
is 5
3
4
av
7 6
8
um
9
S
card page;
the real application requirement. It can choose the “Main Priority”, “Floating”, “One Way
Switch”, “Assign Main Port” or “Assign Backup Port” as the backup mode. It is advised that
the “Main Priority” mode shall be set during the normal use.
291 /503
one.
If the switch is made under the “One Way Switch” mode, it is impossible to switch to
the main route.
n
The “Assign Main Port” or the “Assign Backup Port” can use the appointed port.
Step 3: click the “Temporary Switch To” option on the page and select the “Main Port”,
io
“Backup Port” or “Aux Port” to temporarily switch the output source to the specified port.
Main Port”, “Same As Backup Port” or “Same As Aux Port”, and the output is chosen as
is
the input stream of port after equipment power-off.
av
of the output port 1. When the “Same As Main Port”, “Same As Backup Port” or “Same As
Aux Port” is selected, the output port 2 shall output the input stream of the selected port.
um
warning function.
Step 8: the card only supports "port monitoring" in the 3 Switch 2 mode, the
synchronization status, effective Bitrate and PID Bitrate of the port shall be monitored and
used as the switch basis for abnormality judgment of port.
S
5.3.47.3.2 Port setting

The port backup of the ASI Switch Card Type-D can realize the monitoring to the
synchronization status, effective Bitrate and PID Bitrate, make the switch then. The main,
backup and aux port shall support the monitoring of two PIDs. In this time, it needs to set
the multi-program aux playing function for the aux port. To realize the synchronization
292 /503
status, effective Bitrate and PID Bitrate monitoring function, it shall follow the step 8
operation of 5.3.47.2.1Board card setting: turn on the corresponding switch, click “Apply”
and turn on the monitoring function.
2
7
n
3
4
io
1
5
is
av
um
management “ASI Switch Card Type-D” to log in the port setting page;
warning function.
S
Step 4: set the “Abnormal Trigger Delay” and “Abnormal Resume Delay” for delay
adjustment.
Step 5: set the “Effective Bitrate Lower Limit” and “Effective Bitrate Upper Limit” on
the page. When the code rate of port is beyond the upper limit and the lower limit, it is
Step 6: set the “Monitor PID”, “PID Bitrate Lower Limit” and “PID Bitrate Upper Limit”
293 /503
shall be made.
5.3.47.3.3 Switching controller
n
In the 3 Switch 2 mode, the switching of the card can be controlled by the switching
controller, when the RJ45 Ethernet interface of the card is connected with the switching
controller network port. Set the card parameters as described in 5.3.47.3.1Board card
io
setting and 5.3.47.3.2Port setting. For the switching controller use method, refer to its
instruction manual.
5.3.47.4 Parameter
Table 5-101 ASI Switch Card Type-D Parameter

Parameter
Work Mode
Backup Mode
Temporary
is Range
Normal/3 Switch 2
Assign Main Port/Assign Backup Port/
Assign Aux Port/Main Priority/
One Way Switch/Floating
Default
Normal
Floating
av
Cancel/Main Port/Backup Port/Aux Port Cancel
Switch To
Monitor Mode Program Monitoring/Port Monitoring Port Monitoring
Shutdown Output Memory/Same As Main Port/
Same As Main Port
Mode Same As Backup Port/ Same As Aux Port
All Port Error
Hold Output/Cut Output Hold Output
Select
Output Port 1 Src
Back Board/Main Port/Backup Port/Aux Port Back Board
Select
um
Output Port 2 Same As Output Port 1/ Same As Main Port/

Same As Output Port 1
Select Same As Backup Port/ Same As Aux Port
Alarm Off/On On
PID Bitrate Off/On On
Video Abnomal Off/On On
Audio Abnomal Off/On On
Sync Status Off/On On
Effective Bitrate Off/On On
Table 5-102 ASI Switch Card Type-D Output Port Parameter

S

Total Bitrate（bps） 0～200000000 0
Alarm On/Off On
Package Format 188 Byte/204Byte 188 Byte
294 /503
Table 5-103 ASI Switch Card Type-D Input Port Parameter

Alarm Off/On On
Abnormal Trigger
0 ~ 255 1
Delay (s)
Abnormal Resume
0 ~ 255 1
Delay (s)
Effective Bitrate Lower
0 ~ 200000 1000
Limit (Kbps)
n
Effective Bitrate Upper
0 ~ 200000 100000
Limit (Kbps)
Monitoring PID 1 0～8191(0x1fff) 8191(0x1fff)
PID 1 Lower Limit
0 ~ 200000 0
io
Bitrate(Kbps)
PID 1 Upper Limit
0 ~ 200000 200000
Bitrate (Kbps)
Monitoring PID 2 0～8191(0x1fff) 8191(0x1fff)
PID 2 Lower Limit
0 ~ 200000 0
Bitrate(Kbps)
PID 2 Upper Limit
Bitrate (Kbps)
Aux Mode
Independent PCR
Number
is 0 ~ 200000
Multiple Program/
Single Program
0～16
200000
Multiple Program
0
av
Video PCR Number 0～16 0
Aux Program Select No Program /Program List No Program
Program Search Cancel/Ok Cancel
5.3.48 DS3 Switch Card
5.3.48.1 Interface
um
The DS3 Switch Card provides 3 DS3 input interfaces and 2 DS3 outputs for backup
switch of DS3 signal programs, as shown in Fig. 5-266 DS3 Switch Card:
Fig. 5-266 DS3 Switch Card

S
5.3.48.2 Function
The DS3 Switch Card can be used for backup and switch the DS3 input signal. The
card supports the three-route DS3 code stream input. When the three ports and the
backup parameters are set according to the use condition, click “Apply” to normally realize
the switch of backup. The two output ports shall automatically output the current stream as
per as the real backup situation. No multiplexing operation is required.
295 /503

The DS3 Switch Card can realize the automatic switch by judging the code rate within
the PID range and can realize the switch function via the manual function. The main route
priority mode can be selected during automatic switch. This card also supports DS3 and
E3 signal backup switch.
n
2
7
3
1
io
4
5
is
av
Fig. 5-267 DS3 Switch Card Config

um
Step 1: click WEB network management “DS3 Switch Card” to log in the board card
page;
Step 3: click the “Bitrate Check Time” on the page to select the time meeting the real
application requirements. The “1s”,”1/2s”, “1/4s” or “1/8” is available;
Step 4: click the “Output Source” option on the page. When the “Auto” is selected, the
S
automatic switch mode is initialized and the automatic switch will be made between the
ports according to the real setting condition. When “DS3 1”, “DS3 2” or “DS3 3” is selected,
it will output the program stream of the selected input port and no switch shall be made.
Step 5: click the “Main Priority” option on the page and choose whether to open the
priority mode of the main route.
296 /503
Step 6: click the “DS3/E3” option the page and choose corresponding mode
according to the input source.
n
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
When the function of the daughter card is reset, all parameters of the board card
and the port will be recovered to the default value.
io
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The monitoring interface shall display current output situation and relevant
information of board card.
is
av
um
S
Fig. 5-268 DS3 Switch Card Monitor
5.3.48.2.2 Port setting

The PID upper and lower limit, the minimum code rate and other receiving
parameters can be set on the input port interface of the DS3 Switch Card. When the
normal reception is made on the input end, it shall judge the code rate value within the PID
range. If the code rate is less than the minim code rate setting, it is believed that the port is
297 /503
abnormal and the switch shall be made. The manual mode is not affected by such switch.
The stream received by the input port of the user shall be outputted.
2
5
1
n
3
io
4
is
av
Fig. 5-269 DS3 Switch Card Port Config
Step 1: click the “Port 1” in the “DS3 Switch Card” of WEB network management to
log in the port page;
um
Step 3: set the “Minimum Bitrate”, the “Minimum PID” and the “Maximum PID” on the
page. When the code rate within the PID range is less than the “Minimum Bitrate”, it is
Step 4: set the “Channel Switch” to be “On”. Set the “Protocol”, “Bit Sequence”,
“Packet Format”, “Frame Format”, “RS Decoding”, “Descramble” and “Interleaved
Decoding” according to the parameter setting of the last input source.
S
The monitoring interface shall display the code rate information of the input source
which is received currently.
298 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-270 DS3 Switch Card Port Monitor
av
The setting method of ports 2 and 3 are identical to that of port 1. No description is
additionally given hereby.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
This board card is provided with the power-off memory function that the normal
output can be remained after the power failure.
um
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
5.3.48.3 Parameter
Table 5-104 DS3 Switch Card Parameter

Bitrate Check Time 1/8s / 1/4s / 1/2s / 1s 1s
Output Source Auto/DS3 1/DS3 2/DS3 3 Auto
Main Priority No/Yes Yes
S
DS3/E3 DS3/E3 DS3

Reset Card No/Yes No
299 /503
Table 5-105 DS3 Switch Card Input Port Parameter

Minimum Bitrate(Mbps) 0~200 0
Minimum PID 0～8191 0
Maximum PID 0～8191 8190
Channel Switch On/Off On
Protocol Normal/ Tandberg Normal
Bit Sequence MSB/LSB MSB
n
Package Fromat 188/204 188
Frame Format No Frame/C-bit/M13 C-bit
io
Interleaved Decoding On/Off Off
5.3.49 RF Switch Card
5.3.49.1 Interface
is
The RF Switch Card (Hardware versions earlier than 1.4) provides 2 RF input
interfaces, 1 RF output interface and 1 ASI output interface for backup switch of RF signal
of DVB-C standard, as shown in Fig. 5-271 RF Switch Card (Hardware versions earlier than
1.4).
av
Fig. 5-271 RF Switch Card (Hardware versions earlier than 1.4)
The RF Switch Card (Hardware version 1.4 and Later Versions) provides 2 RF input
um
interfaces, 1 RF output interface, Manual switch and Status Indicators for backup switch of
RF signal of DVB-C and DVB-T/T2 standard, as shown in Fig. 5-272 RF Switch Card
(Hardware version 1.4 and later versions).
S
Fig. 5-272 RF Switch Card (Hardware version 1.4 and later versions)
5.3.49.2 Function (Hardware versions earlier than 1.4)
The RF Switch Card (Hardware versions earlier than 1.4) can be used for backup and
switch the RF input signal of DVB-C standard. The card supports the two-route RF signal
input. When the main and backup port parameters and the backup parameters are set
according to the use condition, click “Apply” to normally realize the switch of backup. The
300 /503
RF output port shall automatically output the current stream according to the real backup
condition. The output code stream of ASI output port is identical to that of the RF output
port, which can be used for monitoring. The board card requires no multiplex operation.

The RF Switch Card can realize the automatic switch by judging the code rate value
within the PID range or by judging the level fluctuation size. It can also realize the switch
by manual selection. When making the automatic switch, it can choose the “Main Priority”
n
mode.
When switching the level threshold, it can manually or automatic obtain the reference
io
level. If the level fluctuation is greater than the level switch threshold setting, it is believed
that the route is abnormal and the switch shall be made. The manual mode is not affected
by this action. The stream received by the input port of the user shall be outputted.
2
is 6
8
av
3
4
5
7
um
Fig. 5-273 RF Switch Card Parameter Setting

S
Step 1: Click WEB network management “RF Switch Card” to log in the board card
page;
Step 3: click the “Bitrate Check Time” on the page to select the time according to the
real application requirements. The “2s”, “1s”,”1/2s” or “1/4s” is available;
301 /503
n
one.
io
the main route.
The “Assign Main” or the “Assign Backup” can use the appointed port.
Step 5: click the “Standard Level Mode” option the page, select “Auto” and then the
is
equipment shall automatically obtain the level once after each time period. If select
“Manual”, it needs to set “Get Standard Level” option to be “Yes”. Once this setting is
applied, the manual obtainment is made once. The level obtains by the two situations can
be displayed on the port “Monitor” interface.
av
Step 6: set the “Level Switch Threshold” on the page. When the equipment detects
that the difference between the real level and the reference level is greater than the
threshold, it is believed that the port is abnormal and the switch shall be made.
warning function.
um
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The monitoring interface shall display current output situation.

S
302 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-274 RF Switch Card Monitor
av
5.3.49.2.2 Main and backup route setting
parameters can be set on the main and backup route setting interface of the RF Switch
Card. When the normal reception is made on the input end, it shall judge the code rate
value within the PID range. If the code rate is less than the minim code rate setting, it is
um
believed that the port is abnormal and the switch shall be made. The manual mode is not
affected by such switch. The stream received by the input port of the user shall be
outputted.
S
303 /503
2
5
n
4
io
1
is
Fig. 5-275 RF Switch Card Port Parameter Setting
av
Step 1: click the “Main Port” or the “Backup Port” in the “RF Switch Card” in the web
network management to log in the port page;
Step 3: set the “Minimum Bitrate Thredhold”, “Minimum PID” and “Maximum PID” on
the page. When the code rate within the PID range is less than the “Minimum Code Rate”,
um
it is believed that the port is abnormal and the switch shall be made.
Step 4: set the “Frequency”, “Symbol Rate”, “Signal Type” and “Modulation mode”
according to the input source of the front-end device.
S
source, the reference level, the input level and other messages.
304 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-276 RF Switch Card Port Monitor
av
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
um
5.3.49.3 Function (Hardware version 1.4 and later versions)
The RF Switch Card (Hardware version 1.4 and later versions) can be used for
backup and switch the RF input signal of DVB-C and DVB-T/T2 standard. The card
supports the two-route RF signal input. When the main and backup port parameters and
the backup parameters are set according to the use condition, click “Apply” to normally
realize the switch of backup. The RF output port shall automatically output the current
stream according to the real backup condition. The RF Switch Card (Hardware version 1.4
S
and later versions) can also switch to the appointed port by the Manual switch on the card
and the Status Indicators will display the current output status. Indicator L1 and Indicator
L2 correspond to Port 1 and Port 2 respectively. When the indicator is red, the
corresponding port is working abnormally. When the indicator is green, the corresponding
port is working properly. When the indicator flashes, the corresponding port is using. The
board card requires no multiplex operation.
305 /503

The RF Switch Card can realize the automatic switch by judging the code rate value
within the PID range or by judging the level fluctuation size. It can also realize the switch
by manual selection. When making the automatic switch, it can choose the “Main Priority”
mode.
n
io
2
1
is 4
av
5
6
8
um
Fig. 5-277 RF Switch Card Parameter Setting
Step 1: Click WEB network management “RF Switch Card” to log in the board card
page;
S
306 /503
one.
the main route.
n
Step 4: set the “Level Change”, “Sync Status” and “PID Bitrate” according to the
demand of real application.
io
is
Step 6: set the “Float Threshold” on the page. When the equipment detects that the
difference between the real level and the reference level is greater than the threshold, it is
av
warning function.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
um
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝

S
307 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-278 RF Switch Card Monitor
av
value within the PID range. If the code rate is less than the minim code rate setting, it is
um
believed that the port is abnormal and the switch shall be made. The manual mode is not
affected by such switch. The stream received by the input port of the user shall be
outputted.
S
308 /503
2
4
3
n
5
1
io
7
6
is 9
Fig. 5-279 RF Switch Card Port Parameter Setting

8
av
Step 1: click the “Port 1” or the “Port 2” in the “RF Switch Card” in the web network
management to log in the port page;
Step 3: Set the “Demod” switch as “On”;

um
Step 4: Click the “Standard” on the page, it can choose the “DVB-C”, “DVB-T” or
“DVB-T2”;
Step 5: set the “Frequency”, “Symbol Rate”, “Bandwidth”, “Profile” and “Plpld”
according to the input source of the front-end device.
Step 6: set the “Minimal Bitrate”, “Maximal Bitrate”, “PID Low” and “PID High” on the
page. When the code rate within the PID range is out of the set scope, it is believed that
the port is abnormal and the switch shall be made.
S
Step 7: set the “Trigger Delay” and “Resume Delay” for delay adjustment.
warning function.
309 /503
source, the reference level, the input level and other messages.
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-280 RF Switch Card Port Monitor
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
um

＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
5.3.49.3.3 Manual switch setting

The Manual switch on the card can be used for switching the input signals. It has the
highest priority. When switching to "1", the card will output the signal of “Port 1”. When
switching to "2", the card will output the signal of “Port 2”. When switching to "SW", the
card will automatically output the current stream according to the real backup condition.
S
For the backup method, refer to section 5.3.49.3.1Board card setting and 5.3.49.3.2Main and
backup route setting.
310 /503
5.3.49.4 Parameter
Table 5-106 RF Switch Card Parameter (Hardware versions earlier than 1.4)
Level Switch
1~11 6
Threshold (dB)
Bitrate Check Time (1/4s)/(1/2s)/1s/2s 1s
Assign Main / Assign Backup / Main Priority
/ One Way Switch / Floating
n
Standard Level
Manual / Auto Manual
Mode
Get Standard Level No/Yes No
Alarm On/Off On
Reset Card No/Yes No
io
Table 5-107 RF Switch Card Port Parameter (Hardware versions earlier than 1.4)
Minimum Bitrate
0~200000000 0
Threshold (bps)
Minimum PID
Maximum PID
Frequency (KHz)
Symbol Rate
is 0～8191
0～8191
52000～858000
3500～7000
0
8191
554000
6875
av
(Kbaud)
Signal Type Digital / Analog Digital
Modulation Mode QAM64/QAM128/QAM256 QAM64
Table 5-108 RF Switch Card Parameter (Hardware version 1.4 and later versions)
Assign Main/Assign Backup/Main
backupMode Assign Main
um
First/One Way Switch/Floating

Level Change On/ Off On
PID Bitrate On/ Off On
Sync Status On/ Off On
Standard Level
Manual/Auto Auto
Mode
Get Standard
Ok/Cancel Cancel
Level
Float
1.00~11.00 2.00
Threshold(dBuV)
Alarm On/ Off On
S
Reset Card Ok/Cancel Cancel
311 /503
Table 5-109 RF Switch Card Port Parameter (Hardware version 1.4 and later versions)
Demod On/Off Off
Standard DVB-C / DVB-T/ DVB-T2 DVB-C
Frequency (KHz) 42000~870000 554000
Symbol Rate (Ksps) 1000~7000 6875
Bandwidth 8MHz/ 7MHz/ 6MHz/ 5MHz 8MHz
PlpId 0~255 0
PID Low 0~8191 0
n
PID High 0~8191 8191
Minimal Bitrate (bps) 0~200000000 0
Maximal Bitrate (bps) 0~200000000 200000000
Trigger Delay (ms) 0~255000 3000
io
Resume Delay (ms) 0~255000 3000
Alarm On/Off On
5.3.50 Demod Switch Card
5.3.50.1 Interface
is
The Demod Switch Card provides 2 RF input interfaces, 1 RF output interface, 1
manual switch and 2 status indicators for backup switch of RF signal of DVB-C standard.
The I/O Ethernet interface is used to connect to the switch controller to implement
av
switching control of the card, as shown in Fig. 5-281 Demod Switch Card.
Fig. 5-281 Demod Switch Card

um
5.3.50.2 Function
The Demod Switch Card can be used for backup and switch the RF input signal of
DVB-C standard. The card supports the two-route RF signal input, each signal can
demodulate and receive eight frequency points. When the main and backup port
parameters and the backup parameters are set according to the use condition, click
“Apply” to normally realize the switch of backup. The RF output port shall automatically
output the current stream according to the real backup condition. The Demod Switch Card
S
can also switch to the appointed port by the Manual switch on the card and the Status
Indicators will display the current output status. Indicator L1 and Indicator L2 correspond
to Port 1(main) and Port 2(backup) respectively. When the indicator is red, the
corresponding port is working abnormally. When the indicator is green, the corresponding
port is working properly. When the indicator flashes, the corresponding port is using. The
program of the main port and backup port can be outputted to the output port via the
“Multiplexing” interface of WEB network management, even if the program is used for
312 /503
backup. For the program multiplex method, refer to section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting.

The Demod Switch Card can realize the automatic switch by judging the system code
rate of each frequency point, the code rate value within the PID range or the level
fluctuation size. It can also realize the switch by manual selection. When making the
automatic switch, it can choose the “Main Priority” mode.
n
io
1
is 3 4
5
av
6
8
9
um
10
S
Fig. 5-282 Demod Switch Card Parameter Setting
Step 1: Click WEB network management “Demod Switch Card” to log in the board
card page;
Step 3: click the “Remote Switch” option on the page and choose to turn “On” or “Off”
313 /503
remote control function. When "Off" is selected, the card switches according to the set
switching parameters. When "On" is selected, the card is controlled by the switching
controller, and the priority of the switching controller is higher than the card;
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
For the card switching or switching controller control switching described above,
the manual switch of the board needs to be adjusted to the "SW" file.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
n
io
one.
is
av
the main route.
Step 5: set the “Level Change” and “MultiFreq Monitor” according to the demand of
real application. The “level change” function is used to detect the level of each port, and
the “MultiFreq Monitor” function is used to monitor the code rate of each frequency point;
um
Step 7: set the “Float Threshold” on the page. When the equipment detects that the
difference between the real level and the reference level is greater than the threshold, it is
S
warning function.
Main Port” and the stream of port 1 will be output after equipment power-off.
314 /503
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
When the function of the card is reset, all parameters of the card and the port will
be recovered to the default value.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
n
io
is
av
um
Fig. 5-283 Demod Switch Card Monitor

S
value within the PID range. When the code rate within the PID range is beyond the PID
upper limit and the lower limit, it is believed that the frequency point is abnormal and the
switch shall be made. Similarly, if the system code rate of the frequency point is beyond
the upper and lower limits of the code rate, the frequency point will be considered to be in
315 /503
an abnormal state and the switch shall be made. The manual mode is not affected by such
switch. The stream received by the input port of the user shall be outputted.
n
1
4
io
is
av
5
Fig. 5-284 Demod Switch Card Port Demod Parameter Setting

um
Step 1: click the “Port 1” or the “Port 2” in the “Demod Switch Card” in the web
network management to log in the port page;
Step 2: click the “Demod Config” on the page to log in the port demodulation setting
page;
Step 3: set the “Demod Switch” as “On”;
Step 4: set the “Demod Switch” of channel as “On”, choose the “Standard” and
S
“Bandwidth”, and fill in the “Center Frequency” and “Symbol Rate” according to the input
source of the front-end device. Set the parameters of channels 1 to 8 according to this
method.
316 /503
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The “Reset Demod” function can reset the demodulation status of the port.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
6
7
n
8
io
9
is
av
10
um
Fig. 5-285 Demod Switch Card Port Monitor Parameter Setting
Step 6: click the “Monitor Config” on the page to log in the port monitor setting page;
Step 7: click the “Port Alarm” option on the page and choose to turn “On” or “Off”
warning function.
Step 8: set the “Trigger Delay” and “Resume Delay” for delay adjustment.
Step 9: set the “Rate Monitor” as “On”, fill in the “Minimal Bitrate”, “Maximal Bitrate”,
S
“Mini PID Bitrate”, “Max PID Bitrate”, “PID Low” and “PID High” on the page. When the
code rate within the PID range or the system cord rate of the frequency point is
out of the set scope, it is believed that the channel is abnormal and the switch shall be
made.
317 /503
source, the center frequency and other messages.
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-286 Demod Switch Card Port Monitor Result

um
5.3.50.2.3 Switching controller

Set the manual switch of the card to the "SW" position, and set the "Remote Control"
option as “On” according to the step 3 operation of 5.3.50.2.1Board card setting. Then, the
switching of the card can be controlled by the switching controller, when the I/O Ethernet
interface of the card is connected with the switching controller network port. Set the card
parameters as described in 5.3.50.2.1Board card setting, 5.3.50.2.2Main and backup route
setting. Switching controller has higher priority than card switching. For the switching
S
controller use method, refer to its instruction manual.
5.3.50.2.4 Manual switch setting

The manual switch on the card can be used for switching the input signals. It has the
highest priority. When switching to "1", the card will output the signal of “Port 1”. When
switching to "2", the card will output the signal of “Port 2”. When switching to "SW", the
card will automatically output the current stream according to the real backup condition or
318 /503
be controlled by the switching controller. For the backup method, refer to section
5.3.50.2.1Board card setting, 5.3.50.2.2Main and backup route setting and switching controller
instruction manual.
5.3.50.3 Parameter
Table 5-110 Demod Switch Card Parameter

Remote Switch On/Off Off
n
Assign Main/Assign Backup/Main First/
BackupMode Main First
One Way Switch/Floating
Level Change On/ Off Off
MultiFreq Monitor On/ Off Off
io
Standard Level
Manual/Auto Auto
Mode
Get Standard Level Sure/Cancel Cancel
Float Threshold
1.00~11.00 2.00
(dBuV)
Alarm On/ Off On
Reset Card
Shutdown Output
Mode is Sure/Cancel
Memory/Same As Main Port
Table 5-111 Demod Switch Card Port Demod Parameter

Cancel
Memory
av
Demod Switch Off/On On
Reset Demod Cancel/Sure Cancel
Demod Switch Off/On Off
Standard QAM-B/DVB-C DVB-C
Cener Frequency Channel one 554000
44000~1002000
(KHz) (Others increase 8KHz one by one)
Bandwidth 8MHz/ 6MHz 8MHz
Symbol Rate
3500~7000 6875
um
(Ksps)
Table 5-112 Demod Switch Card Port Monitor Parameter

Trigger Delay(ms) 0~255000 3000
Resume Delay(ms) 0~255000 3000
Port Alarm Off/On Off
Rate Monitor Off/On Off
PID Low 0~8191（0x0~0x1fff） 0
S
PID High 0~8191（0x0~0x1fff） 8190

Minimal Bitrate
0~200000000 0
(bsps)
Maximal Bitrate
0~200000000 55000000
(bsps)
Min PID Bitrate
0~200000000 0
(bsps)
Max PID Bitarate
0~200000000 30000000
(bsps)
319 /503
5.3.51 T2MI Replacer Card
5.3.51.1 Interface
The T2MI Replacer Card is used for providing the ASI input interface and three ASI
output interfaces for T2MI code stream of the main route and the backup route, as shown
in Fig. 5-287 T2MI Replacer Card.
n
io
Fig. 5-287 T2MI Replacer Card
5.3.51.2 Function
The T2MI Replacer Card is used for replacing the PLP level stream of T2MI OVER
TS. This card can directly output to the equipment of the latter level after replacing the
is
input of this card and can be cooperated and used with the input cards (as 5 Input Card,
Main GbE Card, the demodulation card and the like) and the output cards (as the 4 Output
Card and the Main GbE Card). The use and cooperation is convenient and flexible.
5.3.51.2.1 Routine setting of board card

av
This page can be used for setting the board card warning switch, searching timeout of
T2MI package and replacing relevant parameters, as shown in the figure below:
um
S
320 /503
1
5
3
2 4
n
io
is
Fig. 5-288 T2MI Replacer Card General Parameter Setting
av
Step 1: click the “Cards” option on the Web network management page.
Step 2: click the “Card n-T2MI Replacer Card”;
Step 3: click “General”;
Step 4: set the “Alarm” switch, the code rate switch of “Replacement Output Total
um
Bitrate”, the T2MI Packet Searching Overtime Time and Replaced Output Total Bitrate
Value;
Step 5: click the “Apply” to put the setting into effect;
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
Once the code rate of replacement output system and the code rate switch of
replacement output system are used together, the code rate setting can be valid
when the switch is turned on. In general, the switch is turned off. When the code
S
rate of the input source has a high fluctuation, the switch can be turned on and a
code rate is set for the replacement output system (such code rate shall be
greater than the valid code rate) to stabilize the code rate of the replacement
output system.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
321 /503

The T2MI Replacer Card is provided with two input interfaces. It can directly input
from this card to finish the main route PLP replacement and it can support the transparent
transmission input of other input cards.
Two input configuration methods are illustrated below:
I. Input of this card
n
When the input is made via this card, it can connect the main route T2MI code stream
for the replacement card ASI-IN1 of T2MI and connect the backup route T2MI code
stream for the replacement card ASI-IN2.
io
2
1
is 3
av
um
Fig. 5-289 T2MI Replacer Card Input Port Config
Step 1: click the “Input Port” of “T2MI Replacer Card” of WEB network management;
Step 2: click the “Config” on the right page;

S
Step 3: choose and setting the input parameter according to the use condition;
Step 4: click the “Apply” at the bottom of the page to put the setting into effect after
the setting;
322 /503
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
After setting the PID range, it can view the code rate of this PID range on the
monitoring interface. The PID setting (capturing T2MI packet) is used for
analyzing the inputted T2MI code stream by board card. It needs to set the PID
value based on the actual T2MI value (in theory, the T2MI can be loaded into
various PID, which is 0x1000 in general (default value)).
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
n
II. Inputs of other cards
When the inputs of other cards are used, the T2MI code streams of the main route
and the backup routes shall be transmitted to the input board card on the equipment (as
io
the 5 Input ASI Card and the like):
1
is 3
av
um
Fig. 5-290 T2MI Replacer Card Input Port Config
Step 1: click the “Input Port” of “T2MI Replacer Card” of WEB network management;
S
Step 2: click the “Config” on the right page;
Step 3: choose “Others” for “Input Mode”;
the setting;
323 /503
5 6
11
8 9 10
n
io
is
Fig. 5-291 T2MI Replacer Card Setting 2 via Transparent Transmission Input of Other Cards
Step 5: click IE browser to refresh the bottom (or press F5 on the keypad to refresh
the page)
Step 6: click “Output” of WEB network management;

av
Step 7: click “Card n-T2MI Replacer Card” on the left of the page;
Step 8: choose the output mode as the “Pass Through”;
Step 9: choose the transparent transmission input board card;
Step 10: choose the transparent transmission input port;

um
Step 11: click the “Apply” on the page to put the setting into effect after the setting;
5.3.51.2.3 PLP level stream replacement setting

When the input source is connected to the T2MI Replacer Card and the reception is
set, it can view the PLP information of the two input routes in the monitoring information of
two input ports. In this moment, it can log in the PLP replacement interface of the board
card to set the PLP replacement. The method is as follows:
S
324 /503
2
1
n
io
4
5
is
Fig. 5-292 T2MI Replacer Card PLP Replacement Setting
av
Step 1: click the “Card n-T2MI Replacer Card” on the web network management
board card list;
Step 2: click the “Replace” on the right page;
Step 3: click “Add” on the page;

um
Step 4: fill the PLP ID of the main and backup route to be replaced in the pop-up
page;
the setting;

The T2MI Replacer Card is provided with three ASI output interfaces. The card
supports the direct output of the replaced T2MI code stream and source code stream and
S
supports the transparent transmission and output from other output cards (as the 4 Output
ASI card and etc.).
Two output configuration methods are illustrated below:
I. Output of this card
The T2MI Replacer Card has three ASI output ports. The ASI-OUT1 is used for
325 /503
outputting the replaced T2MI code stream; the ASI-OUT2 is used for selectively outputting
the replacement stream or ASI-IN1 input stream; and the ASI-OUT3 is used for selectively
outputting the replacement stream or ASI-IN2 input stream.
n
io
is
av
Fig. 5-293 T2MI Replacer Card Output 1 Config (Replacement Stream)
um
S
326 /503
2
3
n
1
io
is
Fig. 5-294 T2MI Replacer Card Output 2/3 Config (replacement stream or input source)
av
Step 1: click the “Output Port 2” of T2MI Replacer Card on the web network
management board card list;
Step 2: click “Config” on the page;
Step 3: select “Replaced Stream” or “Input Port 1” according to the demanded

“Output Source”;
um
Step 4: click the “Apply” at the upper of the page to put the setting into effect after the
setting;
II. Output of other cards
The T2MI Replacer Card can provide support to transparently output the replaced
T2MI code stream from other output cards. The setting can be made according to the
following methods.
S
327 /503
n
3 4
io
is
Fig. 5-295 T2MI Replacer Card Output via Other Cards
av
Step 1: click the “Output” on the over the WEB network management of equipment;
Step 2: click the output card on the left of the page;
Step 3: set the output mode of the card output port to be “Pass Through”;
Step 4: choose “Card n- T2MI Replacer Card” on the input board card;
um
setting.
5.3.51.3 Parameter
Table 5-113 T2MI Replacer Card General Parameter

Alarm On/Off On
Replaced Output Total Bitrate On/Off Off
S
T2MI Packet Searching Overtime Time (s) 1~255 2

Replaced Output Total Bitrate Value(bps) 0~213000000 0
328 /503
Table 5-114 T2MI Replacer Card Input Parameter

Input Mode This Card/Others This Card
PID Range(Check The Appointed Rate) 0~8191 0(Min.); 8190(Max.)
Alarm On/Off On
PID(Catch T2MI Package) 0~8191 4096
Table 5-115 T2MI Replacer Card Output Parameter
n
Output Source Replaced Stream/Input Port 1, menu for output 2 Replaced Stream
Alarm On/Off On
io
5.3.52 T2MI De-encap. Card
5.3.52.1 Interface
The T2MI De-encap. Card can be used for de-multiplexing the T2-MI Over TS stream
is
to obtain several PLP audio and video TS streams contained in the T2-MI data packet and
further conduct the following audio and video treatment, as shown in Fig. 5-296 T2MI
De-encap. Card.
av
Fig. 5-296 T2MI De-encap. Card
5.3.52.2 Function
The T2MI De-encap. Card can be used for de-multiplexing the T2-MI Over TS stream
um
to obtain several PLP audio and video TS streams contained in the T2-MI data packet and
further conduct the following audio and video treatment. This T2MI De-encap. Card can
directly outputted to the equipment of the latter level after inputting the de-scrambling
output from this card and can be cooperated and used with the input cards (as 5 Input
Card, Main GbE Card, the demodulation card and the like) and the output cards (as the 4
Output Card and the Main GbE Card). The use and cooperation is convenient and flexible.

S
The T2MI De-encap. Card is provided with one input interface. It can directly input the
T2MI de-scrambling output from this card it can support the transparent transmission input
of other input cards.
Two input configuration methods are illustrated below:
I. Input of this card
329 /503
When the input is made via this card, it can connect the T2MI code stream requiring
the de-multiplexing treatment for the de-multiplexing card ASI-IN of T2MI.
2
4
n
3
1
io
is
av
Fig. 5-297 T2MI De-encap. Card General Parameter Setting
Step 1: click the T2MI De-encap. Card on the web network management board card
page;
Step 2: click the “General” on the right page;

um
Step 3: choose the “Source Select” to be “Local”;
setting;
S
330 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-298 T2MI De-encap. Card Input Monitor
av
Step 5: click the “Input Monitor” on the page to check the input message.
II. Inputs of other cards
When the inputs of other cards are used, it shall make the setting in such a way that
the T2MI code streams received by other input cards of equipment are transparently
um
transmitted to the T2MI De-encap. Card.

S
331 /503
2
4
3
1
n
io
is
Fig. 5-299 T2MI De-encap. Card General Parameter Setting
av
Step 1: click the “T2MI De-encap. Card” on the web network management board card
page;
Step 2: click the “General” on the right page;
Step 3: choose the “Source Select” to be “Other”;

um
setting;
S
332 /503
10
n
7 8 9
io
is
Fig. 5-300 T2MI De-encap. Card Setting via Transparent Transmission Input of Other Cards
av
Step 5: click “Output” of WEB network management;
Step 6: click “Card n-T2MI De-encap. Card” on the left of the page;
Step 7: choose the output mode as the “Pass Through”;
Step 8: choose the transparent transmission input board card;

um
Step 9: choose the transparent transmission input port;
Step 10: click the “Apply” at the upper of the page to put the setting into effect after
the setting;
S
333 /503
11
n
io
is
Fig. 5-301 T2MI De-encap. Card Input Monitor
av
Step 11: click the “Input Monitor” on the page to check the input message.
5.3.52.2.2 T2MI de-multiplexing setting

When the setting of receiving T2MI code stream via the T2MI De-encap. Card is
made, it can set the de-multiplex parameter. The setting method is as follows:
um
S
334 /503
1
4
n
io
5
is
Fig. 5-302 T2MI De-encap. Card T2MI PID Setting
av
Step 1: click the “Card n-T2MI De-encap. Card” on the web network management
board card list;
Step 2: click the “T2MI” on the right page;
Step 3: click “PID” on the page;

um
Step 4: fill T2MI “PID”;
the setting;
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The PID setting (T2MI PID) is used for analyzing the inputted T2MI code stream
by board card. It needs to set the PID value based on the actual T2MI value (in
theory, the T2MI can be loaded into various PID, which is 0x1000 in general
S
(default value 4096 in decimal system).

＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
335 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-303 T2MI De-encap. Card T2MI Monitor
av
Step 6: click “Monitor” on the page to check the PLP information of T2MI code
stream;
um
S
336 /503
7
11
8 9 10
n
io
is
Fig. 5-304 T2MI De-encap. Card T2MI PLP Setting
av
Step 7: click “PLP” on the page;
Step 8: set PLP_ID (default value is 0-15 and no change shall be made generally);
Step 9: set the channel switch (turned on in default);
Step 10: set the reference code rate and the reference switch (once the reference
um
switch is turned on, the code rate setting is valid);
the setting;
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
When the reference code rate and the reference switch are cooperated and used
together, the code rate setting is valid when the switch is turned on. In general,
the switch is turned off. When the code rate of the port has a high fluctuation, the
S
switch can be turned on and a reference code rate is set for the replacement
output system (such code rate shall be greater than the valid code rate) to
stabilize the code rate of the output system.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
337 /503
12
n
io
is
Fig. 5-305 T2MI De-encap. Card T2MI Output Monitor
av
Step 12: click “Output Monitor” on the page to check the TS stream information after
de-multiplexing T2MI.

The T2MI De-encap. Card is provided with four output interfaces, which can be used
for selecting and outputting the original T2MI code stream or de-scrambled TS code rate,
um
respectively. At the same time, the board card provides supports to multiplex the
de-scrambled TS stream to the output of other output cards or transparently output the
other output cards.
Two output configuration methods are illustrated below:
I. Output of this card
The T2MI De-encap. Card is provided with four output ports, all of which can be used
S
for selecting and outputting the original T2MI code stream or de-scrambled TS code rate.
The configuration method is illustrated by taking the output port 1 as the example.
338 /503
2
3
n
1
io
is
Fig. 5-306 T2MI De-encap. Card Output Port 1 Setting
av
Step 1: click the “Output Port 1” of “T2MI De-encap. Card” on the web network
management board card list;
Step 2: click “Config” on the page;
Step 3: choose output according to the demand “Stream Select”;

um
setting;
S
339 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 5-307 T2MI De-encap. Card Output Port Monitor
av
Step 5: click the “Monitor” on the page after the setting to check the code rate
outputted from the system and the effective code rate.
II. Output of other cards
The T2MI De-encap. Card provides supports to multiplex the de-scrambled TS code
um
stream to the output of other output cards or transparently output the TS code stream from
other output cards. For the program multiplex method, refer to section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing
Setting. The transparent output shall be set as per as the following method.
S
340 /503
2
3 4 5
n
io
is
Fig. 5-308 T2MI De-encap. Card Stream via Transparent Transmission Input of Other Cards
av
Step 1: click the “Output” on the over the WEB network management of equipment;
Step 2: click the output card on the left of the page;
Step 3: set the output mode of the card output port to be “Pass Though”;
Step 4: choose “Card n- T2MI De-encap. Card” on the input board card;
um
Step 5: select necessary port for input port (de-scrambled TS stream, the port is
1-16);
setting;
5.3.52.3 Parameter
Table 5-116 T2MI De-encap. Card General Parameter

S

Source Select Local/Other Local
Alarm On/Off Off
Search Time(s) 0~255 4
341 /503
Table 5-117 T2MI De-encap. Card T2MI Parameter

PID 0~8191 4096
PLP_ID 0~255 0~15
Switch On/Off On
Reference Bitrate 0~213000000 38000000
Reference On/Off Off
Table 5-118 T2MI De-encap. Card Output Port Parameter
n
Port1, for Output Port 1;
Port1;Port2;Port3;Port4;Port5;Port6;
Stream Port2, for Output Port 2;
Port7;Port8;Port9;Port10;Port11;Port12;
Select Port3, for Output Port 3;
io
Port13;Port14;Port15;Port16;Local; Other
Port4, for Output Port 4
5.3.53 Stream Processing Card
5.3.53.1 Interface
is
Stream Processing Card can delay processes 5 input streams simultaneously. The
delay time of each input stream can be respectively set. Stream Processing Card provides
an Ethernet interface for IP data transmission and upgrading. Stream Processing Card is
shown in Fig. 5-309 Stream Processing Card:
av
Fig. 5-309 Stream Processing Card
5.3.53.2 Function
um
Stream Processing Card can delay processes 5 input streams simultaneously. The
delay time of each input stream can be respectively set. The processed program may be
output by the Ethernet port on the card or made complex for the other output card in
refer to section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting.
S
342 /503
n
1
io
is
Fig. 5-310 Stream Processing Card System Configuration
av
Step 1: click the “Stream Processing Card” of WEB network management to log in the
Stream Processing Card System setting page;
Step 2: set the “IP Address”, “Subnet Mask” and “Gateway” according to the actual
situation, this Ethernet port is used for IP data transmission;
um

S
343 /503
4
2
n
3
io
is
Fig. 5-311 Stream Processing Card Delayer System Configuration
av
Step 1: click the “Delayer System” in the “Stream Processing Card” of Web network
management to log in the Delayer System setting page;
Step 2: choose the “System Switch” on the page to be “On” and select the “System
Mode” according to the demand of actual application. There are “Mux->Mux”, “Mux->IP”
and “IP->IP” to choose from;
um
In the “Mux->Mux” mode, the received program can be multiplexed to the Stream
Processing Card output port via the “Multiplexing” page. The program after being
processed can be refreshed at the input port of the card, then made complex for the other
output card in “Multiplexing” page of WEB network management
In the “Mux->IP” mode, the received program can be multiplexed to the Stream
Processing Card output port via the “Multiplexing” page. The program after being
processed can be output by the Ethernet port on the card to the destination IP address
S
and port set.
In the “IP->IP” mode, the Stream Processing Card delay processes the program
received by the Ethernet port on the card. The program after being processed can be
output by the Ethernet port on the card to the set destination IP address and port.
For the program multiplex method, refer to section 5.1.1.2Multiplexing Setting.
Step 3: set the “Heart Beat Interval” and “Heart Beat Port” according to the demand
344 /503
of actual application;
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The “Heart Beat Port” a port that belongs to the device control Ethernet port,
rather than the Ethernet port of the card.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
n
io
1
is
2 3 4
av
um
Fig. 5-312 Stream Processing Card Delayer Configuration
Step 1: click the “Delayer Config” in the “Stream Processing Card” of Web network
management to log in the Delayer Config setting page;
Step 2: choose the “Switch” on the page to be “On” and set the “Buffer” size and
“Delay” time according to the demand of actual application. The actual delay time is
determined by the “Buffer” size and “Delay” time. If the effective rate of processing
S
program is too large, the buffer cannot process the program in accordance with the time
set, then the actual delay time will be shorter than the set “Delay” time value. If the buffer
is large enough, the actual delay time will be the set “Delay” time value.
Step 3: set the “Receive IP Address” and “Receive UDP Port” according to the
demand of actual application, which are used for input stream receiving of the Ethernet
port on the card;
345 /503
Step 4: set the “Destination IP Address” and “Destination UDP Port” according to the
demand of actual application, which are used for output stream sending of the Ethernet
port on the card;
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
n
In “Mux->Mux” mode or “Mux->IP” mode, the total effective rate of all the five
delay outputs cannot exceeds 40Mbps.
In “IP->IP” mode, the total effective rate of all the five delay outputs cannot
io
exceeds 100Mbps.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The “Delayer Monitor” page can display the status and the input/output effective code
rate information of each way.
is
av
um
S
Fig. 5-313 Stream Processing Card Delayer Monitor
346 /503
5.3.53.3 Parameter
Table 5-119 Stream Processing Card Parameter

unicast IP not include
IP Address 192.165.52.76
127.XXX.XXX.XXX
System unicast IP not include
Gateway 127.XXX.XXX.XXX，must the same 192.165.52.1
n
MAC Address read only -
System
On/Off Off
Switch
io
System Mode Mux->Mux/Mux->IP/IP->IP Mux->Mux
Delayer Heart Beat
0~3600 10
System Interval(s)
Heart Beat
1~65535 9005
Port
System
Status
Buffer(MB)
Delay(s)
Switch
is read only
1G RAM：(Port1:0~1000,Other:0~200）
2G RAM：(Port1:0~400,Other:0~100）
0~3600
On/Off
Off
80
60
Off
av
Delayer Receive IP
- 192.165.52.76
Config Address
Receive UDP
1~65535 1234
Port
Destination IP
- 192.165.52.75
Address
Destination
1~65535 1234
UDP Port
um
Status read only Off

Delayer Input Bitrate read only 0bps
Monitor Output
read only 0bps
Bitrate
5.3.54 EPG Processing Card
5.3.54.1 Interface
S
The EPG Processing Card provides an Ethernet interface for EPG file uploading, as
shown in Fig. 5-314 EPG Processing Card.
Fig. 5-314 EPG Processing Card
347 /503
5.3.54.2 Function
EPG Processing card can be used for EPG multiplexing of the output program on
EMR platform. It supports up to 256 programs with EPG output. The card also supports
data transmission function, the specified data files can be output with the Appointed PID.
Data transmission function supports up to 16 data files sent.
5.3.54.2.1 System setting
n
Set the network parameters of the EPG file upload port according to the actual
situation, as shown in Fig. 5-315 EPG Processing Card System Configuration.
io
is
av
um
Fig. 5-315 EPG Processing Card System Configuration
After the network parameters are set, Login the device EPG FTP with FTP tool, the
FTP login user name and password are both 'target'. Upload EPG files and data files to
directory 'tffs0/epg_file'. For the FTP tool use method, refer to section Annex B-Device
Upgrade.
S
5.3.54.2.2 Program setting

EPG Processing card can realize the EPG multiplexing function by setting parameter.
The introduction to program parameter setting is as below:
348 /503
2
3
n
1
4
io
is 5
Fig. 5-316 EPG Processing Card Program adding Configuration
Step 1: click WEB network management “EPG Processing Card” to log in the board
av
card page;
Step 2: click the “Program” on the page to log in the setting page;
Step 3: click the “Add” on the page to pop up the EPG adding page;
Step 4: Set the “Switch” as “On” and choose the “Card”, “Port”, “Mode” and “Update”,
um
and fill in the “TS ID”, “Network ID” and “Service ID” according to the use condition. At last,
fill in the EPG “File Name” associated with program and set the send "interval". EPG
Processing card can realize the batch adding function in each port by setting “Add
Number” and “Service ID Step”;
S
349 /503
6 8
n
io
7
is
Fig. 5-317 EPG Processing Card Basic Configuration
Step 6: click the “Basic” on the page to log in the setting page;
av
Step 7: choose the “Card” and “Port”, and fill in the “TS ID”, “Network ID” and “Service
ID” according to the use condition;
um
S
350 /503
9
11
n
io
10 12
is
Fig. 5-318 EPG Processing Card Extend Configuration
Step 9: click the “Extend” on the page to log in the setting page;
av
Step 10: choose the “Mode”, “Switch”, “Update” and “File Name”, and fill in the
“Interval” according to the use condition;
um
Step 12: After parameter setting, the EPG status of program can be displayed in
Status bar on the page.
The corresponding parameters can be massive modified in the "Basic" and "Extend"
pages of the EPG Processing Card. For the method of massive modification, refer to
section 6.2Massive modification function.
5.3.54.2.3 Data setting

EPG Processing card can realize the data transmission function by setting parameter.
S
The introduction to program parameter setting is as below:
351 /503
n
1
4
io
5
is
Fig. 5-319 EPG Processing Card Data adding Configuration
Step 1: click WEB network management “EPG Processing Card” to log in the board
av
card page;
Step 2: click the “Program” on the page to log in the setting page;
Step 3: click the “Add” on the page to pop up the Data adding page;
Step 4: Set the “Switch” as “On” and choose the “Card” and “Port”, and fill in the “PID”
um
and “Bitrate” according to the use condition. At last, fill in the Data “File Name” associated
with program. EPG Processing card can realize the batch adding function in each port
by setting “Add Number”;
S
352 /503
n
6 8
io
is
Fig. 5-320 EPG Processing Card Data Configuration
Step 6: choose the “Card”, “Port”, “Switch” and “File Name”, and fill in the “PID” and
av
“Bitrate” according to the use condition;
Step 8: After parameter setting, the Data status can be displayed in Status bar on the
page.
um
The corresponding parameters can be massive modified in the "Data" page of the
EPG Processing Card. For the method of massive modification, refer to section 6.2Massive
modification function.
5.3.54.3 Parameter
Table 5-120 EPG Processing Card System Parameter

S
IP Address Unicast IP excluding 127.XXX.XXX.XXX 192.165.52.76

Subnet Mask Legal 255.255.255.0
Unicast IP and in the same subnet with
Gateway 192.165.52.1
IP Address
MAC Address Legal --
353 /503
Table 5-121 EPG Processing Card Program Parameter

according to the demand
Card Output Card No.(following hardware)
of real application
Port Output Port No. (following Output Card)
of real application
TS ID 0~65535
of real application
Network ID 1~65535
of real application
n
Service ID 1~65535
of real application
Service ID Step 0~65534
of real application
io
Mode Actual/Other Actual
Switch On/Off On
Update Manual/Everyday/EveryFriday Manual
Filename Enter or select from file list of “FTP file” NULL
Status WORK-WELL/FILE-NULL/OUT-TIME --
Parameter
Card
Port
is
Table 5-122 EPG Processing Card Data Parameter
Range
Output Card No.(following hardware)

Output Port No. (following Output
Default
of real application
av
Card) of real application
PID 0~0x1fff
of real application
Switch On/Off On
Bitrate(bps) 0~213000000 0
Filename Enter or select from file list of “FTP file” NULL
Status WORK-WELL/FILE-NULL/OUT-TIME --
um
S
354 /503
Chapter 6 Introduction for Senior Function

Some functions listed in this section are available by purchasing corresponding
authorization.
6.1 Table editing function
n
This function can realize the addition, deletion and edition for PSI/SI table of the
appointed port. The examples of NIT, CAT and SDT are illustrated below.
io
6.1.1 NIT table edition
is 2
av
3
um
Fig. 6-1 Log-in of PSI/SI Edition Interface
Step 1: click the “Multiplexing” on the WEB network management page to log in the
S
Step 2: right click the output port to be edited;
Step 3: select the “PSI/SI Edit” on the pop-up menu to log in the table edition
interface;
355 /503
n
io
4
is
Fig. 6-2 PSI/SI Edition Interface
av
Step 4: click in the NIT table operation bar to log in the edition interface of NIT
table;
um
S
356 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 6-3 NIT Table Edition Interface (modification of Table Info)
av
Step 5: right click the “Modify” below the “Table Info” node to pop up the modification
box.
um
S
357 /503
n
6
io
is
Fig. 6-4 NIT Table Info Edition Interface
av
Step 6: modify information of corresponding table, click “OK” and save the
modification;
um
S
358 /503
n
7
io
is
Fig. 6-5 NIT Table Edition Interface (Addition of NIT Description)
av
Step 7: right click the “NIT Description” node and choose corresponding descriptor
below “Add” to pop up the modification box of this descriptor.
um
S
359 /503
n
8
io
is
Fig. 6-6 NIT Table Descriptor Addition Interface
av
Step 8: modify corresponding descriptor information and click “OK” to save the added
descriptor;
um
S
360 /503
n
9
io
is
Fig. 6-7 NIT Table Edition Interface (Stream Description)
av
Step 9: right click “Add Stream” in the “Stream Description” node to pop up the
modification box for stream addition;
um
S
361 /503
n
10
io
is
Fig. 6-8 NIT Table Stream Addition Interface
av
Step 10: fill in corresponding stream information and click “OK” to save the stream
information added;
um
S
362 /503
11
n
io
is
Fig. 6-9 NIT Table Edition Interface
av
Step 11: after finishing the steps 5 to 10 and click “Apply” to save the aforesaid
modification and addition operation.
um
S
363 /503
n
12
io
is
Fig. 6-10 Validity of NIT Table Edition (Multiplex Interface)
av
Step 12: return to the “Multiplexing” interface and click “Apply” to put the NIT table
edition operation into effect.
6.1.1.1 Associate other frequency points by the main frequency point
The association of other frequency points by the main frequency point is the common
um
operation of NIT table edition. The introduction is hereby specially given.

S
364 /503
n
io
1
is
av
Step 1: click in the NIT table operation bar of main frequency point to log in the
edition interface of main frequency point NIT table;
um
S
365 /503
n
2
io
is
Fig. 6-12 NIT Table Edition Interface (Stream Description)
av
Step 2: right click “Add Stream” in the “Stream Description” node to pop up the
modification box for stream addition;
um
S
366 /503
n
io
3
is
Fig. 6-13 NIT Table Stream Addition Interface
av
Step 3: fill in corresponding stream information to be associated and click “OK” to
save the stream information added;
um
S
367 /503
n
4
io
is
Fig. 6-14 NIT Table Stream Addition Descriptor Interface
av
Step 4: right click the added “Stream” node and select corresponding descriptor to be
added according to the real application environment. The demonstration is given by taking
the “Cable Delivery System Descriptor” as the example.
um
S
368 /503
n
5
io
is
Fig. 6-15 Interface for Adding Cable Delivery System Descriptor in NIT Table
av
Step 5: select or fill in the “Frequency”, “FEC_outer”, “Modulation”, “Symbol Rate”
and “FEC_Inner” of the frequency point to be associated according to the real application
environment. Click “OK” to finish the addition;
um
S
369 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 6-16 NIT Table Edition Interface
av
Step 6: click “Apply” to store the aforesaid modification and addition operation;
um
12
S
370 /503
Fig. 6-17 Validity of NIT Table Edition (Multiplex Interface)
Step 7: return to the “Multiplexing” interface and click “Apply” to put the associated
operation into effect.
If it needs to associate other frequency points, repeat the aforesaid steps to realize
the addition.
6.1.2 CAT table edition
n
1
io
2
is 3
av
um
S
interface;
371 /503
n
io
4
is
av
Step 4: click in the CAT table operation bar to log in the edition interface of CAT
table;
um
S
372 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 6-20 CAT Table Edition Interface (modification of Table Info)
av
box.
um
S
373 /503
n
6
io
is
Fig. 6-21 CAT Table Info Edition Interface
av
modification;
um
S
374 /503
n
7
io
is
Fig. 6-22 CAT Table Edition Interface (Addition of CAT Description)
av
Step 7: right click the “CAT Description” node and choose corresponding descriptor
below “Add” to pop up the modification box of this descriptor.
um
S
375 /503
n
8
io
is
Fig. 6-23 CAT Table Descriptor Addition Interface
av
descriptor;
um
S
376 /503
n
9
io
is
Fig. 6-24 CAT Table Edition Interface (CA_Descriptor Modify)
av
Step 9: right click “CA_Descriptor” node and “Modify” or “Delete” corresponding
descriptor .Select the “Modify” to pop up the modification box for table edition;
um
S
377 /503
10
n
io
is
Fig. 6-25 CAT Table Edition Interface
av
Step 10: edit the corresponding stream information and click “OK” to save the stream
information;
um
S
378 /503
11
n
io
is
Fig. 6-26 CAT Table Edition Interface
av
um
S
379 /503
n
12
io
is
Fig. 6-27 Validity of CAT Table Edition (Multiplex Interface)
av
Step 12: return to the “Multiplexing” interface and click “Apply” to put the CAT table
um
S
380 /503
6.1.3 SDT table edition
n
3
io
is
av

um
interface;
S
381 /503
n
io
4
is
av
Step 4: click in the SDT table operation bar to log in the edition interface of SDT
table;
um
S
382 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 6-30 SDT Table Edition Interface (modification of Table Info)
av
box.
um
S
383 /503
n
6
io
is
Fig. 6-31 SDT Table Info Edition Interface
av
modification;
um
S
384 /503
n
7
io
is
Fig. 6-32 SDT Table Edition Interface (Addition of Service Description)
av
Step 7: right click the “Service Description” node and choose corresponding
descriptor below “Add” to pop up the modification box of this descriptor.
um
S
385 /503
n
8
io
is
Fig. 6-33 SDT Table Descriptor Addition Interface
av
descriptor;
um
S
386 /503
n
9
io
is
Fig. 6-34 SDT Table Edition Interface (CA_Descriptor Modify)
av
Step 9: right click “Service Descriptor” node and choose corresponding descriptor
below “Modify” to pop up the modification box for table edition;
um
S
387 /503
10
n
io
is
Fig. 6-35 SDT Service Infomation Edition Interface
av
Step 10: edit the corresponding stream information and click “OK” to save the stream
information;
um
S
388 /503
11
n
io
is
Fig. 6-36 SDT Table Edition Interface
av
um
S
389 /503
n
12
io
is
Fig. 6-37 Validity of SDT Table Edition (Multiplex Interface)
av
Step 12: return to the “Multiplexing” interface and click “Apply” to put the SDT table
6.2 Massive modification function

Some board cards are provided with the massive modification function. It can modify
um
several parameters groups at the same time. The illustration is made to the massive
modification method by taking the receiving setting of the Main GbE Card.
S
390 /503
2 6
n
4
io
5
is
Fig. 6-38 Massive modification setting for Web network management
av
Step 1: click the check box on the left of the WEB network management page and
check the port desired to have the massive modification action;
Step 2: click the “Modify” on the page to pop up the massive modification page;
Step 3: click the check box popped up on the right of the massive modification page
and check the parameter to have the massive modification action;
um
Step 4: modify the parameter modified in batches according to the real demand;
Step 5: click the “Apply” button below the massive modification page to finish
corresponding parameter modification;
Step 6: click the “Apply” on the page to put the parameter setting modified in batch
into effect.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
S
When there are too many ports (e.g. 256 ports) and the IP address or port
number of all ports are modified by IE browser, IE may alarm of no response. Please
wait a moment before any operation.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
391 /503
6.3 Output Settings

For the port mapping function of transparent transmission function, the output port
can directly output the input stream of corresponding port after adding corresponding
transparent transmission relationship and no modification is made to the input stream, as
shown in Fig. 6-39 Output Setting Interface for Web Network management.
n
6
3 4 5
io
2
is
av
um
Fig. 6-39 Output Setting Interface for Web Network management
Step 1: click the “Output” in the network management interface to log in the output
setting interface;
Step 2: click the board card to be set on the left output table to log in the board card
transmission setting interface;
Step 3: Set the “Output Mode” of corresponding output port as “Pass-Through”;

Step 4: Select the board card where the output source to be passed through is
S
located;
Step 5: Select the port corresponding to the input source to be passed through;
Step 6: Click “Apply” button to make the pass-through relationship valid.
392 /503
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
Some cards do not support the output rate control. These cards are displayed in
gray and unavailable for setting.
If the multiplexing relationship has been set for the input port or the output port,
the transparent transmission operation cannot be made. It must remove the multiplex
relationship of corresponding port and conduct the transparent transmission
operation.
n
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
6.4 Backup settings
io
EMR is the core access device in the front end of digital TV and the backup settings
support both Service backup and port backup. Steps of settings of the Service backup and
port backup are instructed below.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The backup function is available only after purchasing corresponding
cannot be made. is
authorization. Otherwise, the backup interface is unavailable and the backup setting
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
av
6.4.1 Service Backup
Function description: the two programs in the back board, satisfying certain
conditions, can be used for realizing the 1+1 program backup switch.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The programs involved in the backup of the output port cannot share PCR with
um
other programs.
The main program stream and backup program stream must have the consistent
structure, including the combination mode of video, audio, PCR and ECM.
The programs sharing one video or audio cannot be involved in the backup.
The backup program can be used as the backup of one program on one output
port rather than the backup of several programs. For example, if six programs are
available on one port, the backup shall be made for on program rather than 6
S
programs.
The 1+1 program backup is available for 256 groups at most.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
393 /503
Steps of settings are:
n
3
io
is
av
Fig. 6-40 Service Backup
Step 1: Click “Multiplexing” to navigate to the programme multiplexing page;
Step 2: Click the right button to choose the programme to be backed up from the list
of output programme and choose “Service Backup”;
Step 3: Choose “Service Backup” from the popped up options to navigate to the page
of service backup;
um
S
394 /503
n
5
io
is 6
Fig. 6-41 Service Backup

av
Step 4: Choose “On” of the “Backup” Switch;
Step 5: Choose the card and port for the service backup, fill in the “Service ID” and
set the “Lower Limit Bitrate” and “Upper Limit Bitrate” of the master and backup channel of
programme;
Once the master channel of programme becomes abnormal and the valid bit rate of
um
the programme is beyond the set maximum or minimum bit rate of the programme, the
device will automatically switch to the multiplexing output of the backup channel of
programme to guarantee the normal output.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
When setting the backup relationship, it may set the main and backup switch
delay for the backup and the backup main switch delay to realize corresponding
switch requirements. The two parameters are within 0-65,535 in seconds.
S
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
395 /503
6.4.2 Port Backup
Functional description: the 1+1 port backup switch can be made for the any two ports
in the back board.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
It is required that the main port and the back port shall have identical contents.
n
The 1+1 port backup is available for 256 groups at most.
When one port is used as the backup port, such port cannot be used for
multiplexing and transparent transmission.
io
The main port and the backup port must support the identical transparent
transmission types that both of the two support the transparent transmission or not.
However, some ports do not support the transparent transmission. Such ports cannot
support the transparent transmission and support the backup of multiplexed port at
is
the same time, but can be used as the backup of the ports with same attributes.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
Steps of settings are:
av
1
2
um
4
S
Fig. 6-42 Port Backup

Step 1: Click “Port Backup” in the pull-down menu of “Backup” to navigate to the port
backup settings page;
396 /503
Step 2: Click “Add” to pop up the port backup adding page;

Step 3: Choose the card and port for the port backup, set the maximum and minimum
switching bit rate of the master and backup channel of programme, choose “Main Priority”
of the delay backup mode, and set the delay of the switching between master and backup
channel as 1s;
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
n
The port involved in the programme multiplexing may not be set as the port of
backup channel. Once set as the port of backup channel, the programme of the
port may no longer be used in the multiplexing output.
io
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
After setting the port multiplexing, click “Programme Multiplexing” in the “Multiplexing
Settings” to return to the programme multiplexing page, and the port of backup channel
will be marked.
is
av
um
S
Fig. 6-43 Port Backup

Once the port of master channel becomes abnormal and the valid bit rate of the port
is beyond the set maximum or minimum bit rate, the device will automatically switch to the
multiplexing output of the port of backup channel to guarantee the normal output.
397 /503
6.5 Scrambling settings

It introduces the scrambling settings of EMR.
EMR scrambling is set by the scrambling network interface marked with CA on the
front panel of the device. IP of the scrambling network interface may be checked in
“Others” in “System Parameter” of WEB network management of EMR.
6.5.1 Introduction to WEB Scrambling
n
Connect the scrambling network interface by the computer via the exchanger, fill in
the IE address of the scrambling network interface in the address field of the IE browser,
io
and click “Enter” to navigate to the scrambling configuration management of EMR.
Click “English” in the page to input the username and password in the popped up box
(default username: Admin; default password: sumavisionrd) to navigate to the scrambling
configuration web page, which consists of pages of “System”, “Program Scramble”, “Port
Set”, “CAS Sett”, “EMM Set” and “Logout”.
is
av
um
Fig. 6-44 Scramble Module Interface

The “General” menu includes 7 menus as follow: Network, Alarm, Log, License,
Version, Misc, and Permission.
 Network: set Scramble Module IP address, gateway address, subnet mask and
S
other network functions. Click “Apply” to complete the setting, as shown in Fig.
6-45 Scramble Module Network Configuration.
398 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 6-45 Scramble Module Network Configuration
av
 Alarm: this page is used for inquiring warning information of Scramble Module.
Click “Refresh” to inquire, as shown in Fig. 6-46 Scramble Module Alarm .
um
S
399 /503
Fig. 6-46 Scramble Module Alarm Page

 Log: this page is used for inquiring warning information of Scramble Module. It can
sieve and display the log according to the condition. Click “Refresh” to inquire, as
shown in Fig. 6-47 Scramble Module Log page.
n
io
is
av
Fig. 6-47 Scramble Module Log page
 License: this page is used for inquiring the Scramble Module authorization status
and setting the authorization code to change license status, Click “Apply” to
um
complete the setting, as shown in Fig. 6-48 Scramble Module License Configuration.
S
400 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 6-48 Scramble Module License Configuration
av
 Version: click “Version” in “General” List to navigate to the page to inquire the
version information of Scramble Module. Click “Refresh” to inquire, as shown in
Fig. 6-49 Scramble Module Version Information.
um
S
401 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 6-49 Scramble Module Version Information
av
 Misc: this page is used for setting PID format, AC mode and CW mode. Click
“Apply” to complete the setting, as shown in Fig. 6-50 Scramble Module Misc
Configuration.
um
S
402 /503
n
io

is
Fig. 6-50 Scramble Module Misc Configuration
Permission: add or delete three kinds of users, including “Administrator”, “Power
av
user” and “User”, as shown in Fig. 6-51 Scramble Module Permission Configuration.
um
S
Fig. 6-51 Scramble Module Permission Configuration

403 /503
“CAS Group” mainly sets parameters of the communication with CAS server,
including CA version number, key cycle, EIS settings, CAS communication parameters,
and IP and port of ECMG. It supports up to 16 simulcrypt.
CAS Version: CA version number, provided by CA
CW Period: conversion circle of secrete key;
EIS: EIS function switch;
n
EIS Port: TCP port number for EIS communication;
CAS-ID: CAS number, provided by CA;
io
SUB CAS ID: Sub-CAS number, provided by CA;
ECM Channel ID: ECM channel ID, provided by CA;
Main and Backup ECMG IP: IP address of ECM generator, provided by CA
Main and Backup ECMG Port: TCP port of ECM generator, provided by CA
is
av
um
S
Fig. 6-52 Scramble Module CAS Group Configuration

“CAS Status” can check the working status of each CAS group.
404 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 6-53 Scramble Module CAS Status Page
av
“EMM Config” mainly sets parameters of EMMG, including EMM switch, CAS ID and
SUB CAS ID, EMM Mode, communication port, EMM Bitrate, CAS version, etc.
CAS ID: CAS number, provided by CA;
SUB CAS ID: Sub-CAS number, provided by CA;
EMM Mode: EMM network communication mode, TCP or TCP+UDP;

um
TCP Port: EMM TCP network communication port;
UDP Port: EMM UDP network communication port;
EMM Bitrate: code rate of EMM data

CAS Version: CA version number, provided by CA
ECM Private Description: the private description for ECM is listed in PMT table.
S
405 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 6-54 Scramble Module EMM Configuration
av
“EMM Monitor” can check the communication status of each EMM group.
um
S
Fig. 6-55 Scramble Module EMM Monitor Page
406 /503
“Scramble” configuration include port para configuration and program scrambling.

click the card of Gbe of the Main GbE Card in the “Scramble” of Scramble Module to log in
the port setting page. “Basic” configuration mainly sets parameters of the CAS grouping,
EMM PID settings and EMMG.
CAS: choose corresponding group number;
EMM: EMM refers to the entitlement management message. This option is used for
setting PID of EMM and EMM used by port.
n
io
is
av
um
Fig. 6-56 Scramble Module Port Basic Configuration

“Key” configuration is used to modify the “Key Mode” and to fill in the “Fixed Key”
value.
Key Mode: choose to output the secrete key at random or use the fixed value;
Fixed Key: fixed value of secrete key

S
407 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 6-57 Scramble Module Port Key Configuration
av
Program scrambling is mainly used to scramble the program of the output port, sets
the parameters of SCGID, ECMPID, Access Criteria Data, etc.
SCG ID: ID value of SCG (scrambling control group)
CAS ID: ID value of CAS (conditional access system);
ECM PID: PID value of ECM (Entitlement Control Message);

um
Access Criteria Data: AC data, produced by CAS server;
ECM Private Data: the private description for ECM is listed in PMT table.
S
408 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 6-58 Scramble Module Program Scramble Configuration
av
6.5.2 Programme scrambling settings
Operation procedures are:

Step 1: Right click on the input port or the card in the “Scramble” page, then click the
“Search” button popped up to refresh the input list of the input port or the card. Also, right
um
click on the “Device” in the “Scramble” page, then click the “Search All” button popped up
to refresh the input list of each input port.
S
409 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 6-59 Scramble Module programme searching
Step 2: Set CAS parameters, which are provided by CAS server, in “CAS Group”
av
according to the actual situation, then click “Apply” to validate the parameter;
2
um
S
Fig. 6-60 Scramble Module CAS Configuration
410 /503
Step 3: Set EMMG parameters, which are provided by CAS server, in the EMM
Config page, then click “Apply” to validate the parameter;
n
io
is
av
Fig. 6-61 Scramble Module EMM Configuration
Step 4: Set the CAS group, EMMPID and the corresponding EMMG of each port in
the scramble port Basic configuration, then click “Apply” to validate the parameter;
um
S
411 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 6-62 Scramble Module Port Basic Configuration
Step 5: Set the Key Mode and the Fixed Key of each port in the scramble port Key
av
configuration, then click “Apply” to validate the parameter;
um
S
Fig. 6-63 Scramble Module Port Key Configuration
412 /503
Step 6: Return to the “Program Scramble” page and navigate to the corresponding
port to set the scrambling parameter of the programme under this port, set the PID of ECM
and set the AC parameter according to the requirement of CAS, then click “Apply” to
enable the scrambling module to scramble all programmes.
n
io
is
av
Fig. 6-64 Scramble Module Program Scramble Configuration
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
Please strictly follow sequences listed above;
um
It must click the “Apply” button in the “Program Scramble” page after modifying
the program scrambling information, changing the program planning or
searching the program again to realize the normal scrambling work of programs
on this port.
A limitation is made to avoid deleting of ECM and EMM produced by the
scrambling board. It is not allowed to delete the ECM and EMM produced by the
scrambling board.
S
As the EMM multiplex, the deletion of EMM multiplex is decided according to the
value of CASID and CAPID. If the CASID and CAPID values of two EMMs under
the same output port are the same, the multiplex of any EMM will cause the
automatic multiplex of the other one. The deletion of any EMM will cause the
deletion of the other one.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
413 /503
Chapter 7 Fault Analysis and

Troubleshooting
7.1 Alarm Information
When EMR runs abnormally, the alarm indicator on the front panel of the device will
n
light, and the Web network management will provide a variety of abnormality alarm to
prompt the users to facilitate the investigation and solve the problems. Users can search
the WEB network management alarm on the device and parameters of the menu to make
io
a preliminary judgment on the reasons causing EMR alarm and take appropriate
measures. If users fail to solve the problem of EMR abnormity by themselves, they can
call the After-sales Technical Support Department of Sumavision.
The EMR alarm information is shown as Table 7-1 Troubleshooting of EMR Common
Faults or Abnormity
LCD does not display or

working indicator is not
on after powering on
is
Table 7-1 Troubleshooting of EMR Common Faults or Abnormity
Fault
connected;
Reason
The power lead is poorly
The fuse on the power

Solution
Replace the power lead.
Replace the fuse.

av
socket is broken.
Check the line for input
ASI 5-channel input card
signal.
fails to refresh any input No input signal is available.
Check the input signal
signals.
sources.
The output program stream
Check the multiplexing
ASI 4-channel output card decoding turns out no video
program sources.
fails to output the & audio frequency
um
decoding normally The output program stream Check the output system bit
decoding turns out mosaic. rate.
QAM output level is too Lower the level or increase
The QAM modulation card
high. the number of attenuators.
output can”t be received
Wrong parameters of the Set parameters matching
by STB
STB are set. with QAM again.
Check the network settings
Network interface is
Network interface of Main and network cable
unconnected with the
GbE Card is unconnected connection of the Main GbE
module or cable
Card.
Check head-end program
The Main GbE Card inputs The input program stream is
S
sources and network cable

no system bit rate interrupted.
connection.
The destination IP of the Check the network settings
The connection with the
Main GbE Card is of destination device and
sending device is broken.
unreachable. network cable connection.
Check whether the
The Main GbE Card The input program stream is
multiplexing program
outputs no valid bit rate. interrupted.
sources are normal.
414 /503
7.1.1 LCD does not display after powering on
Reasons for such fault:

 The LCD module of the device is broken;
 The power lead is poorly contacted;
 The fuse on the power socket is broken.
Solution:
n
EMR can be allowed to leave the factory only if the test ensures that all function
indicators meet the requirements. Therefore it is almost unlikely that the LCD module of
the device is broken, thus this cause can be excluded; check the power lead of the device
io
to confirm whether there’s any damage to the surface of the power lead, check the quality
of power socket to confirm whether the supply voltage is normal.
In case of fault in the power lead, suggest replacing the power lead to ensure smooth
signal transmission inside the power lead;
If the problem is unsolved at still, please contact the after-service technique
is
department of Beijing Sumavision Technologies Co. Ltd.
av
um
S
415 /503
Chapter 8 Maintenance
8.1 Maintenance method

To make the EMR operate under the best operating status, extend the service life of
device, discover and eliminate the potential problems in time, and ensure normal
n
operation of the device, the routine maintenance must be carried out regularly.
The EMR should be maintained according to the following rules.
 Must prepare for the detailed device maintenance target plan.
io
The EMR should be checked and maintained every day. If not, some small failures
will develop into worse, so proper daily inspection, monthly inspection, quarterly
inspection and annual inspection plans should be developed according to the
operation features of the device, including the maintenance and inspection class in
every period (class I maintenance, class II maintenance and class III maintenance)
is
and detailed maintenance contents.
 Appoint the maintenance person.
It is the key for the device maintenance. The combination mode of “one person
inspection and several persons” inspection” is recommended for EMR maintenance.
av
 Establish the device maintenance archive.
The individual maintenance archive should be kept since the EMR is purchased till it
is abandoned. The maintenance and repair should be recorded in details. The
replaced and changed parts and wire should be marked on the circuit diagram and
device maintenance archive, so the diagram is consistent with the actual device.
um
Meanwhile, it can facilitate others to maintain and repair the device.
8.2 Maintenance details

The following details should be paid attention to in the routine maintenance of EMR
device.
 The transmission device is of great importance, and should have trained person
for the routine maintenance.
 Keep the site room clean, dustproof and damp-proof.
S
 Follow the “Device Maintenance Target Plan” for routine inspection and test of
the device, and record the checking results.
 Wipe the dustproof mesh of the fan every week. If the surface temperature of the
device is too high, check whether the dustproof mesh of the fan is blocked.
 The device is inspected according to the specifications & instruction manual of
Sumavision Technologies Co., Ltd. The man-made accident should be prevented.
 Wear the anti-static bangle when operating the device hardware.
416 /503
 The connection between other devices in the cabinet and EMR should not be
plugged-in or unplugged freely; to plug-in or unplug the connection, you’re required to
mark the original location for plugging.
 If EMR can be controlled in the control center by using the network management
software, the network management password of EMR should be strictly managed and
regularly changed, which is only distributed to the responsible maintenance person.
The administrator password can only be known by the responsible maintenance
n
person.
 Installing other software in the computer for network management system
transmission and playing games with such computer are strictly prohibited; the
io
computer with network management system should be installed the real-time virus
detection software for regular virus killing.
 The computer with network management system uses UPS for power supply and
regular data backup will be conducted.
 Don’t reset the device easily and change the service data.

is
For any alarm with unidentified reasons, please contact the After-sales Technical
Support Department of Sumavision Technologies Co., Ltd.
8.3 Routine maintenance

av
Refer to Table 8-1 Routine maintenance.
Table 8-1 Routine maintenance
Reference
Maintenance Maintenance Operation maintenance
Reference standard
type contents guide hour
(man×hour)
Check the
um
power
Power supply The voltage output is
monitoring
of site room normal. The power gives
system or test
(DC/AC) no exception alarm.
the power
Inspect output voltage
external Temperature range: 0.05
environment Temperature Measure
5-40℃; 15℃-30℃ is
of site room temperature
recommended
Measure Relative humidity:

Humidity of 20%-80%; 40%-65% is
relative
site room
S
humidity recommended。
Inspect the Only power indicator is
Indicator Observe the
device on under normal
status on the indicator of the 0.1
operation operation. The operation
device panel device panel.
status indication keeps on.
Inspect the Service tel.
Addressing call and
device status (2-3 Test the
conference call support 0.1
operation times every calling.
normal communications.
status month)
417 /503
8.4 Monthly maintenance

Refer to Table 8-2 Monthly maintenance.
Table 8-2 Monthly maintenance
Reference
Maintenance Maintenance Operation Reference
maintenance hour
type contents guide standard
(man×hour)
Check Keep clean around
Cabinet cooling Check the state
external the cooling holes, 0.1
n
hole state of cooling holes.
environment without any mess.
8.5 Quarterly Maintenance
Refer to Table 8-3 Quarterly maintenance.
io
Table 8-3 Quarterly maintenance
Reference
Maintenance Maintenance Operation
Reference standard maintenance hour
type contents guide
(man×hour)
The cabinet surface is
Observe the
Inspect the
cabinet
cleanness
Inspect the
device
Inspect the
cabinet
cleanness
Inspect the
device
is
inside and
outside the
cabinet.
Observe
device
clean. There is no much
dust inside the cabinet.
Otherwise, the cabinet
should be cleaned
There no much dust outside
the device. Otherwise, it
should be cleaned. Watch
0.5
0.5
av
cleanness cleanness surface out the external wiring of the
device in cleaning.
8.6 Annual Maintenance
Refer to Table 8-4 Annual maintenance.
Table 8-4 Annual maintenance
Reference
um
Maintenance Maintenance maintenance

Operation guide Reference standard
type contents hour
(man×hour)
Check the Use the earth The joint grounding
earth resistance tester for resistance is less than 1 1
resistance testing. ohm.
Inspect whether the (1) The connection is
ground cable is secure and reliable.
Inspect Check the
reliably and (2) No wire aging exists.
grounding, ground cable 0.2
securely connected (3) No erosion exists on
ground connection.
S
to the ground cable the ground cable group,

cable and
group of the office. with proper anti-corrosion.
power lead
connection Inspect whether the
power lead is (1)The connection is
Inspect the
reliably and secure and reliable.
power lead 0.2
securely connected (2)No wire erosion and
connection
to the power lead of aging exist.
the office.
418 /503
8.7 Clean-up and maintenance

Pay attention to the following contents for the clean-up and maintenance of the device.
 Clean the working site; wipe the device shell with a soft cloth. The water cannot
be penetrated into the device.
 Do not plug in and out all connection cables with current without instructions.
 Check whether the cable is pressed or pulled by the heavy object, whether the
plug and socket are connected tightly, ensure that the cable is not extruded by the
n
external force and is placed in order. The connection part is under good contact.
 Check whether the device and cable label are missing and incorrect. Keep the
label intact and correct.
io
 Check whether the engineering document is complete and correct. Keep the
engineering document complete for check at any time.
8.8 Operation and maintenance

Pay attention to the following contents for the maintenance when the device is operating.

is
Check whether the ground cable and power supply are normal. Ensure the
power supply works properly before turning on the power.
 Sequence for starting the device: start the power supply of peripheral devices,
and power on the cabinet, and ensure the device for signal input works normally
av
before starting EMR.
 Sequence for device shutdown: contrary to the sequence for starting the device.
Power off the EMR, and then other devices.
 Observe the indicators on front panel of EMR and observe the system running in
the studio and the control room. In case of any abnormity, the maintenance
um
instructions in this chapter can be referred for solution as soon as possible.

 Before the system is used, power on and inspect the system, adjust the
peripheral device, and guarantee that the EMR functions are normal.
 The local configuration can’t be changed without instructions. The configuration
can only be changed by the professional operator.
 Do not place the EMR in highly noisy environment.
S
419 /503
Chapter 9 Storage and Transport

9.1 Storage
Requirement:
Humidity: ≤95% (20℃) ；
Temperature: -20℃～60℃
n
Don’t store with corrosive liquids and gases.
Don’t place the device nearby strong electromagnetic fields.
Prohibit infection by radioactive substances.
io
9.2 Transport
EMR is packaged by using the special packaging of Sumavision. In case of intact
packaging, such transportation modes like highway, railway, airline and shipping are
acceptable. In case of damaged packaging, the device should be transported after being
is
packaged by professional electronic product transportation companies.
During the transportation, the device should be handled gently to avoid throwing,
falling or severe collision, and kept the labeling on the package upward.
av
um
S
420 /503
Annex A- Interface Parameter

Annex 1 Parameters of input/output ASI interface
Normal Its appearances
75Ω
impedance
can be shown as
Frequency range 0-2GHz
the figure below:
Electrical Voltage rating 500 VRMS (Sea-level Max.)
n
characteristics Dielectric
withstand 1500 VRMS (Sea-level Min.)
voltage
VSWR 1.5 (Max)
io
Material Main part and
Nickel plating
characteristics metal fittings
Insertion force Max. acrotorque 2.5 lbs
Maximum axial tensile force
Pullout force
3 lbs
Mechanical
Nut pulling force Min. 100 lbs
characteristics
Durability is
Centric pin thrust Min. 6 lbs
More than
drawing
500 times
Annex 2 Ethernet interface connector parameters
Maximum current 2 amps

av
Insulation resistance 5000 megohms Its appearances
Signal pin DC can be shown as
Electrical 30 milli-ohms @100 mA
resistance
characteristics Metal shell shielding the figure below:
Min. 20dB (20-200MHz)
force
Applicable ambient
-50～+105 ℃
temperature
um
Signal pin contact

Metal shell, tin-plated
Material surface plating
characteristics UL90V-0 retardant
Filler
thermoplastic
Durability 750 times
Mechanical
characteristics Insertion/pullout
Max. 5 lbs
force
Annex 3 Power Socket Parameters
Types, basic parameters and dimensions of Its appearances can
GB 1002-1996 single phase plugs and socket-outlets for
S
be shown as the
household and similar purposes
figure below:
Plugs and Socket-outlets for Household and

GB 2099.1-1996 Similar Purposes － Part1: General
Requirements
421 /503
Annex 4 MC Socket Parameter
7.62 (3 The appearance and

holes) shape are as shown
Dimension [mm]
19.05 (6
holes) below:
Shape Pin pitch [mm] 3.81
Diameter of welding pin hole

1.20
[mm]
n
Dimension of welding pin
0.8×0.8 Interface of analog
[mm×mm]
Group category of insulation audio

IIIa
io
material
Installation category
(over-voltage III/3
category)/pollution grade
Rated voltage [V] 125.00
Technical data
specified in ICE
and DIN VDE
is
Impulse withstand voltage [kV]
Rated current [A]
Maximum load current/each

bit [A]
2.50
8.00
8.00 Interface of digital

av
Type of insulation material PBT audio
According to the flame

retardant rating specified in V0
UL94
Approved data UL/CUL: [V]/[A]/AWG 300/8/-
um
Rated
voltage/rated CSA: [V]/[A]/AWG 300/8/-
current/wire gage
S
422 /503
Annex 5 MC Plug Parameter
7.62 (3 holes) The appearance and

Dimension [mm]
19.05(6 holes)
Shape shape are as shown
Pin pitch [mm] 3.81 below:
Group category of
I
insulation material
Installation category
n
(over-voltage III/3
category)/pollution grade
Rated voltage [V] 125
io
Impulse withstand voltage [kV]2.5
Technical data
specified in ICE Rated current/rated cross
8/0.5
and DIN VDE section [A]/[mm2] Interface of analog
Maximum load audio
current/cross section [A]/ 8/0.5
[mm2]
is
Type of insulation material
According to the flame

retardant rating specified in
UL94
PA
V0
av
Approved data UL/CUL: [V]/[A]/AWG 300/8/30-14
Rated Interface of digital
voltage/rated CSA: [V]/[A]/AWG 300/8/28-16 audio
current/wire gage
um
S
423 /503
Annex 6 RF Interface Parameter
Standard The appearance

75Ω
impedance
and shape are as
Frequency range 0-3 GHz shown below:
500 VRMS (maximum for the
Electrical Rated voltage
sea level)
characteristics
Withstand voltage 1500 VRMS (minimum for the
of electric medium sea level)
n
Standing-wave
1.5 (maximum)
ratio of voltage
io
Property of Main body, metal
Nickel plating
material accessory
Insertion force Maximum torque: 2.5 lbs
Pull force Maximum axis tension: 3 lbs

Mechanical Tension of nut 100 lbs (minimum)
feature
Push force
center pin
Durability
is
of
6 lbs (minimum)
At least 500 pulls

av
um
S
424 /503
Annex B- Device Upgrade

Step 1: View device IP through the LCD panel, as show in Fig. 9-1 EMR Front Panel
When the LCD backlight is illumed during the normal operation of equipment, the type
of displayed information will be switched by keeping pressing on the key. If the key is
pressed, the following display type will be circulated: warning informationnetwork
informationequipment sequence numberconnection status for primary Gigabit card
n
Ethernet portoperation status of equipment. The above method can be used for
checking the network information of equipment.
io
Fig. 9-1 EMR Front Panel
Step 2: Login the device ftp with ftp tool, as show in Fig. 9-2 FTP Upload, empty the
and then upload new upgrade files.is

original file. To preserve the original parameters, do not delete the files under para folder,
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
It is advised that the FileZilla (version V2.2.30) shall be used as the ftb tool
av
software.
Among the upgrade files, the folders back_board, web, webserver and appInit.txt
are the required folder of the system. Once these folders are deleted, the normal
utilization of equipment cannot be realized. The folder C451E_GBEMULTI is the
relevant folder for front end primary Gigabit card of equipment.
When upgrading the daughter card file, it shall upload the files in corresponding
um
web folder of the daughter card.

＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
S
425 /503
n
io
Fig. 9-2 FTP Upload
1.
is
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
The utilization methods of FileZilla are as follows:
Fill in equipment IP in the ‘Address’ bar of the software, respectively fill ‘target’ in
the ‘User Name’ and ‘Password’. The port number is 21. Click the quick link
av
button to connect the equipment.
2. Select the folder of the upgrading document in the local bar.
3. Choose the file or folder to be uploaded from the folder bar, drag the same into
the remote bar or right click the upgrade file to choose the uploading action in the
right click menu.
um
4. The indication will be shown in the remote bar after uploading the file.
＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝＝
Step 3: Use the online upgrade tool, as show in Fig. 9-3 Online Upgrade Tool, enter the
device IP for upgrade.
S
426 /503
n
io
is
Fig. 9-3 Online Upgrade Tool
The device will restart automatically after completing the upgrade. As show in Fig. 9-4
Online Upgrade Complete
av
um
S
Fig. 9-4 Online Upgrade Complete
427 /503
Annex C- Upgrade of special

board card
1. DSP drive upgrading method for SD-ADEC Card
n
Display two upgrade menus on the web network management board card interface of
the SD-ADEC Card.
io
is
av
One is used for inquiring the audio decoding type supported by the current decoding
chip. In general, the following three conditions are available, “EAC3, HEAAC”、 “HEAAC”
or “AC3”, which respectively means the support for “All Audio Types”, “ACC Audio” or
“Dolly Audio”.
The other menu option is used for upgrading the audio drive. If the query result is
um
“HEAAC”, it means that only “AC Drive Upgrade” can be put into effect, while other
options are invalid. For “AC3”, it means that only the “AAC Drive Upgrade” option can be
put into effect. For “EAC3 and HEAAC”, no options can be put into effect.
After the upgrade, the inquiry result shall be turned into the newly-supported audio
decoding type.
Precautions;
 The new and old drive program files shall be both loaded in the EMR file system
S
under the card folder with the file names of bslotimg.bin and bslotimg_ac3.bin,
respectively. If corresponding files are unavailable, the upgrade is not allowed.
 The drive upgrade option shall not be set with other options of the network
management.
 The drive upgrade lasts for about half a minute. The H60 decoding chip will be
reset during this period and no image is outputted. It shall make no operation to
the decoding card in this period.
 It shall avoid to frequent use the audio drive upgrade function.
428 /503
Annex D- Warning Information

1. Warning list of Main GbE Card
Warning display Warning reason/triggering Resolution

condition
n
1 FPGA Configure failed Reason: failed logic Replace the correct logical
configuration of daughter configuration file and
card restart the equipment.
Triggering condition: FTP
io
fails to upload the correct
FPGA configuration file.
2 FPGA No Response Reason: 1) Replace the correct
logical configuration file. It
1) FPGA configuration fails
is unnecessary to restart
and the logical operation of
the equipment.
daughter card is wrong;
is
2) The equipment operation
is abnormal. If the restart is
invalid, the hardware may
fail.
Triggering: it is detected
2) Return and repair of
equipment
av
that the status register of
the daughter card logic is
abnormal.
3 Input No System Bit rate Reason: the port is involved Check whether the
in the multiplex, but the front-end transmitting
stream is not received and source is abnormal, check
no TS packet is detected. whether the network
connection is abnormal,
um
Triggering: multiplex to the

check whether the
output port and cut off the
receiving end setting is
input source.
correct and check whether
the input source is
connected.
4 Input Overflow Reason: the inputted cache Detect whether the
is unable to store sufficient front-end transmission
data. The port is involved in source is normal.
the multiplex and the DDR
Check whether FPGA gives
overflow flag bit 1 is
any response or whether
S
received.
the hardware fails
Triggering: generally, this
situation is caused when no
response is given by FPGA.
5 Input No Effective Bitrate Reason: the port is involved Check whether the valid
in the multiplex, but the code rate is provided on the
valid code rate is 0. front-end transmitting
However, no valid TS source.
packet is detected, except
429 /503
the empty packet. No valid Check whether the empty

code rate is provided. data packet is found in the
input source.
Triggering: when the
configuration parameter is
given from input to the
output, the inputted signal is
changed to the empty
packet and only the table is
left only.
n
6 Output Overflow Reason: the data from the Check whether the code
back board to the port rate of the output system is
exceeds the code rate almost identical to the valid
setting of the output system code rate and change the
that the overflow is caused code rate of the output
io
in the output buffering area. system to be the maximum
value.
Triggering: the code rate of
output system is
excessively low.
7 Net Link Down Reason: the network line is Check the connection
8 Gateway Unresolved is
not inserted for the Ethernet
port.
Reason: unicast
transmitted and the target
IP and the IP of this
is
Ethernet port are not in the

condition of network wire
Check the network setting

av
same network segment.
The gateway of the target IP
is inaccessible.
9 IP Conflict Reason: the Ethernet port Check the IP addresses of
IP is as the same as other all devices connected to
IP addresses of the same the network
network
um
10 Cannot find 88E1111 Reason: the 88E1111 chip is Return to the factory and
unavailable. It is the repair
problem of the hardware.
11 Static ARP List MAC Set Reason: the MAC address Set the correct MAC
Error setting is wrong, simply. address
12 Backup IP Unreachable Reason: the network link Check the link between the
between the master master equipment and the
equipment and the backup backup equipment.
equipment fails and the
S
communication between the

two is unable to be realized.
13 Net Receive No System Reason: the system code Check the front-end
Bitrate rate received by the transmission source,
Ethernet port is 0 when network environment and
inputting the backup of receiving setting.
Ethernet port.
14 Net Receive No Effective Reason: the valid code rate Check the front-end
Bitrate received by Ethernet port is transmission source,
430 /503
0 when inputting the backup network environment and

of Ethernet port. receiving setting.
15 Net Receive Effective Reason: the valid code rate Check the front-end
Bitrate Not In Threshold received by Ethernet is transmission environment
Range beyond the code rate and the environment of
threshold setting when master route or backup
inputting the backup of route
Ethernet port.
16 Switch To Backup Net Reason: the main Ethernet Check the abnormality of
n
port is switched to the main route
backup Ethernet port when
the switching condition is
realized.
io
17 Destination Unresolved Reason: unicast is provided Check the target IP
and the target IP is address setting and the
inaccessible environment of network link
18 Backup Group Port Reason: the valid code rate Check whether the
Effective Bitrate Underflow transmitted by the UDP port minimum code rate
during the backup of the threshold setting is wrong.
19 Backup Group Port

Effective Bitrate Overflow
is
output port is smaller than
the minimum code rate
threshold setting.
Reason: the valid code rate
transmitted by the UDP port
Check
minimum
whether
code
the
rate
av
during the backup of the threshold setting is wrong.
output port is greater than
the maximum code rate
threshold setting.
20 Port Backup Group Port Reason: when making the Set the same UDP port
Number Is Not Equal output port backup, it is quantity for corresponding
required that the UDP ports group of master equipment
in the master equipment and backup equipment
um
and the backup equipment (modify the backup group

must be consistent in of UDP port)
number. If not, the warning
will be given.
21 UDP Port Number Exceed Reason: the UDP port to be Purchase the senior
Range authority added is beyond the UDP authorization again
port number authorization
purchased with the
equipment
S
431 /503
2. Warning list of 5 Input ASI Card

condition
1 FPGA Configuration Failure Reason: failed logic Replace the correct logical
n
io
1) FPGA configuration
fails and the logical
the equipment.
operation of daughter card
is wrong; 2) Return and repair of
equipment
2) The equipment
operation is abnormal. If
is
the restart is invalid, the
hardware may fail.
abnormal.
av
3 Input No Total Bitrate Reason: the port is Check whether the
involved in the multiplex, front-end transmitting
but the stream is not source is abnormal, check
received and no TS packet whether the network
is detected. connection is abnormal,
check whether the
um
input source.
the input source is
connected.
4 Input No Effective Bitrate Reason: the port is Check whether the valid
involved in the multiplex, code rate is provided on the
but the valid code rate is 0. front-end transmitting
Check whether the empty
the empty packet. No valid
data packet is found in the
code rate is provided.
input source.
S
output, the inputted signal
is changed to the empty
packet and only the table
is left only.
5 Input Overflow Reason: the inputted Detect whether the
cache is unable to store front-end transmission
sufficient data. The port is
432 /503
involved in the multiplex source is normal.

and the DDR overflow flag
bit 1 is received.
Triggering: generally, this the hardware fails
situation is caused when
no response is given by
FPGA.
3. Warning list of 4 Output ASI Card
n
condition
1 FPGA Configuration Failure
io
Reason: failed logic Replace the correct logical
2 FPGA No Response
is
Reason:
is wrong;
1) Replace the correct
the equipment.
equipment
av
2) The equipment
hardware may fail.
abnormal.
um
3 Output No Total Bitrate Reason: the data with the Check whether the code
input card is rate setting of the output
multiplexed/transparently system is 0.
transmitted to this port, but
no TS packet is outputted.
Triggering: the data of
back board is sent to this
port, but the code rate
setting of the output
system is 0.
S
4 Output No Effective Bitrate Reason: it is detected that Check whether

no valid data is provided corresponding input
from the back board to this program is normal and
port and the PSI/SI table is whether the valid PID
outputted only. mapping is available. If the
valid PID program is
Triggering: the TS stream
unavailable, the program
multiplexed/transparently
stream shall be multiplexed
transmitted to this port is
again or the normal
433 /503
cut off. program stream shall be

replaced. If the program
code rate is excessively
low (less than 200K), the
warning may be given.
setting of the output code rate and change the
system that the overflow is code rate of the output
n
caused in the output system to be the maximum
buffering area. value.
Triggering: the code rate
of output system is
io
excessively low.
4. Warning list of ASI 5InOut Card
1 FPGA Configuration Failure

is
condition
Reason: failed logic
configuration of daughter
card
Replace the correct logical
configuration file
restart the equipment.
and
av
the equipment.
um
equipment
2) The equipment
hardware may fail.
abnormal.
3 SMPTE310 Crystal Reason: the SMPTE310 Weld the SMPTE310
Oscillator Abnormal function is available on the crystal oscillator on the
S
card 355, but the card 355.

dedicated SMPTE310
crystal oscillator is not
welded.
Triggering: remove the
dedicated SMPTE310
crystal oscillator which is
welded on the card 355
and choose the
434 /503
SMPTE310 function.
4 Output Bitrate Overflow Reason: the data from the Check whether the code
setting of the output code rate and change the
system that the overflow is code rate of the output
caused in the output system to be the maximum
buffering area. value.
Triggering: the code rate
n
of output system is
excessively low.
io
transmitted to this port is
again or the normal
is
cut off.
program stream shall be
av
6 Input No Total Bitrate Reason: the port is Check whether the
involved in the multiplex, front-end transmitting
but the stream is not source is abnormal, check
received and no TS packet whether the network
is detected. connection is abnormal,
check whether the
input source.
the input source is
um
connected.
7 Input Sync Error Reason: the port is Check whether the input
multiplexed to the output, source is correct
but the input is not
synchronized;
Triggering: use the stream
which has the code rate of
input system and fails in
synchronization
S
8 Input No Effective Bitrate Reason: the port is Check whether the valid
input source.
435 /503

is left only.
9 Input Bitrate Overflow Reason: the inputted Detect whether the
sufficient data. The port is source is normal.
involved in the multiplex
n
bit 1 is received.
the hardware fails
io
FPGA.
10 Input Bitrate Abnormal Reason: the input for Check the input source
opened port of combiner is which shall be greater than
less than 500K or greater 500K but less than 200M
than 200M, or the ratio and the ratio between
between the minimum minimum code rate and the
is
code rate and
maximum one is greater
than 20;
the
Triggering: the input port

of the combiner is opened,
maximum code rate is
greater than 20;
av
the input setting is less
than 500K or greater than
200M, or the ratio between
and the maximum one is
greater than 20;
11 PSI Tables Sent Abnormal Reason: the table interval Reduce the transmission
is not 0, but the logical quantity of table
um
disclosure is not ready. information. Transmit no

The logical resource is insignificant table
insufficient or the table information.
information is excessively
large.
Triggering: the signal
source with high table
information content is
multiplexed to the port and
outputted.
S
436 /503
5. Warning list of DS3 adapter Card

condition
1 G.703 RS Decode Reason: the coding function Set the RS coding and
Abnormally of DS3 transmitting end is decoding switch of the
turned off, the output packet input source port and the
length is selected to be 204 receiving port as the same.
n
and the receiving end
decoding function is turned
on.
Triggering: the coding
io
function of DS3 transmitting
end is turned off, the output
packet length is selected to
be 204 and the receiving
end decoding function is
turned on.
2 ASI Input Sync Error
is
Reason: the port is
multiplexed to the output,
but the ASI input is not
synchronized;
Check whether the ASI
input source is correct
av
ASI input system and fails in
synchronization
3 G.703 Input Sync Error Reason: the port is Check whether the DS3
multiplexed to the output, input source is correct
but the DS3 input is not
synchronized;
um

DS3 input system and fails
in synchronization
4 ASI Input No Effective Reason: the ASI input code Check whether the ASI
Bitrate rate for opening the switch input is abnormal
ASI input system is 0.
Triggering: pull up the ASI
input
5 G.703 Input No Effective Reason: the DS3 input code Check whether the DS3
S
DS3 input system is 0.

Triggering: pull up the DS3
input
6 G.703 Frame Format Error Reason: the DS3 input is If the input is not
switched on and the frame synchronized, check
format of DS3 input stream whether the frame format
is unmatched with the frame setting is set to be the
format setting (C-bit and
437 /503
M13 become the frame frame.

format)
If the input is synchronized,
Triggering: the frame format check whether the frame
parameter and the inputted format setting is consistent
frame format setting are to the input stream.
different or the frame format
is set to be the frame and
the DS3 input is ensured to
be unsynchronized.
n
7 No Response Reason: 1) Replace the correct
the equipment.
io
equipment
fail.
8 FPGA
Failure
Configuration
is
abnormal.
Reason:
card
failed logic
configuration file
and
av
9 Mainboard Version Reason: the back board Upgrade the back board to
Incompatible version is low or high; the version compatible to
the daughter card
Triggering: degrade the
back board version to the
um
last series
10 Bus Rate Abnormal Reason: the bus code rate Restart the logic
detected by the back board
is 2Mbps greater than the
bus code rate read by the
logic.
Triggering: unable to realize
the manual triggering
11 ASI Input Overflow Reason: the loop-back is Check whether the code
S
switched on and the valid rate of ASI input system is

code rate inputted by ASI is greater than the code rate
greater than the code rate of DS3 or E3 system in the
of DS3 or E3 system, or the transparent stream mode.
ASI input system code rate
Check whether the valid
in the transparent stream
code rate of ASI input is
mode is greater than the
greater than the code rate
code rate of DS3 or E3
of DS3 or E3 system in the
system.
non-transparent stream
Triggering: open the
438 /503
loop-back and set the valid mode.

code rate of ASI input to be
50Mbps.
12 ASI Output No Effective Reason: the multiplex Check whether the
Bitrate output is available on the program multiplexed to the
ASI output port, but no valid ASI output exists. If not,
audio and video code rates this multiplex shall be
are available. deleted or the multiplex
shall be substituted by
Triggering: multiplex from
other existing programs.
n
the input card 5 to ASI
output and pull up the input
of the input card 5.
13 G.703 Output No Effective Reason: the multiplex Check whether the
io
DS3 output port, but no DS3 output exists. If not,
valid audio and video code this multiplex shall be
rates are available. deleted or the multiplex
the input card 5 to DS3
14 ASI Output Overflow is

Reason: the ASI output port

maps the multiplex DDR
overflow
Delete some multiplex
programs of ASI output port
av
Triggering: the multi-route
program is multiplexed to
the ASI output port when
the loop-back is switched on
such that the total valid
code rate of the program
exceeds the system code
rate set by the ASI output
port.
um
15 G.703 Output Overflow Reason: the DS3 output Delete some multiplex
port maps the multiplex programs of DS3 output
DDR overflow port
the DS3 output port when
S
rate set by the DS3 output

port.
439 /503
6. Warning list of SFN Card
Warning reason/triggering
Warning display Resolution
condition
1 GPS 10MHz Abnormal No external 10MHz clock Check the external 10MHz
signal input clock signal input
2 GPS 10MHz Sync Error Internal 10MHz clock of the Check the external 10MHz
card not synchronized. clock signal input
Since the last boot, no
n
external 10MHz clock signal
input
3 GPS 1PPS Sync Error Internal 1PPS clock of the Check the external 1PPS
card not synchronized. clock signal input
Since the last boot, no
io
external 1PPS clock signal
input
4 GPS 1PPS Unlock No external 1PPS clock Check the external 1PPS
signal input clock signal input
5 Input Sync Error No available ASI signal Check the cable connection
input of the input and the Bitrate
6 Output Overflow
is
The
Bitrate”
“SFN Out
,which
determined by the set
Total
is
output mode of the card, is

less than the “SFN Out
Effective Bitrate”
of the input stream.
Reduce the effective rate of
input or change the output
mode of the card, so that
the “SFN Out Total Bitrate”
is greater than the “SFN
Out Effective Bitrate”.
av
7 FPGA Configuration Reason: failed logic Replace the correct logical
Failure configuration of daughter configuration file and
um

the equipment.
equipment
fail.
S

abnormal.
440 /503
7. Warning list of SFN Correction Card
condition
1 Port x Output Overflow Reason: Adjust the adaption rate
The SFN Correction Card and correction time, so that
buffer overflow, because of the buffer occupancy is
the correction time set is too
large. reduced to less than
n
200Mb.
8. Warning list of DS3 In4 Card
io
condition
is
fail.
the equipment.
equipment
av
abnormal.
um

3 Bus Rate Abnormal Reason: the bus code rate Restart the logic
detected by the back board
is 2Mbps greater than the
bus code rate read by the
logic.
Triggering: unable to realize
the manual triggering
S
synchronized;
in synchronization
441 /503
on.
n
turned on.
io
6 G.703 Frame Format Error Reason: the DS3 input is If the input is not
switched on and the frame synchronized, check
format setting (C-bit and frame.
M13 become the frame
If the input is synchronized,
is
format)
Triggering: the frame format
parameter and the inputted
frame format setting are
check whether the frame
format setting is consistent
to the input stream.
av
be unsynchronized.
9. Warning list of DS3 Two-Way Adapter Card

condition
um
on.
S

turned on.
2 ASI Input Sync Error Reason: the port is Check whether the ASI
but the ASI input is not
synchronized;
442 /503

ASI input system and fails in
synchronization
synchronized;
n
in synchronization
4 ASI Input No Effective Reason: the ASI input code Check whether the ASI
io
ASI input system is 0.
Triggering: pull up the ASI
input
5 G.703 Input No Effective Reason: the DS3 input code Check whether the DS3
6 G.703 Frame Format Error

is
DS3 input system is 0.
Triggering: pull up the DS3
input
Reason: the DS3 input is

switched on and the frame
If the input is not
synchronized, check
av
format setting. frame.
Triggering: the frame format
parameter and the inputted
frame format setting are
um

be unsynchronized.
the equipment.
equipment
fail.
S
abnormal.
443 /503

9 Mainboard Version Reason: the back board Upgrade the back board to
Incompatible version is low or high; the version compatible to
the daughter card
Triggering: degrade the
back board version to the
last series
10 ASI Output No Effective Reason: the multiplex Check whether the
Bitrate
n
output is available on the program multiplexed to the
ASI output port, but no valid ASI output exists. If not,
audio and video code rates this multiplex shall be
are available. deleted or the multiplex
io
the input card 5 to ASI
11 G.703 Output No Effective Reason: the multiplex Check whether the
is
DS3 output port, but no
valid audio and video code
rates are available.
the input card 5 to DS3
DS3 output exists. If not,
this multiplex shall be
deleted or the multiplex
av
12 ASI Output Overflow Reason: the ASI output port Delete some multiplex
maps the multiplex DDR programs of ASI output port
overflow
the ASI output port when
um

rate set by the ASI output
port.
13 G.703 Output Overflow Reason: the DS3 output Delete some multiplex
port maps the multiplex programs of DS3 output
DDR overflow port
S
the DS3 output port when
rate set by the DS3 output
port.
444 /503
10. Warning list of 6-Ch.QAM Card

condition
1 Output Overflow Reason: the valid code rate Reduce the valid code rate
outputted by the port is outputted by the port
higher than the system code multiplex or modify the
rate; modulation mode,
protection interval or
Triggering: the valid code
n
internal code rate to
rate multiplexed to the
increase the system code
rate.
the system code rate.
2 FPGA No Response
io
Reason: 1) Replace the correct
the equipment.
equipment
is
fail.
abnormal.
av
3 High Temperature Reason: the radiation of Check whether the
board card is not in time or radiation fan of equipment
the output power of board and the board card have
card is abnormal such that the normal work. If the fan
the board card temperature has poor radiation, please
is greater than 70℃. replace the fan. If the short
circuit is found on the board
Triggering: remove the card, it shall replace the
um
chassis fan board card.

4 PSI Tables Sent Abnormal Reason: the table interval is Reduce the transmission
not 0, but the logical quantity of table
disclosure is not ready. The information. Transmit no
logical resource is insignificant table
large.
S
outputted.
5 Output Level Abnormal Reason: the RF output level Turn off and turn on RF
adjustment is wrong or the switch again or replace the
level output exceeds the modulation card. Or, adjust
setting value; the level of debugging
software V4.exe of 511S.
Triggering: the level of C508
445 /503
card is adjusted to be
abnormal via the debugging
software 511S V4.exe.
6 Output No System Bit rate Reason: the data with the Check whether the code
Triggering: the data of back
n
board is sent to this port, but
the code rate setting of the
output system is 0.
11. Warning list of DVB-T/H-4 Mod. Card
io
condition
1 Output Overflow Reason: the valid code rate Reduce the valid code rate
outputted by the port is outputted by the port
is
higher than the system code
rate;
Triggering: the valid code
rate multiplexed to the
the system code rate.
multiplex or modify the
modulation
protection interval
internal code rate to
mode,
increase the system code

rate.
or
av
um
transmitted to this port is cut

again or the normal
off.
S
output system is 0.
446 /503
daughter card is wrong; the equipment.

2) The equipment operation 2) Return and repair of
is abnormal. If the restart is equipment
fail.
abnormal.
n
io
is
insufficient or the table
large.
Triggering: the
signal
information.
av
outputted.
software V4.exe of 511S.
Triggering: the level of
um
C508T card is adjusted to

be abnormal via the
debugging software 511S
V4.exe.
S

447 /503
12. Warning list of DVB-S/S2 Mod. Card

condition
n
value.
output system is
excessively low.
io
2 Output No Valid Bit rate Reason: it is detected that Check whether
is
off.
again or the normal
av
um

output system is 0.
the equipment.
equipment
S

fail.
abnormal.
448 /503

6 ARM Initial Failure/ ARM Reason: the card Upgrade the correct card
No Response application program, application program,
bootloader or kernel bootloader or kernel again.
upgrade file is unavailable
or is wrong.
n
logical file
dvbss2Card.out.gz from ftp
and restart the equipment.
io
is
large.
Triggering: the
information content
signal
is
outputted.
av
software configure.exe of
Triggering: the level of IPQAM3.0.
C507s card is adjusted to
be abnormal via the
um
debugging software
IPQAM3.0 configure.exe.
S
449 /503
13. Warning list of 16 Channel QAM Modulation Card

condition
n
value.
output system is
excessively low.
io
the equipment.
equipment
is
fail.
av
abnormal.
um
4 Bootloader Udpata Failure Reason: the card Upgrade the correct card
bootloader upgrade file is bootloader again.
unavailable or is wrong.
5 Bsp Udpata Failure Reason: the card vxWorks Upgrade the correct card
upgrade file is unavailable vxWorks again.
or is wrong.
6 App Udpata Failure Reason: the card Upgrade the correct card
application program application program again.
upgrade file is unavailable
S
or is wrong.
large.
450 /503

outputted.
level output exceeds the modulation card.
setting value.
n
io
card, it shall replace the
board card.
14. Warning list of ISDB-T/Tb Card
1
Warning display
Output Overflow
is
condition
Reason: the data from the
back board to the port
Resolution
Check whether the code

rate of the output system is
av
value.
output system is
excessively low.
2 FPGA No Response
um

the equipment.
equipment
fail.
S

abnormal.
451 /503
4 ARM Initial Failure/ ARM Reason: the card Upgrade the correct card
No Response application program, application program,
bootloader or vxWorks bootloader or vxWorks
upgrade file is unavailable again.
or is wrong.
logical file
CARD_C518.out.gz from ftp
and restart the equipment.
n
level output exceeds the modulation card.
setting value.
io
15. Warning list of MPEG2 SD AENC Card
1 FPGA
Failure
Configuration
is
condition
card
configuration file
and
av
the equipment.
equipment
um

fail.
abnormal.
3 Video Format Error Reason: 1) Replace the input source
1) the format of the inputted 2) Modify the video format
video is invalid; parameter
S
2) The format of the

inputted video is unmatched
with the video format setting
4 Video No Input Reason: Replace the input source
1) no video input
2) Invalid video input
452 /503
16. Warning list of MPEG2 SD DENC Card

condition
n
io
the equipment.
equipment
fail.
3 Video Format Error

is
abnormal.
Reason: 1) Replace the input source
av
um
1) no video input
5 MPEG2 AES/EBU No Reason: the MP2 audio Replace the input source
Input switch is turned on and the
Modify MP2 audio
AES/EBU audio input is
parameter setting
selected at the same time.
But no input is given by the
AES/EBU audio or the
AES/EBU is not locked.
6 AC3 AES/EBU No Input Reason: the AC3 audio Replace the input source
S
switch is turned on and the

Modify AC3 audio
AES/EBU audio input is
parameter setting
7 DRA AES/EBU No Input Reason: the DRA audio Replace the input source
Modify DRA audio
453 /503
AES/EBU audio input is parameter setting

8 MPEG2 Embedded Audio Reason: the MP2 audio Replace the input source
No Input switch is turned on and the
Modify MP2 audio
embedded audio input is
parameter setting
n
embedded audio or the
embedded audio is not
locked.
9 AC3 Embedded Audio No
io
Reason: the AC3 audio Replace the input source
Input switch is turned on and the
Modify AC3 audio
parameter setting
10 DRA Embedded Audio No

Input is
locked.
Reason: the DRA audio

Replace the input source
Modify DRA
parameter setting
audio
av
locked.
17. Warning list of Analog SD ENC Card

um
condition
S

the equipment.
equipment
fail.
454 /503
abnormal.
3 Video Format Error Reason: 1) Replace the input source
n
1) no video input
5 DSP Communicate Failed Reason: 1) Restart the equipment
io
1) The DXT8243 chip 2) Reset Factory Settings
running in an abnormal 3) Return and repair of
equipment
state
2) Parameters modifying
is
makes
abnormal
DXT8243 chip
3) If restart and reset factory

settings are invalid, the
hardware may fail.
av
6 DSP Reset Reason: 1) Restart the equipment
1) Parameters modifying 2) Reset Factory Settings
makes DXT8243 chip 3) Return and repair of
equipment
abnormal
2）Loss the bitrate of video

um
or audio when DXT8243

chip running
hardware may fail.
18. Warning list of Digital SD ENC Card

S

condition
1 Digital SD ENC Card M Reason: failed logic Replace the correct logical
FPGA Configuration configuration of daughter configuration file and
Failure card restart the equipment.
455 /503
2 Digital SD ENC Card M Reason: 1) Replace the correct

FPGA No Response logical configuration file. It
the equipment.
equipment
fail.
n
abnormal.
3 Digital SD ENC Card M
io
Reason: 1) Replace the input source
Program N Video Format
Error 1) the format of the inputted 2) Modify the video format
4
5
Digital SD ENC Card M
Program N Video No Input
Digital SD ENC Card M

is
Reason:
1) no video input
Reason:
Replace the input source
1) Restart the equipment

av
DSP Communicate Failed
1) The DXT8243 chip 2) Reset Factory Settings
running in an abnormal
state
equipment
2) Parameters modifying
makes DXT8243 chip
abnormal
um
hardware may fail.

6 Digital SD ENC Card M Reason: 1) Restart the equipment
DSP Reset
1) Parameters modifying 2) Reset Factory Settings
makes DXT8243 chip
abnormal
equipment
2）Loss the bitrate of video
or audio when DXT8243
chip running
S

hardware may fail.
7 Digital SD ENC Card M Reason: Replace the input source
Program N Digital Audio
No Input 1) no digital audio input
2) Invalid digital audio input
8 Digital SD ENC Card M Reason: Replace the input source
Program N Dolby AC3 No
Input 1) no dolby audio input
456 /503
19. Warning list of DVI Enc Card

condition
the equipment.
n
equipment
fail.
io
abnormal.
2 Video Input Resolution Reason: 1) Modify PC output
Error resolution
1) The resolution of PC is
3 Video No Input is
not compatible
Reason:
1) No DVI video input
2) Invalid DVI video input
1)Replace the input source
2) Modify
resolution
PC output
av
4 Video Effective Bitrate 1) Set Video Effective 1)Reduce the Video
Exceed Total Bitrate Bitrate equal to or greater Effective Bitrate
than Total Bitrate 2)Increase the Total Bitrate
20. Warning list of AVC HD ENC Card

um
condition
1 HD Video Authorization no HD encoding Add the authorization code
Error authorization of HD encoding
2 Video No Input Reason: 1) Replace the input source
1) No input signal 2) Select the video input
option that matches the
2) Video input options do
input signal
not match the signal
3 Input Resolution Error Reason: Replace the input source
1) The resolution of the
input video is not supported
S
4 Output Resolution Error Reason: Replace the input source

1) no video input
5 Video Chip DDR Initial Reason: 1) Restart the equipment;
Failure 2) Return and repair of
Hardware failure equipment.
457 /503
21. Warning list of AVC Digital ENC Card

condition
1 AVC Digital ENC Card X Port X no input signal or Replace the input source
Port X Error ID : 0 input Resolution Error
2 AVC Digital ENC Card X No video input or input Replace the input source
Video X Input Error ID : 4 interrupt
3 AVC Digital ENC Card X Input Frame rate Error Replace the input source
n
Video X Input Error ID : 8
4 AVC Digital ENC Card X Input Resolution Error Replace the input source
5 AVC Digital ENC Card X Video input interrupt Replace the input source
io
6 AVC Digital ENC Card X Port X no input signal or Replace the input source
Video X No Input video input unlock
7 AVC Digital ENC Card X output resolution Modify video X output
Video X FPGA Frame not set up correctly resolution
Format Error
8 AVC Digital ENC Card X TBC unlock Check input and output
10
Video X FPGA Frame
Format Error
AVC Digital ENC Card X
Video X Output Format
Error
Output No PCR Rate
is
Output
not set up correctly
Format
Video output No PCR Rate

parameters
Modify video
frame rate
parameter settings
X output
av
11 DDRInitStatus Err Initialization failure Restart the equipment
12 AVC Digital ENC Card X Chip parameter 1) Reload the microcode or
Main ChipConfiguration configuration error restart the card
Failure 2) Return and repair of
equipment
13 AVC Digital ENC Card X no HD encoding Add the authorization code
Video Authorization Error authorization of HD encoding
22. Warning list of ENC TRC Card

um

condition
1 DSP No Response Reason: 1) Upgrade firmware 1
1) CPU boot failure 2)Return and repair of
2) Upgrade package equipment
version of the card CPU
does not match
2 DSP2 Version Reason: 1）Upgrade firmware 2
Incompatible, need update 1) The transcoder does not
2 ） Return and repair of
S
normal boot
2) The transcoder and the equipment
drive does not match
3 High Temperature Reason: 1)Turn the fan on
1) The fan is not working 2)Check the vent
2) The ventilation is poor
4 Video N No Input Reason: Replace the input source
1）The transcoder no video
input
458 /503
2）Invalid video input

5 Video N Input Resolution Reason: Replace the input source
Error 1) The resolution of the
6 Video N Output Resolution Reason: Modify output video
Error 1) the set resolution of the resolution
output is not supported
7 Video N Input Format Reason: Replace the input source
Error 1) The frame rate of the
n
8 Audio N Not Support AC-3 Reason: Replace the input source
Input Dolby audio input, without Set the audio “Status” to
Dolby authorization, and the “Pass Through”
audio “Status” is Add the authorization code
io
“Transcoding” of Dolby
9 Video N Not Supported Reason: Replace the input source
HD Video, Authorize Error 1）HD video input, and no Add the authorization code
of HD video transcoding
HD video transcoding
authorization
23. Warning list of High Density TRC Card
1
Warning display
DSP No Response
is
condition
Reason:
1) CPU boot failure
Resolution
1) Upgrade firmware 1
2)Return and repair of
av
2) Upgrade package equipment
version of the card CPU
does not match
2 High Temperature Reason: 1)Turn the fan on
3) The fan is not working 2)Check the vent
4) The ventilation is poor
3 Video N No Input Reason: Replace the input source
1）The transcoder no video
um
input
4 Video N Output Resolution Reason: Modify output video
Error 1) the set resolution of the resolution
output is not supported
5 Video N Input Format Reason: Replace the input source
Error 1) The frame rate of the
6 Audio N Not Support AC-3 Reason: Replace the input source
Input Dolby audio input, without Set the audio “Status” to
Dolby authorization, and the “Pass Through”
S
audio “Status” is Add the authorization code

“Transcoding” of Dolby
7 Video N Not Supported Reason: Replace the input source
HD Video, Authorize Error 1）HD video input, and no Add the authorization code
of HD video transcoding
HD video transcoding
authorization
8 Chip N Config failure ， Reason: 1) Reload the microcode or
Error：ID 1)Chip parameter restart the card
configuration error 2) Upgrade firmware 2
459 /503
2) The transcoder and the 3) Return and repair of

drive does not match equipment
9 Video N Input PID Error Reason: Replace the input source
The PID of the input video
do not accord with the radio
and television standards
10 Audio N Input PID Error Reason: Replace the input source
The PID of the input audio
do not accord with the radio
and television standards
n
24. Warning list of TRC Card
io
condition
1 Video Scrambled Reason: Decoding video is Replace the decoding
scrambled program or Replace the
Triggering condition: The input source
video of the input program
2 Video No Effective Bitrate

is
decoding is scrambled
Reason: The video Bitrate
of the program decoding
is 0
Replace the decoding
program or check the input
source
av
Triggering condition: Set the
video Bitrate of the program
input to, or remove the
video at the front end
3 Audio Scrambled Reason: Decoding audio is Replace the decoding
scrambled program or Replace the
um

audio of the input program
4 Audio No Effective Bitrate Reason: The audio Bitrate Replace the decoding
of the program decoding program or check the input
is 0 source
audio Bitrate of the program
S
input to, or remove the

audio at the front end
5 Program Invalid Reason: No program be multiplex program to the
multiplexed output port of the card
6 Video Overflow Reason: Video Decoding Check the input source
module runs abnormally Check the decoding chip
460 /503
7 Audio Overflow Reason: Audio Decoding Check the input source

module runs abnormally Check the decoding chip
8 Video Abnormal : 1 Reason: The Encoding chip Check the decoding output
isn’t working in the encoding state of HD-SDI
state Check the Encoding chip
10 Video Abnormal : 2 Reason: No Video bitrate Check the decoding output
output of Encoding chip state of HD-SDI
n
Check the Encoding
Parameter
11 PCR No Effective Bitrate Reason: Encoding chip No Check the decoding output
io
PCR output state of HD-SDI
Check the Encoding
Parameter
12 No Response Reason: Modify the parameters to
1)Main control chip recover
25.
is
anomaly
2) Command
anomaly
Warning list of AVS DIGITAL ENC TRC Card

interaction
Restart the equipment
Return
equipment
and repair of
av
condition
1 AVS DIGITAL ENC TRC Reason: Replace the input source
Card x Port x Video Audio 1）No video input
Input Unlock
um
2 AVS DIGITAL ENC TRC Reason: Check the multiplex and

Card x Port x Transcode 1) No program is the selection of program is
No Input multiplexed to transcoding correctly. Ensure that the
port. resolution format or
2) No program is selected to standard of the input
transcode. stream is supported.
3) The resolution format or
format of the source is not
supported.
3 AVS DIGITAL ENC TRC Reason: The video Bitrate Replace the decoding
Card x Port x Video No of the program decoding is program or check the input
S
Effective Bitrate 0 source

input, or remove the video
at the front end
4 AVS DIGITAL ENC TRC Reason: The audio Bitrate Replace the decoding
Card x Port x Audio No of the program decoding is program or check the input
Effective Bitrate 0 source
461 /503
input, or remove the audio

at the front end
5 AVS DIGITAL ENC TRC Reason: The Bitrate of the Replace the decoding
Card x Port x Video Audio program decoding is 0 program or check the input
No Effective Bitrate Triggering condition: Set the source
at the front end
6 AVS DIGITAL ENC TRC Reason: 1) Replace the correct
Card No Response logical configuration file. It
n
the equipment.
equipment
io
fail.
Triggering condition: it is
detected that the status
register of the daughter card
logic is abnormal.
26. is
Warning list of AVS ENC TRC Card
No warning information.
av
27. Warning list of AVS+ Multi ENC Card

condition
1 AVS+ Multi ENC Card x Reason: Replace the input source
Port x Video Audio Input 1）No video input
um
Unlock
2 AVS+ Multi ENC Card x Reason: The video Bitrate Replace the decoding
Port x Video No Effective of the program decoding is
source
Bitrate 0
at the front end
3 AVS+ Multi ENC Card x Reason: The audio Bitrate Replace the decoding
S

Port x Audio No Effective of the program decoding is
source
Bitrate 0
input, or remove the audio
at the front end
4 AVS+ Multi ENC Card x Reason: The Bitrate of the Replace the decoding
462 /503
Port x Video Audio No program decoding is 0 program or check the input

Effective Bitrate Triggering condition: Set the source
at the front end
5 AVS+ Multi ENC Card No Reason: 1) Replace the correct
Response logical configuration file. It
n
the equipment.
equipment
io
fail.
register of the daughter card
logic is abnormal.
28.
Warning display
is
Warning list of SD-ADEC Card
condition
Resolution
av
1 DSP Initial Failure The video chip is not Confirm whether the H60
initialized and the DSP decoding chip is complete
initialization failure warning and whether the booter and
is given. flash are successfully
programmed.
2 DSP No Response When the communication Check whether AMR and
between ARM and H60 of DSP are matched in
decoding card is abnormal, version.
um
DSP.
3 FPGA Reset When the FPGA chip is Detect FPGA chip and
abnormal, namely, the hardware to check whether
reading value of the logic the hardware fails
register is anything but
0x5A5A, the FPGA resetting
warning is given.
4 FPGA Configuration When the FPGA Replace the correct logical
Failure initialization fails, the FPGA configuration file
S
configuration failure warning

will be given.
5 Input Bitrate Abnormal When the absolute value Check whether the contact
between the code rate of between the decoder card
decoding card and the back and the back board is good.
board code rate is less than
2M, the input code rate
abnormality warning is
463 /503
given.
6 Video No Input Bitrate When the video code rate is Check whether the input
less than 256Kbps, the source is cut off.
warning of no video input
code rate is given.
7 Video Scrambled When the video program is Change the program again.
scrambled, the warning that C201AS shall not decode
the video is scrambled is the scrambled program.
given.
n
8 Video Decode Error When the video status Check the program source
returned by H60 decoding quality; check whether the
chip is BAD_L0, BAD_L1, data packet of video is lost;
BAD_L2 or DEAD, the video check whether the PCR of
io
decoding mistake warning program source is normal;
is give. and check whether the
program source can
comply with the standard.
9 Audio No Input Bitrate When the audio code rate is Check whether the input
less than 32Kbps, the source is cut off.
10 Audio Scrambled
is
warning of no audio input
code rate is given.
When the scrambled audio

program is multiplexed, the
Warning of scrambled audio
Change the program again.
C201AS shall not decode
the scrambled program.
av
is given.
11 Audio Not Supported When the following audio Check the audio stream
types are given ( AAC LC, type multiplexed to the
Dolby, MPEG L1, MPEG L2, program card. If the audio
MPEG L3, WMA, type is as the same as
Dolby-Plus), the warning those listed on the left, the
that the audio is not decoding shall not be
supported can be outputted. applied.
um
Check whether the input

source is normal.
12 Audio Decode Error When the mpeg audio Check the program source
decoding detects that the quality and whether the
audio buffering level is data packet of audio is
greater than 10,000, namely missed.
the buffering level is
abnormal, the audio
decoding mistake warning
may be outputted.
S
13 Audio Output Abnormal When the PCM data Check the program source
outputted by H60 is 0 within quality and whether the
a continuous 30s period, the data packet of audio is
audio output abnormality missed.
warning can be outputted.
464 /503
29. Warning list of ANA DEC TRC Card

condition
n
io
the equipment.
equipment
2) The equipment
is
hardware may fail.
register of the daughter
card logic is abnormal.
av
3 Video Scrambled Reason: Decoding video Replace the decoding
is scrambled program or Replace the
input source
Triggering condition: The
4 Audio Scrambled Reason: Decoding audio Replace the decoding
input source
um

5 Video No Effective Bitrate Reason: The video Bitrate Replace the decoding
of the program program or check the input
decoding is 0 source
Triggering condition: Set
the video Bitrate of the
program input to, or
remove the video at the
front end
S
the audio Bitrate of the
remove the audio at the
front end
7 Program Invalid Reason: The video PID Replace the decoding
and audio PID of the program or check the input
465 /503
decoding program are source

0x1fff, that is invalid PID;
Triggering condition:
“Service” is set to
“Custom”, the video and
audio PID are set to 0x1fff
8 Video Overflow Reason: Decoding module Turn off the decoding
runs abnormally switch and then turn on
9 Audio Overflow Reason: Decoding module Turn off the decoding
n
10 Port No Response Reason: The chip of Temporarily unable to
Hisilicon runs abnormally solve ， Recommended to
restart the device or reset
The chip of Hisilicon
separately.
io
11 Audio Abnormal Reason: The audio of Check the audio of
decoding program is mute decoding program
12 Video Abnormal Reason: The video of Check the video of
decoding program is decoding program
Colorbar
30. Warning list of Digital DEC TRC Card
1
Warning display
FPGA Configuration Failure

is
condition
Resolution

configuration file and
av
um

the equipment.
equipment
2) The equipment
hardware may fail.
S

4 Audio Scrambled Reason: Decoding audio Replace the decoding
466 /503

n
io
front end
is
program input
to, or
av
front end
um
8 Video Overflow Reason: Decoding module Turn off the decoding
9 Audio Overflow Reason: Decoding module Turn off the decoding
S
10 Port No Response Reason: The chip of Temporarily unable to

Hisilicon runs abnormally solve ， Recommended to
restart the device or reset
The chip of Hisilicon
separately.
467 /503
31. Warning list of 4K DEC Card

condition
the equipment.
n
equipment
2) The equipment
hardware may fail.
io
3 Audio Scrambled
is
is scrambled
Reason: Decoding audio
is scrambled
program or Replace the
input source
Replace the decoding

program or Replace the
av
input source
um

front end
front end
S

7 PCR Invalid Reason: PCR PID is Check the PCR
468 /503
0x1fff, and video or audio

is valid
8 Video Decode Abnormal Reason: The video Check whether the video
decoding of HiSilicon chip decoding of the HiSilicon
is abnormal, such as video chip is normal, and it can
stream error. be checked by recording
and soft decoding.
9 Audio Decode Abnormal Reason: The audio Check whether the audio
decoding of HiSilicon chip decoding of the HiSilicon
n
is abnormal. chip is normal.
32. Warning list of Descramble Card
io
condition
the equipment.
is
fail.
equipment
av
abnormal.
2 CAM Card x No Inserted The de-scrambling switch is Insert the CAM card in
turned on and the corresponding slot.
de-scrambling program is
set. The CAM card is not
inserted.
um
3 CAM Card x CASID The CASID is unmatched. It Insert the CAM card
Dismatch is likely that the inserted corresponding to
CAM card does not support de-scrambling program.
the CASID setting the
de-scrambling program.
4 CAM Card x Unlock The CAM card is not locked Detect that the signal
or no code rate is given by source is ok and then insert
the output. the CAM card again or
replace the same.
S
5 No EMM No code rate is given by Check the input source and

EMM. check whether the code
rate is given by EMM.
6 Descramble Abnormal It fails to de-scramble the Check the program source,
program. The detailed the de-scrambling setting,
reasons are as shown in the the IC authorization or the
de-scrambling page. CAM card according to the
prompt message on the
de-scrambling page.
469 /503
33. Warning list of DVB-S2 Desc Card

condition
1 Demodulator Unlock The demodulation switch Check whether the input
and the Warning switch of source signal is normal and
the input port are turned on check whether the
and the signal is not locked. frequency point parameter
It is likely that the signal setting is correct.
n
wire is not connected or the
parameter setting is wrong.
io
the equipment.
equipment
fail.
3 FPGA Configuration
is
abnormal.

av
4 Input Abnormal When the demodulation Check the input signal wire;
input detects that the data check the input signal
um
package is lost (more than source; insert the signal

20 times per second wire and etc. again; or
generally), the warning may replace the card to make
be outputted. the test.
inserted.
S

replace the same.
470 /503

de-scrambling page.
n
34. Warning list of ABS-S Demod Card
De-scrambling correlation
io
condition
2 CAM Card
Dismatch
x CASID is
inserted.
The CASID is unmatched. It
is likely that the inserted
CAM card does not support
Insert the CAM card
corresponding
to
av
replace the same.
um

de-scrambling page.
S
471 /503
Demodulation correlation
condition
n
io
the equipment.
equipment
fail.
3 FPGA
Failure
Configuration
is
abnormal.

av
4 Demodulator Abnormal When the demodulation Check the input signal wire;
input detects that the data check the input signal
package is lost (more than source; insert the signal
um
20 times per second wire and etc. again; or

generally), the warning may replace the card to make
be outputted. the test.
5 Demodulator Error When the demodulation Wait the board card to
input detects that the PAT recover or restart the
table content is wrong, it is equipment.
likely that the tuner mistake
causes the abnormality of
demodulation data.
6 Demodulator Initial Failure The demodulation chip of Restart the equipment or
S
board card fails in the replace the card slot. If it is

initialization. It is likely that still unable to solve the
the hardware fails. problem, replace the card.
7 Demodulator The operation of Replace the card slot or
Configuration Failure demodulating and card to solve this problem.
searching signal and
configuring frequency,
symbol rate and other
472 /503
parameters fails.
35. Warning list of DVB-C Demod Desc Card

condition
1 No Response The working status of Check the upgrade file
daughter card is abnormal. name of board card,
re-upgrade or replace the
n
card slot and restart.
io
the equipment.
equipment
fail.
3 FPGA
Failure
Configuration
is
abnormal.

av
4 Sub-Processor For prompt warning, [xxx] This prompt is given for
Upgrade … [xxx] refers to the detailed link. If each upgrade. If the
ERROR is followed, it ERROR is given, it may be
um
means that the link is the mistake of file and it

wrong. Trigger when needs to check whether the
upgrade the daughter Arm file is correct.
card.
S

6 BISS Descramble It fails to de-scramble the Check whether the key is
Abnormal program. The detailed correct.
reasons are as shown in the
de-scrambling page.
7 Biss Error Service(s) : sx s The program is not Check whether the key is
xxx successfully de-scrambled. correct.
473 /503

inserted.
n
replace the same.
io
12 CAM Card x Descramble It fails to de-scramble the Check the program source,
Abnormal program. The detailed the de-scrambling setting,
36.
is
de-scrambling page.
Warning list of DVB-S2 Demod Desc Card

CAM card according to the
de-scrambling page.
av
condition
2 FPGA No Response
um

the equipment.
equipment
fail.
S

abnormal.
474 /503

card.
n
io
de-scrambling page.
8
xxx
CAM Card x No Inserted
is
successfully de-scrambled.
The de-scrambling switch is
turned on and the
inserted.
correct.
Insert the CAM card in
corresponding slot.
av
um

replace the same.
S

de-scrambling page.
475 /503
37. Warning list of ABS-S Demod Desc Card

condition
2 FPGA No Response
n
the equipment.
io
equipment
fail.
3 FPGA
Failure
Configuration
is
abnormal.
Reason:
card
failed logic
configuration file
and
av
um

card.
S

de-scrambling page.
xxx successfully de-scrambled. correct.
476 /503

inserted.
n
replace the same.
io
38.
is
Warning list of 4-Ch.DVB-T2 Demod Card
Warning display Warning reason/triggering

de-scrambling page.
Resolution
av
condition
1 Input Unlock The demodulation switch Check whether the input
um

the equipment.
equipment
fail.
S

abnormal.
477 /503

4 Input Abnormal When the demodulation Wait the board card to
demodulation data.
39. Warning list of 4-Ch.DVB-S2 Demod card
n
Demodulation correlation
io
condition
2 FPGA No Response is
Reason:
the equipment.
av
equipment
fail.
um
abnormal.
S

demodulation data.
478 /503
40. Warning list of DVB-S2 Demod Card

condition
n
io
the equipment.
equipment
fail.
3 FPGA Configuration
is
abnormal.

av
um

demodulation data.
41. Warning list of ISDB-T Demod Card

condition
S

479 /503
and the logical operation of the equipment.

2) The equipment operation equipment
fail.
n
abnormal.
io
42.
is
demodulation data.
Warning list of 8VSB Demod Card

av
condition
um

the equipment.
equipment
S
fail.
abnormal.
480 /503

demodulation data.
n
de-scrambling page.
io
6 BISS Program List The Program list has Click the “Apply” on the
Changed (Check Please) changed. BISS Descrambling
Program Setting page.
43. Warning list of DTMB Demod Card
1
Warning display
Input Unlock
is
condition
The demodulation switch
and the Warning switch of
Resolution

source signal is normal and
av
um
the equipment.
equipment
fail.
abnormal.
S

table content is wrong, it is
481 /503
likely that the tuner mistake equipment.

demodulation data.
44. Warning list of StatMux4 Card

condition
n
io
the equipment.
is
fail.
equipment
av
abnormal.
um

again or the normal
off.
4 Output overflow Reason: the data from the Check whether the code
S

value.
output system is
excessively low.
482 /503

large.
n
outputted.
6 Program Scrambled Reason: the scrambled Remove the scrambling
program is combined with program. C707 process no
the non-directly-connected scrambling program.
io
program.
45. Warning list of CA01B Switch Card
1 FPGA No Response
is
condition
Reason:
the equipment.
av
equipment
fail.
abnormal.
um
2 PSI Tables Sent Abnormal Reason: PSI disclosure wait Check whether the task
is time-out. has occupied excessive
resources (check by the
Triggering: the manual
R&D staff)
triggering is unable to be
realized. Generally, it is
caused by the busy system
task.
3 Port p Unlock Reason: the warning switch Check whether the input is
is turned on the input port is normal and whether the
S
not synchronized. cable wire is complete.

Triggering: pull up input or
the port parameter setting is
wrong
4 Port p PID 1/2 Bitrate Reason: the input is Check whether the PID
Underflow switched on and the code code rate range is
rate of port PID1 (PID 2) is appropriate. Check
less than the minimum code whether the input stream is
483 /503
rate setting. normal.

Triggering: increase the
minimum code rate of PID
until it is greater than the
PID code rate or decrease
the maximum code rate until
it is less than the PID code
rate.
5 Port p Program i Video Reason: the checked Check whether the input
n
Abnomal program i video is the color video is the color bar.
bar. Generally, the input of the
coding card is cut off and
the coding card is
program and video
configured to be the cut-off
io
abnormality monitoring
color bar output.
switch, turn of the warning
switch, check the program i
monitoring and ensure that
the inputted video is the
color bar.
6 Port p Program i Audio
Abnomal
is
Reason:
Triggering:
program
abnormality
the
open
and
checked
program i audio is mute.
the
audio
monitoring
audio is mute. Generally,
the input of the coding card
is cut off and the coding
card is configured to be the
mute cut-off output.
av
the inputted audio is mute.
um

again or the normal
off.
S

value.
output system is
excessively low.
484 /503
46. Warning list of ASI Switch Card Type-D

condition
the equipment.
n
equipment
fail.
io
abnormal.
2 Port p Unlock Reason: the warning switch Check whether the input is
is turned on the input port is normal and whether the
3 Card N Port 1/2/3 Effective

is
not synchronized.
wrong
Reason: the input is
cable wire is complete.
Adjust the code rate range

av
Bitrate Abnormal switched on and the so that the effective code
Effective Bitrate of port rate is between its
exceeds the set code rate maximum and minimum
range. values.
minimum code rate of port
Effective Bitrate or decrease
um

it is less than the Effective
Bitrate.
4 Port p PID 1/2 Bitrate Reason: the input is Check whether the PID
Underflow switched on and the code code rate range is
rate of port PID1 (PID 2) appropriate. Check
exceeds the set code rate whether the input stream is
range. normal.
minimum code rate of PID
S
PID code rate or decrease

it is less than the PID code
rate.
5 Port p Program i Video Reason: the checked Check whether the input
Abnomal program i video is the color video is the color bar.
bar. Generally, the input of the
coding card is cut off and
485 /503
program and video the coding card is

abnormality monitoring configured to be the cut-off
switch, turn of the warning color bar output.
the inputted video is the
color bar.
6 Port p Program i Audio Reason: the checked Check whether the input
Abnomal program i audio is mute. audio is mute. Generally,
the input of the coding card
n
is cut off and the coding
program and audio
card is configured to be the
abnormality monitoring
mute cut-off output.
io
the inputted audio is mute.
is
outputted only.
off.
mapping is available. If the
again or the normal
av
um

value.
output system is
excessively low.
S
486 /503
47. Warning list of DS3 Switch Card

condition
1 Port Bitrate Underflow Reason: the input is Check whether the PID
switched on and the code range is appropriate and
rate of port PID is less than whether the minimum code
the minimum code rate rate is excessively high.
setting. Check whether the input
n
stream is normal.
Triggering: the PID range is
narrowed such that the PID
code rate is less than the
minimum code rate.
io
2 Port Sync Error Reason: the input channel Check whether the input is
is turned on and the input normal. If yes, check
port is not synchronized. whether the port parameter
is identical to the input
stream.
wrong
3 FPGA
Failure
Configuration
is
card
configuration file
and
av
4 Port Decode Error Reason: the RS decoding is Check whether the source
wrong. end setting and the
receiving end setting are
Triggering: the input
consistent.
channel is turned on and
the source end RS code is
switched on, the input RS
um
decoding function of DS3

three-to-two switch card is
switched on and the source
end and the DS3
three-to-two switch card
have different interleaving
coding settings. Or, the
source end RS coding is
switched off, the output
packet length setting is 204
and the RS coding function
S
of switch card is switched

on.
5 Switch To Port 2 Reason: the output source Manually switched to port 1
is in the automatic mode. or check the input of the
When the channel 1 is input port 1 to ensure that
abnormal, while the channel the input is normal and no
2 is normal, it will automatic warning is given.
switch to the channel 2.
487 /503
Triggering: the automatic

switch mode is set. The
input port 1 is pulled up and
the input port 2 is remained
normal.
6 Switch To Port 3 Reason: the output source Manually switched to port 1
is in the automatic mode. or check the input of the
When the channels 1 and 2 input port 1 to ensure that
are abnormal, while the the input is normal and no
channel 3 is normal, it will warning is given.
n
automatic switch to the
channel 3.
io
input ports 1 and 2 are
pulled up and the input port
3 is remained normal.
7 No Input Reason: the three input Check whether the three
routes are abnormal or routes are totally abnormal
turned off and there are not or turned off. Modify the
is
output given.
Triggering: the three input
routes are turned off or the
parameter is modified such
that the abnormality is
parameter to ensure at
least
abnormal.
one route is
av
caused. Or, the manual
output route is chosen and
the input of this route is
turned off.
48. Warning list of RF Switch Card
Hardware versions earlier than 1.4

um

condition
1 Port Bitrate Underflow Reason: the input is Check whether the PID
rate of port PID is less than whether the minimum code
the minimum code rate rate is excessively high.
setting. Check whether the input
stream is normal.
Triggering: the PID range is
S

minimum code rate.
is identical to the input
stream.
wrong
488 /503
3 Port Signal Error Reason: the input signal Set the signal type to be
type and the signal type the digital one or set the RF
setting are inconsistent. parameter of port to be
other values such that the
Triggering: the normal
ports are not synchronized.
digital signal is inputted and
the correct RF parameter to
synchronize the ports. Set
the signal type to be the
analog one.
n
io
5 Port Input No level Reason: no input or the Check whether the
input level is less than modulator output is normal.
85dBuv; If the output is provided,
check whether the input RF
6 Port Input Level Too High

is
Triggering: the input is
pulled up or the modulator
output is turned off.
Reason: the absolute

difference value between
the input level value of the
line is normal and whether
the two ends of tightened.
Check whether the level

switch threshold is low or
whether the input level is
av
port and the reference level excessively high or whether
of the port is greater than the reference level is
the level switch threshold; updated.
level of input RF stream to
be greater than the
reference level and reduce
the level switch threshold.
um
7 Port Input Level a little Reason: the absolute Check whether the level
Low difference value between switch threshold is low or
the input level value of the whether the input level is
port and the reference level low or whether the
of the port is 0.6 times reference level is updated.
greater than the level switch
threshold and less than the
level switch threshold.
Triggering: decrease the
S
be greater than the

8 Port Input Level a little Reason: the absolute Check whether the level
higher difference value between switch threshold is low or
port and the reference level high or whether the
of the port is 0.6 times reference level is updated.
greater than the level switch
489 /503
threshold and less than the

level switch threshold.
be greater than the
9 Port Input Level Too Low Reason: the absolute Check whether the level
difference value between switch threshold is low or
n
port and the reference level excessively low or whether
of the port is greater than the reference level is
the level switch threshold; updated.
io
Triggering: decrease the
be lower than the reference
level and reduce the level
switch threshold.
10 The reference level is not Reason: the reference level It needs to confirm the
11
confirmed manually
Port 1 Switch To Port 2

is
of the port is not confirmed;
Triggering: the daughter
card is reset and no other
operation is made.
Reason: the output source

reference level during the
first use or after resetting
the daughter card.
Manually switch to the main

av
is in the automatic mode. route or check main route
When the main route is input to ensure that the
abnormal, while the backup main route input is normal
route is normal, it will and no warning is given. In
automatic switch to the addition, it shall ensure that
backup route. the main route is switched
on with priority.
um
main route input is pulled up

and the backup route input
is remained normal.
Hardware version 1.4 and later versions

condition
1 Port PID Bitrate Abnormal Reason: the input is Check whether the PID
whether the minimum code
S
rate of port PID is

out of the set scope. rate is excessively high.
Triggering: the PID range is stream is normal.
minimum code rate.
490 /503
Triggering: pull up input or is identical to the input

the port parameter setting is stream.
wrong
3 FPGA No Response Reason: failed logic Replace the correct logical
n
4 Port level Abnormal Reason: The monitoring Check whether the input
level of the card is not source signal is normal and
between the Minimal Level check whether the signal
and the Maximal Level wire is connected.
io
5 Switch To Backup Port Reason: the output source Manually switch to the main
is in the automatic mode. route or check main route
When the main route is input to ensure that the
abnormal, while the backup main route input is normal
route is normal, it will and no warning is given. In
automatic switch to the addition, it shall ensure that
backup route. the main route is switched
is
is remained normal.
on with priority.
av
49. Warning list of Demod Switch Card

condition
1 Channel PID Bitrate Reason: the input is Check whether the PID
Abnormal switched on and the code range is appropriate and
rate of Channel PID is whether the minimum code
um
out of the set scope. rate is excessively high.

Triggering: the PID range is stream is normal.
minimum code rate.
2 Channel Sys Rate Reason: the input is Check whether the system
Abnormal switched on and the system code rate range is
code rate of Channel is appropriate and whether
out of the set scope. the minimum code rate is
excessively high. Check
S
Triggering: the system code whether the input stream is

rate range is narrowed such normal.
that the PID code rate is
less than the minimum code
rate.
3 Channel Tuner Input Reason: the input channel Check whether the input is
Unlock is turned on and the input normal. If yes, check
Channel is not whether the Channel
synchronized. parameter is identical to the
491 /503
Triggering: pull up input or input stream.

the Channel parameter
setting is wrong
4 FPGA No Response Reason: failed logic Replace the correct logical
n
5 Port level Abnormal Reason: The monitoring Check whether the input
level of the card is not source signal is normal and
between the Minimal Level check whether the signal
and the Maximal Level wire is connected.
io
6 Port Freq Abnormal Reason: the detected Check whether the PID
frequency point of the port range or the system code
is abnormal. rate range is appropriate.
Triggering: pull up input, Check whether the input
change the system code stream is normal.
rate range or the PID range.
7 Switch To Backup Port Reason: the output source Manually switch to the main
is
is in the automatic mode.
When the main route is
abnormal, while the backup
route is normal, it will
automatic switch to the
backup route.
route or check main route
input to ensure that the
main route input is normal
and no warning is given. In
addition, it shall ensure that
the main route is switched
av
on with priority.
is remained normal.
50. Warning list of T2MI Replacer Card

um

condition
the equipment.
equipment
2) The equipment
S

hardware may fail.
abnormal.
492 /503

3 Input Scrambled Reason: the inputted T2MI Check whether the input
stream is scrambled; source is scrambled
Triggering: one scrambled
T2MI stream is found.
n
4 Group Input No Input Reason: the code rate of Check whether the input
T2MI input system is 0; source is correct
Triggering: cut off the input
source
io
5 ASI Input Port No Total Reason: the port is Check whether the valid
Bitrate involved in the multiplex, code rate is provided on the
is
Triggering: when

the

input source.
av
is left only.
6 ASI Output Port No Total Reason: the data with the Check whether the code
Bitrate input card is rate setting of the output
um
Triggering: the data of

back board is sent to this
port, but the code rate
setting of the output
system is 0.
7 Group Port No Total Bitrate Reason: the code rate Check the code rate setting
outputted to the PLP outputted to the PLP
system of back board is 0; system of back board
Triggering : the code rate
outputted to the PLP
S
system of back board is

set to be 0;
493 /503
51. Warning list of T2MI De-encap. Card

condition
the equipment.
n
equipment
2) The equipment
hardware may fail.
io
abnormal.
is
card
configuration file
and
av
3 Input Scrambled Reason: the inputted T2MI Check whether the input
stream is scrambled; source is scrambled. The
scrambled stream cannot
Triggering: use the T2MI
be used for PLP
stream to conduct the test
replacement.
4 Input No Total Bitrate Reason: the port is Check whether the valid
um

input source.
is left only.
S
5 Input Sync Error Reason: the port input is Check whether the input
out of synchronization; source is correct
input system and fails in
synchronization to conduct
the test
494 /503
6 Input No Effective Bitrate Reason: no valid code rate Check whether the valid
in inputted from the port; code rate is available in the
input source
input system and has no
invalid code rate to
conduct the test
7 Input Bitrate Overflow Reason: the inputted Detect whether the
n
sufficient data. The port is source is normal.
involved in the multiplex
bit 1 is received.
the hardware fails
io
FPGA.
8 Output Bitrate Overflow Reason: the valid code Check whether the code
rate outputted by PLP rate in PLP of input source
is
after replacement is higher
than the system code rate;
Triggering: use one PLP
valid code rate which is
higher than the T2MI
stream of system code
is correct
av
rate
9 Output No Effective Bitrate Reason: no valid code rate Check the input source
is outputted from the port;
without any valid code rate
to conduct the test
um
10 Code Rate Not Equal Reason: the PLP coding Replace the input source or
rates for replacement of substitute the PLP
port 1 and 2 are equivalent
to each other;
Triggering: find two
sources with different PLP
code rate to make the
replacement.
11 Group PLP Not Exist Reason: one or two PLPs Check the input source or
used for replacement in replace the input source
S
the port 1 and port 2 is

unavailable.
Triggering: when the PLP
replacement is made, pull
up one input source or
replace one input source
which does not have any
PLP.
495 /503
52. Warning list of Stream Processing Card

condition
n
io
the equipment.
equipment
fail.
3 System Close
is
abnormal.
Reason: 1) Choose the “System
av
Switch” on the “Delayer
Heartbeat information System” page to be “On”
received normally, but the
“System Switch” is off
4 Heartbeat Lost Reason: 1) Provide the heartbeat
information input
The “System Switch” is off, 2) Check the network
but no heartbeat information connection status of device
received
um
5 Output No Effective Bitrate Reason: 1) Check the output

2) Check the heartbeat
When the “Switch” on the information and “System
“Delayer Config” page is Switch”
“On”: 3) Check the network
1) If there is program connection status of card in
multiplexed to the output the IP mode.
port of this card and the
output rate of “Mux->Mux”
and “Mux->IP” mode is less
S
than 800K, the device will

give an alarm
2) If the output rate of
“IP->IP” mode is less than
800K, the device will give
an alarm
6 Input No Effective Bitrate Reason: 1) Check the input
2) Check the heartbeat
When the “Switch” on the information and “System
“Delayer Config” page is Switch”
496 /503
“On”: 3) Check the network

connection status of card in
1) If there is program
the IP mode.
multiplexed to the output
port of this card and the
input rate of “Mux->Mux”
and “Mux->IP” mode is less
than 800K, the device will
give an alarm
2) If the input rate of
“IP->IP” mode is less than
n
800K, the device will give
an alarm
7 Output Bitrate Overflow Reason: 1) Check whether total
effective rate of all the five
The total effective rate of all
io
delay outputs exceeds the
the five delay outputs in threshold
“IP->IP” mode exceeds
100Mbps, or the total
effective rate in “Mux->Mux”
mode and “Mux->IP” mode
exceeds 40Mbps.
8 No Response
is
Reason:
The working status of card
is abnormal
1)The card is not fully boot
up, when the device has
1)The alarm will disappear,
when the card is fully boot
up;
2) Upload the correct FPGA
configuration file
restart the device.
and
av
just started
2) Hardware of the card has
been damaged, or the
logical operation of card is
wrong.
53. Warning list of EPG Processing Card

um

condition
1 FPGAConfiguration Failure Reason: failed logic Replace the correct logical
2 Module No Response Reason: the Module of Upgrade the program。
S
3 Program No. x FILE-NULL Reason: the EPG file Modify the configuration file
being used is not found in name or upload the
the ftp. corresponding file and
reapply.
Triggering condition: the
configuration file name
does not exist.
4 Program No. x OUT-TIME Reason: the time Check the valid time of the
information in the EPG file.
497 /503
configuration EPG file

expires.
5 Program No. x Error Reason: the configuration Replace the correct file
EPG file format error.
6 Data No. x FILE-NULL Reason: the Data file Modify the configuration file
being used is not found in name or upload the
the ftp. corresponding file and
reapply.
configuration file name
does not exist.
n
7 Data No. x Error Reason: the configuration Replace the correct file
EPG file format error.
54. Warning list of EMR
io
condition
1 BackBoard FPGA 1/2/3 Reason: logic Replace the correct logical
Configuration Failure configuration fails configuration file
2 BackBoard
Error
SNTP Sync
is
Reason: the
synchronization with the
main and backup clock
Check whether the IP
setting of the EMR server is
correct and whether all
av
server fails. NTP services on the server
are switched on.
clock synchronization
server IP address is wrong
or relevant service of
server is switched off.
3 BackBoard Power Unit 1/2 Reason: the output Set the power source
um
Abnormal voltage of power source configuration in the

module exceeds the routine->other page to be
normal range. identical to that of the real
power source
Triggering: the dual power
source is chosen, but only
power source is available.
Or, the power source 1/2
is chosen, but only the
power source 2/1 is
available.
S
4 BackBoard Fan 1/2 Reason: the fan revolving Visually judge whether the
Abnormal speed exceeds 50% of the fan is rotated or whether
revolving speed setting or the revolving speed is high;
is less than 50% of the check whether the power
revolving speed setting. line of the fan is connected
or loosen; or replace the
Triggering condition: EMR
new fan;
fails to detect the revolving
speed of fan
5 BackBoard Boot Abnormal: Reason: failure to read It needs to programm the
498 /503
Read EEPROM Failed EEPROM on back board correct configuration

information on EEPROM
on the back board when
configuration information
delivering the back board.
is not correctly
Upgrade to the new
programmed on the
version.
EEPROM of back board or
the drive program is not
matched.
6 BackBoard Boot Abnormal: Reason: the EEPROM It needs to programm the
n
EEPROM ID Invalid configuration information correct configuration
of back board is wrong. information on EEPROM
on the back board when
Triggering condition: no
delivering the back board.
configuration information
io
is correctly programmed
on EEPROM on
backboard.
7 BackBoard Boot Abnormal: Reason: EEPROM model Return to the factory and
EEPROM Not Encrypted of back board is wrong. replace (only applicable for
a small quantity of devices
8
is
BackBoard Boot Abnormal:
Time Authorization Error
EEPROM model of back
board is wrong or the drive
program is wrong.
Reason: the
authorization is due.
time
sold oversea, which has
been delivered a short time
ago)
Purchase the new time

authorization again (only
av
applicable for the version
using the time
operation time of
authorization)
equipment exceeds the
authorization time.
9 BackBoard Boot Abnormal: Reason: fails to read MAC It needs to programm the
Read MAC Failed on back board correct MAC address on
the backboard when being
Triggering condition: MAC
um
delivered.
address is not correctly
programmed on the
backboard
10 BackBoard Boot Abnormal: Reason: the MAC on the It needs to programm the
MAC Invalid back board and the correct MAC addresses on
primary Gigabit card is not the main control Ethernet
valid completely. port on the back board and
four GbE Ethernet ports
Triggering condition: total
when delivering.
5 MAC addresses of the
back board and the
S
primary Gigabit cars are

not completely valid.
499 /503
55. Warning list of Service Backup

condition
1 CardX GbEX PortX Reason: when the backup Check whether the
Program X Main Program warning switch is turned programs of the main route
Bitrate Abnormal on, the main route are normal and check
program code rate in the whether the code rate
program backup is beyond threshold value settings of
n
the threshold value range. program are abnormal.
backup warning switch,
pull up the main route
io
program input or set the
threshold value beyond
the real program code
rate.
2 CardX PortX ProgramX Reason: when the backup Check whether the
Main Program Bitrate warning switch is turned programs of the main route
Abnormal
is on, the main route

program code rate in the
program backup is beyond
the threshold value range.
are normal and check
whether the code rate
threshold value settings of
program are abnormal.
av
pull up the main route
rate.
3 CardX GbEX PortX Reason: when the backup Check whether the backup
Program X Backup Program warning switch is turned programs are normal and
Bitrate Abnormal on, the backup program check whether the code
um
code rate in the program rate threshold value

backup is beyond the settings of program are
threshold value range. abnormal.
pull up the backup
rate.
S
4 CardX PortX ProgramX Reason: when the backup Check whether the backup
Backup Program Bitrate warning switch is turned programs are normal and
Abnormal on, the backup program check whether the code
code rate in the program rate threshold value
backup is beyond the settings of program are
threshold value range. abnormal.
pull up the backup
500 /503

rate.
5 Program backup Output Reason: when the backup Check whether the
CardX GbEX PortX warning switch is turned programs of the main route
Program X Main Program on, the main route are normal and check
Switch to Backup Program program code rate in the whether the code rate
program backup is normal, threshold value settings of
the program code rate in program are abnormal.
n
the backup route is
abnormal and the backup
route is switched on.
Triggering: switch on the
io
set the backup mode to
the the non-manual main
route or backup route, pull
up the main route program
input or set the code rate
6 Program backup Output

CardX PortX Program X
Main Program Switch to
is threshold value beyond
the program code rate of
the main route.
Reason: when the backup

warning switch is turned
on, the main route
Check whether
are normal and check

the
programs of the main route
av
Backup Program program code rate in the whether the code rate
program backup is normal, threshold value settings of
the program code rate in program are abnormal.
the backup route is
abnormal and the backup
route is switched on.
Triggering: turn on the
um
set the backup mode to

the the non-manual main
route or backup route, pull
up the main route program
input or set the code rate
the program code rate of
the main route.
S
501 /503
56. Warning list of Port Backup

condition
1 CardX GbEX PortX Bitrate Reason: when the backup Check whether the valid
Abnormal warning switch is turned code rate of multiplex or
on the port multiplex or the transparent transmission is
valid code rate of normal; set the code rate
transparent-transmission threshold value in the
n
output is beyond the reasonable range.
threshold value.
Triggering: after turning on
the backup warning switch
io
and multiplexing the port,
setting of the threshold
value is greater than the
real code rate or the
maximum code rate of
threshold value is less
2 CardX
Abnormal
PortX Bitrate is
than the real code rate.
Reason: when the backup

warning switch is turned
on the port multiplex or the
valid code rate of
Check whether the valid
code rate of multiplex or
transparent transmission is
normal; set the code rate
av
transparent-transmission threshold value in the
output is beyond the reasonable range.
threshold value.
Triggering: after opening
the backup warning switch
and multiplexing the port,
setting of the threshold
um
value is greater than the

real code rate or the
maximum code rate of
threshold value is less
than the real code rate.
3 Port backup Main CardX Reason: when the backup Check whether the main
GbEX PortX Switch to warning switch is turned route input is normal; set
BackupCardX GbEX PortX on and the port backup the code rate threshold
switch conditions are value in the reasonable
realized, the backup route range.
shall be switched on.
S

set the backup mode to be
the non-manual main
route or backup route. The
main route and the backup
route are normally
inputted and the main
502 /503
route input is pulled up.

PortX Switch to warning switch is turned route input is normal; set
BackupCardX PortX on and the port backup the code rate threshold
n
the non-manual main
route are normally
io
GbEX PortX Switch to warning switch is turned route input is normal; set
BackupCardX PortX on and the port backup the code rate threshold
is
realized, the backup route
range.
av
the non-manual main
route are normally
PortX Switch to warning switch is turned route input is normal; set
um
BackupCardX GbEX PortX on and the port backup the code rate threshold
the non-manual main
route are normally
S
inputted and the mian

503 /503

EMR3.0 Operation GuideV4.0.30

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EMR3.0 Operation GuideV4.0.30

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

EMR3.0 Operation GuideV4.0.30

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SUMAVISION

SUMAVISION TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

The product in this manual is:

 Click: Quickly press and release a mouse button.

District, Beijing, CHINA, 100085

1.1 NETWORK SOLUTION ................................................................................................................ 1

CHAPTER 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS .................................................................................. 6

2.1 PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION ........................................................................................................ 6

CHAPTER 3 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ..................................................................................... 11

3.1 OUTLINE DIMENSIONS ............................................................................................................ 11

CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND DEBUGGING .................................................................. 15

4.1 UNPACKING AND CHECKING ................................................................................................... 15

4.3 STEPS AND METHODS OF INSTALLATION ................................................................................. 15

CHAPTER 5 OPERATING METHODS ...................................................................................... 18

5.1 WEB NETWORK MANAGEMENT .............................................................................................. 18

5.2 SNMP NETWORK MANAGEMENT ........................................................................................... 33

5.3.4 ASI 5InOut Card ................................................................................................................ 59

5.3.30 ANA DEC TRC Card ................................................................................................... 172

5.3.37 DVB-S2 Demod Desc Card ......................................................................................... 215

5.3.44 DTMB Demod Card ..................................................................................................... 261

6.1 TABLE EDITING FUNCTION .................................................................................................... 355

CHAPTER 7 FAULT ANALYSIS AND TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................ 414

7.1 ALARM INFORMATION .......................................................................................................... 414

CHAPTER 8 MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................. 416

8.1 MAINTENANCE METHOD ....................................................................................................... 416

8.4 MONTHLY MAINTENANCE ..................................................................................................... 418

CHAPTER 9 STORAGE AND TRANSPORT ........................................................................... 420

9.1 STORAGE .............................................................................................................................. 420

9.2 TRANSPORT .......................................................................................................................... 420

ANNEX A- INTERFACE PARAMETER .................................................................................... 421

ANNEX B- DEVICE UPGRADE ................................................................................................. 425

ANNEX C- UPGRADE OF SPECIAL BOARD CARD ............................................................ 428

1. DSP DRIVE UPGRADING METHOD FOR SD-ADEC CARD ........................................................... 428

ANNEX D- WARNING INFORMATION ..................................................................................... 429

19. WARNING LIST OF DVI ENC CARD ........................................................................................ 457

26. WARNING LIST OF AVS ENC TRC CARD .............................................................................. 462

33. WARNING LIST OF DVB-S2 DESC CARD ............................................................................... 470

Fig. 1-1 EMR Networking Diagram

and CAS, and modulated, finally transmitted on HFC network.

1.2 Main Performance Parameters

 Modularized plug-in design, 1U chassis and 6 slots;

Supports diversified user interfaces and managements: support Web control,

 IP encapsulation means: TS over RTP/UDP, TS packet length input adapts to

 Support various network management protocols as ARP, ICMP,

 Support the real-time code rate monitoring function of Internet access;

 Support the senior functions of IEEE 802.Q VLAN Tagging;

 Support the table preview and store function;

 Have the TDT/TOT table transmission function;

 Independent scrambling module, independent control, simple and convenient

 Scrambling for 542 ports at most;

 Maximum 6,144 ECMs;

 EIS supports DVB and OpenCAS standards;

 Several ports can use the same EMM;

 Each port supports the simulcrypt of six CASs;

 Descrambling and demodulating module

 Have the CAM descrambling, BISS-1/E descrambling function;

 Support the DVB-C/S/S2/T/T2 demodulation;

 Demodulate QPSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 128QAM, 256QAM, 16APSK and

 Compatible to C/Ku wave band;

 Monitor signal strength, signal to noise ratio and error rate;